BIBLIOTHECA INDICA WORK NO, 278 PRAKRTA-KALPATARU Wirn Inrropucrion, Excuisn TRANSLATION, NOTEs, Anp APPENDIXES RAMASARMAN’S PRAKRTA-KALPATARU Wir Inrropuction, TRANSLATION Anp NOTES and also with PURUSOTTAMA-DEVA’S PRAKRTANUSASANA, LANKESVARA’S PRAKRTA-KAMADIHENU, AND THE PRAKRTA-LAKSANA IN THE VISNUDHARMOTTARA EDITED BY MANOMOHAN GHOSH, M.A., Ph, D, THE ASIATIC SOCIETY 1 PARK STREET CALCUTTA. 1954 PREFACE Lhe publication of a new edition of Ramagarman’s Prakiti-kalpatary was contemplated by the Asiatie Society as early as 1950, and the present editor was asked to undertake the work. But as he was then busy seeing through the press the first volume of the translation of the Mityasistra ( Bibliotheca Indica; No. 272) the work had to be postponed. Sometime afterwards the press copy of the text was prepared. Professor Suniti Kumar Chatterji, when he came to know of this, suggested that the text should be provided with a translation. Very Gladly and thankfully the editor accepted his valuable suggestion and began to work. Though he was helped in this matter by the previous translators of the work, it took some more time to prepare a completely revised translation of the text which was considerably changed in a good number of passages due mostly to the help it received from a newly discovered manuscript and hence the work could not be sent to the press before the beginning of 1953. In preparing this volume the editor has been greatly helped by Professor 8. K. De who very kindly lent him a printed copy of the Prakrta-sarvasva of Markandeya. Authorities of the India Office Library are to be thanked for lending a manuscript and also an incomplete printed copy of the same work. The editor would also like to record here his most sincere thanks to Professor J. M. Sen, General Seerctary of the Asiatic Socicty. The editor apologises to the readers for some misprints that have crept into this volume. ‘Tho readers are requested to kindly note the corrections. May 4, 1954, Manomonan GHOosH । अ ABBREVIATIONS AMy.= Ardhamagadhi. AMSJV.=Sir Silver Jubilee Volumes. Asutosh Mookerjec Ap. = Apabhramsa, Abh.== Abhiri. Ay. = Avanti. Beng. = Bengali. Ca =Candali. v==The ms of the Prikrlakatpataru as read by Grierson. Geiger.=Pali Literature and Langu- age by Geiger. or his Pkt. 1८. = Hemacandra Grammar. ¢ Ant.=Indian Antiquary. JRAS.=Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society: m.=The new ms. of the Prakrta- kalpataru. M. = Maharastri. Myg.= Magadhi. Mk.= Markandeya. n.==The ms. of the Prakr/akalpataru as read by Nitti-Dolci. Nitti. = Nitti-Dole. OB.=Old Bengali. 74. = 2916861 PSM. = Pavasaddamahannavo—by Haragobinda Das Scth. Pu.=Purusottamadeva. NS. = Mat yasastra. RT.=Ramasarman Tarkavagisa Bhattacarya. S. = Sauraseni. Sab. =Sabari Sak.=Sakari. Tak.=Takki. Vr.=Vararuci or his Pkt. grammar. CONTENTS Preface Abbreviations INTRODUCTION 1. Earlier studies on the work ... vos 11. = Diseovery of a New Manuscript 11711, The Author and his Date IV. The Souree of his Work V. Importance of the Work Vi. The Present Edition Sanskrit Text with the Commentary 1101151) Translation and Notes APPENDIX - oo iF PURUSOTTAMA-DEVA’S PRAKRTANUSASANA I. LANKESVARA’S PRAKRTAKAMADHENU 11. PRAKRTALAKSANA WITH TRANSLATION INDEX eos eve eee eae Corrections and Additions Page VI Vi AY A VIII 11] 1 84 Introduction. I. Earlier Studies on the Work Though the Prakrta-kalpataru was utilized by Lassen? as early as 1837, its real worth was not understood at that time. Pischel? too did not attach more value to it than any Other work of its class. But in 1922 the late Sir George A. Grierson in his article on the “ApabhramSa stavakas of Rama- Sarman” laid stress on the importance of this work’, Since then he went on working most patiently on the ( till then ) unique ms, of the Prakrta-kalpataru in the India Office Library‘, which was full of gross blunders and was very difficult to read, But with the help of Prof. H. Jacobi and Prof. Suniti Kumar Chatterji he published gradually excellent critical editions ( with notes and translation ) of the different parts of the work®, compri- sing only its half, and the chapters which did not receive such attention were 1-7 and 9 of the first «akha, which treated the Maharastri dialect These chapters, however, were later on care- fully studied and edited by the late Madame L. Nitti-Dolci® whose death in the prime of her life deprived Pkt. scholarship of one of its most devoted and promising votaries. II. Discovery of a New Manuscript These were the means at the disposal of Prakritists for studying the contents of the Pralkrta-kalpataru till 1944 when \Instttytions Linguae Pracritice, p. 19ff. and 489ff. Ref. Nitti. SGrammuatrk,§ 41. 87. Ant, Vol. 51, 1922, pp. ‘See the Calalogue of the Skt. Mss. in the Library of the India Office, Part IJ, p. 268, London, 1889. — « 8Sakha I, chapter VIII, (Dhatvadesa) Memoirs of the Astattc Society of Bengal No. VIII. 1924, Sakha JI, ( 1315525 and Vibbasa ) in the 7. Ant, 1927-1928, Sakha II, chapters 1-2 ( Apabhraméa ) in the 7. Amt 1922-1928, chapter 3 (Paigici) in Sir Asulosh Mookerjee Silver Jubilee Volumes, VII, Part 2. pp, 119-141, Caleutta, 1925, ‘dition de la Premier Sakha du Prakrta-kalpataru des Rama-Sarman, P—i INTRODUCTION x the present editor received from one of his pupils Sri Jitendra Nath Bhattacharya’, a newly discovered ms. of the work. On a careful examination of this ms®, it appeared that the existing edition of the different parts of the Pralrta-kalpataru may be considerably improved with its help. ‘This is the chief reason for undertaking the present work. Another source. of improvement of the Prakrtakalpataru has been the Prakrla- nusasand of Purusottumadeva® discovered some years ago. Some of the siitras of this work, seem to occur without any change in some stanzas of Ramagarman'®. Considering the antiquity of this lastenamed author this help should be considered very valuable. Hence the present editor has made a fresh attempt to edit the Prakyta kalpataru'?, The m. or the newly discovered ms. of the 72114 kalpataru having lacunae in common with the India Office ms.*? appears to have descended from the same archetype, and both the mss, generally share the following graphic peculiarities **. Bibliothique de l’ecole des Hautes Etudes, Paris, 1959. "He took his M.A., degree of the Calcutta University in Sanskrit ( with Prakrit ) in 1944. This ms. has been presented by the editor to the Asiatic Society, ( Calentta ). ‘It has been described below. °This is now available in an excellent edition giving the romanized text and French translation; notes and introduction ( Le Prakrtanusasana de Purusottama, Cahkters de la Soctely Astatic, No. VI. Paris, 1938). This has been reproduced (in Devanagari ) in the Appendix. A part of the text (Ch. IX-XX) has also been reprinted with translation by D. C. Sirear in his Grammar of the Prakrit Language, Caleutta, 1943, pp, 1€6-120. 10The supposed relation of present work with the Prakria kamadhenu of Lankegvara has also been verified here with the help of its first edition published in the Mew Zndian Antiquary, Vol. VIII. (1946) pp, 37-39. This too has been reproduced (in Devanagari) in the Appendix III. 119९९ II. 1. 11, 19 and 20. 1?This has been indicated in this work by means of two symbols. The letter ‘g’ has been used for the portion uscd by Grierson, and ‘n’ for the portion used by Nitti-Dolci. १७९९ J Ant. Vol LI. ( 1922 ) pp. 14-165. XI INTRODUCTION (1) Little or no distinction between non-initial @ त) and non¢ initial ¢ (T ). (2) The twocharacters @ ४ (initial ) and & Aa are frequently con- founded. (3) Similarly © ४ (initial ) and छ are confounded. (8a) And छ 7 (initial ) aud छ 6/८ are similarly confounded,!* (4) 4 é Cinitial ) is confounded with क fra. (5) ७ ¢ Cinitial ) 18 confounded with छ ४८८ and again both often confounded with ‘8 244. (6) A subjoined to a consonant often looks like 2 non-initial, and the latter may sometimes stand for non-initial 2. (7) धुं ^ and & ८८ are often confounded. (8) maand म na@ are often confounded, So are 4 2८ and म Za. (9) नं Jaand & da are often so written that it is not easy to dis- tinguish between them. | (10) 4 is employed indiscriminately for da, va, ra, ca and {041 3. (11) 2 stra is invariably written as सृ छं stra. (1४) ष्ट sthais also used for ह Az. (12) G drt indicates hra also. (14) Ina few cases @ sz and % 2८ and बू mize arc interchangeable! °. Though there are points of similarity, m. as we have said is better than the India Office ms. Besides giving better readings of the text, it gives in complete form the colophon which 15 as follows : भ धिभ॑वेदु यत्य कटेस्कनेस्वा ( sea नस्वा ) -दो स्वादु काव्यस्य गिरं च बोधम्‌ | वत्येव तुष्टये Tea एपथे- रारोपित्तः कर्पतरस्प्शाखः ॥ नंनम्य रम्बोगुरपादपश्रं दस्त्यश्रभूपाएमिते शकाष्दे । ध्री रामङष्णोऽभ्यशिखत्‌ प्रयह्नात्‌ न्रित्षाखिनं प्राकूतकल्पवद्तम्‌ ॥ The first half of the first stanza and the second half of the second stanza of the colophon are wanting in the India Office ms, And fresh light on the date of Ramagarman and his work comes from the completed second stanza which records the date of writing of the archetype of the two ms. In the absence of the second halt 4¢This has not been noticed by Grierson. 16Confusion of व्‌ withca and (ka has not been noticed by Grierson. ) 11118 also has not been noticed by Grierson. INTRODUCTION XII of the second stanza one might consider the date given in it as indicating the time of its composition. In fact Nitti-Dolci in her in- troduction to the edition of the first Sikha of the Prakrtakalpataru adopted such a view’?. Her predecessors, Lassen and Sir George Grierson were however not inclined to attach the date dantyabhra- bhitpalumite ६4277 ( 1608 saka, 1686 A.C. ) to the writing of the ms., even when positive information, as we now posscss, was then non-existent? ®, III. The Author and his Date The mistaken idea that the author of the Prakriakulpataru is Rima Tarkavagisa (instead of the real name Ramagarman Bhattacirya ) has been refuted by Grierson on the basis of the colophons of the three main divisions of the work*®. But he could not say, anything more about the time of Ramasgarman than that our grainmarian “probably flourished not later than the end of the sixteenth century?°.” It seems that Grierson did not consider it worth while to pursue the question any further, though he made titer glia some remarks about relation between the works of Ramagarman and Markandeya??, and these remarks may well be turned to advantage in tackling the same question. Qricrson says of Markandeya that, “He quotes it from an unnamed author possibly Ramagarman.?2” Even if one cannot give any definite evidence on this point, relation between the two authors’ works seems to be pretty close, and it is probably for this reason that Grierson says “his (Ramagarman’s) grammar offers a most valu able control on the grammar of Markandeya?*.” Now there being: some positive information about the date of Markandeya this hint seems to be very useful. From the colophon of Markandeya’s work it is learnt that he had for his patron Mukundadeva, a king of 120. VIE 1१८ And. Vol. L VI. (1927) 0.1, 19012 8 8 tae. 217 Ant. Vol. LI. (1922), p. 14, Vol. LVI. (1927 ), p. 2. AMSJV. Vol. III. ph, 2, ( 1925 ) p, 122, ४२7 Ani, Vol, LV. (1983); } 5. 8° And, Vol, LVI ( 1927), p. ४, [1 INTRODUCTION Orissa. But unfortunately for us there are two kings of this name in the history of Orissa, and one of them flourished about 1664- 1699 A.C. and another much earlier?*. Though the later Mukunda- deva has been often identified as the patron of Markandeya Nitti- Dolci does not accept this view and she seems to have favoured an earlier date for the grammarian on the following grounds?° ; (1) As remarked by Pischel (Grammatik, § 40) none of the authors cited by Markandeya is later than Saka era 964 = 1012-43 A.C., except Vasantaraja, whose date (15th century) is very uncertain. (2) Markandeya attributes to himself the authorship of a Sattaka named Vilasavati. And the same work is mentioned in the Salityadarpana by Visvanatha of the 18th century. But these arguments do not appear to be strong. For according to Nitti-Dolci herself Markandeya quotes from the /?asa- gangadhara?®, This is to be placed in the middle of the 17th century?* and hence the assumption about Markandeya quoting only very early authors is not correct. As for the second argument, the Vilasavatt mentioned in the Sahityadarpan is different from that which Markandeya himself composed. For we learn from the Sahityadarpana that the Vildsavati mentioned in it was a Natyarasaka, whereas Markandeya’s work was a_ Sattaka. Visgvanatha himself defines Sattuka (542) and cites the Karvitra- manjari as its example, and then he defines the Natyarasaka (543) as an one-act play consisting of two or four Junctures ( sandht), and cites the Velasavati as a play of this kind having of four Junctures?®. From the above discussion it is found that Markandeya can- not be earlier than the seventeenth century, and Grierson’s view about his borrowing from Ramagarman seems to be plausible. For ४ ‹ [„. Nitti-Dolei, Zes Grummairiens Prakrits, Paris, 1938, pp. 90-91. * 3 {6 द. 360%, ८८. p. 104. 278. K. De. Set. Poetics, Vol. I. p. 276: ° १866 the Sakst/yadarpana published in Bibliotheca Indica. INTRODUCTION XIV having been cited by [पाद्व प्व Vidyavagisa in the commentary on the Mugdhabodha written in 1639 A. C. °° Ramasarman cannot be later than the end of the sixteenth century. This is the lower limit to his date. | As for the upper limit to Ramagarman’s time one has to consider the relation of his work with that of Purosattomadeva. The following are the relevant facts 3 (1) Ramagarman treats of the different dialects of Pkt. (including Apabhraméa and Puaigaici ) in the same order as does Purusottama. (2) In his treatment of Bhasas and Vibhisas Ramagarman follows almost in the footsteps of Purnsottama, and leaves out very few sutras. Following are the number of sitras which appear to have been ignored by [tamagarman in his treatment of the less important Bhasas and Vibhasas : Pricyi 3 out of 14 ( X. 6,10,11), Avanti 2 out of 10 ( XI, 9,10 ), Magadhi 5 out of 38 ( ATL. 9,11,20,28,38 ), Sakari 4 out of 15 (XIII. 3,4,7,8), Candali 1 out of 9 ( XIV. 7 ), Sabari 2 out of 7 (XV. 3,4), Takki 2 out of 10 ( XVI. 6,7 ), Nagaraka Apa. 39 out of 90 (XVIT 2-4, 6-12, 17. 22-40,44,50,51,53,58,59,68, 2.89 ), Vricada Ap. + out of 28 ( XAVIIL. 511,13, 16 ), Kaikeya Paigicika 6 out of 24 ( XIX. 6,7,13,17,23.24 ), Saurasena 741६ cika 9 out of 20 ( XX. 4.6-8,16,17,18-20 ). Here the largest number of omission, is from the ch. XVII ( Nagiraka Ap ). But it seems that these siitras have been deliberately omitted, for unlike Purusottama KRamagarman considered the Apabliraméga as a sort of Prakrit and hence these stitras were considered superfluous. There are similar cases of omission in case of Bhasas and Vibhisas. And some of the omissions have perhaps been due to Ramaégarman’s using a recension or version of the Prahkrtanusasana different from the one that has come down to us. (3) After considering the facts mentioned above it seems significant that siitras in some chapters of Purusottama’s ०१३. R. Belvalkar, Syslents of Skt. Grammar, Poona, 1915, p. 107 ( Ref, Grierson’s ). AV INTRODUCTION grammar, have been followed by Raimagarman in his metrical work, in almost the same order as they stood in their source. The following are typical instances of such similarity. Pu. XVII. 42-49 correspond to RI. IE, 1. 12-17 ; Pu. XVII. 54-57, 60-68, 71, 73-88, 90 to RI. ILI. 1. 19-80. But even if it may be said that we have here some evidence of Rimagarman’s debt to Purusottama, it gives us only an upper limit to the date of the former, that is, Raimagarman who 18 not earlier than the end of the 11th century, the earliest date assigned to Purusottama. Hence JBiamagarman must have flourished between the beginning of the 12th and the end of the 16th century. In the absence of any positive evidence regarding this, we cannot assign a precise date to him. 1V. Source of the Work The introduction to the Praly;tukalpataru seems to give us some indication of its source. Found in a very bad state of preservation in both the mss., this introduction in its reconstructed form, is as follows : [ भाषाश्न at] प्राच्यभवापि ar[efeat] भाभीरकर्णाटकमध्यदेश्जाः ॥९८)॥ eqry जर arfaeafiad [ याः] [ aarfeat ] काञ्चीभवा च तस्मात्‌ । [ तासां च | wate इतीह सूरा चोपादिशञन्त्यन्र * * *# > ॥१८८१) ॥ [ पेक्ाचि]कम्‌ केकय-श्यरसेनपश्चारगोडप्रमवक्रमेग | तमागधत्राचडयष्रमेदं मादाविद्युद्धं मतमघश्चुदम्‌ ॥११॥ तथा चतुष्पादविष्वुद्धमन्यह अश्च मेकाद्क्षधा तदित्थम्‌ | तेषां स्थितानामविशेषमादौ न सन्ति बोधे रघवोऽप्युपायाः ` ° ॥१२॥ पता रट्धेभ्वरभाषिताषु भाषा slageatfear ये तर्षा प्रमोदाय कृतिमंमेषा सेत्वादिकाम्यानि पदार्थकारी ॥१३॥ पर्ब arare दश हेतुभूतां माषा महाराषटमकष पुरस्तात्‌ | विकपयिष्यामि यथोपदेशं श्रीरामशमाहिमिमां प्रयत्नात्‌ ॥१४॥ इति racer बतुदंशङकुष्ठमेः स्वरूपनिरूपणम्‌ | ° ०1161800 reads छकरा पायाः for एववोऽप्युपायाः ( AMSJV. Vol. 1171, pt. 5. p. 125) and so does Nitti-Dolei ( Introduction to 4 premier sakhi du Prikrta-kalpataru, p, VTS, INTRODUCTION AVI It is apparent that the introduction is incomplete and it lacks the first eight ‘usunuis (stanzas ) and a half. Rajendralal Mitra identified Lafkesvara mentioned in this introduction, with the author of the Pra@lriakamadhenu, who bears the same name®!, Lassen and after him Grierson too agreed with R. Mitra. As, some years ago the Prakytuka@mdhenn las been edited and published®?, it seems that we are in a position to verify the con= clusion of the scholars named above. From a glance over the text of the Pralriakamadhenu, (reprinted in the Appendix II for the facility of reference ) it however appears that this short work could not have been the source of Ramagarman’s grammar. For, the Pi alrtak@mathenu in spite of its very pre- tentious name, does not treat more than one dialect of Prakrit and that also very inadequately. And in the couplet following the mangalacarana the author says : facaue गदितं qa सक्षेपादधुनोच्यते । वालबोधकरं सूत्रं gett यादृङ्नवोदुतम्‌ ॥ T'r, T have spoken before in details [ about this ] and now I shall give briefly these siitras which the less intelligent people may [ easily | understand and they ( the siitras ) will be like butter churned out of curd. Hence it may be possible that a bigger work on the subject, written by Ravana®® once existed, though we know neither its name nor the extent to which its teachings were reflected in the later work. Another work, a vrtti ( gloss ) on the Pkt. section of a Skt. grammar written by Sesanaga has also been ascribed to Ravana®*. For obvious reasons, this could not have been the source of Ramasarman’s work. Another fact which may 16 ° 1 Notices of Sanskrit Manuscripts, Vol, 1X, Nos, 8157, 3158, ( Ref, Grierson’s ), °°" Prakrtakamadhenn of Ravana Lankesvara”” A lost work Re-discovered ) Joc. ८1. ^ ` 006 need not see in this author the mythical Raksasa hero of the Ramayana, For we find Kumbhakarna also to be the name of a Rajput chief related to the famous Mirabai, °¢h. 14. Mitra, Molices of Sanskrit Manuscripts, loc, cet, XVII INTRODUCTION remembered in this connexion, is that though Raémadarman has several times mentioned Sakalya-Mandavya, as an old authority *5. But in no other place he has referred to LankeSvara. From all these facts it may be permissible to assume that the expression Lankegvara-bhasui@ in Ramasarman’s introduction may not be tuken to mean ‘explained by LankeSvara’, but 98 meaning ‘inentioned by Lankegvara.” If our assumption is correct, Lankesvara named by Ramagarman might not have been a grammarian of Pkt. at all, and his enumeration of Pkt. dialects might have been made in a different context about which thelost portion of the introduction to the Prakrtakalpataru inall probablity, contained some reference® ०, V. Importance of the Work From Sir George Grierson’s several discussions$” on the contents of the Prakytakalpatarw it appears that he considered the work important because it helped him to classify the grammarians of Prakrit into two schools, Eastern and Western, To him the most important part of it, was the chapters on Apabhraméa and Paisgaici of various kinds, and to the rules on Sauraseni Pkt, also he attached some importance, while its chapters on Maharastri except that dealing with the Dhatv@legas were considered by him to be of less value. The late Madame L. Nitti-Dolci who edited the last-named chapters however very rightly differed®® in this matter from Sir G. Grierson. Hence there can never be any question about the special importance of the Prakrta-kalpataru, Except in minor details it is not possible to disagree with Grierson regarding his theory of the two schools of Prakrit grammarians. Discovery of Purusottamadeva’s Pralkrtanusasana has given an additional support to it. But Grierson’s identification of Bhaémaha the commentator of Vararuci’s grammar, with the Kashmirian author of the 8], 5,19, 23 ; 6, 23; 7, 14, 8é¢Cf, Nitti-Dolci, Introduction p. IX. ° 7 8९6 note 5 above. ®* Her Introduction to the ‘first Sakha, p, प, P—ill INTRODUCTION XVIII Kavyalamkara,®® does not seem to rest on a secure basis. It was Peterson who first expressed such a view*® and Pischel followed him*?, and since then it gained considerable currency. But doubt has been expressed some years ago about its validity, ** though no specific reasons were advanced in this connexion. But it is now possible to give such reasons, for example, the Kashmirian Abhinavagupta commenting on the Chapter XVIII (on Pkt) of the Natyaégastra does not mention the Piakrtaprakasa or its commentary by Bhimaha, though he mentions the Prakrtadipika,*® a work which is otherwise quite unknown, and has not come down to us. This fact becomes inexplainable, if one is allowed to assume that Bhamahas writing on Alamkara and the Pkt. grammar, were the same person. It cannot be possible that Abhinavagupta did not know Bhamaha the writer on Alamkara, and this heing the case, he had every chance of mentioning Vararuci’s work or its commentary by Bhamaha if such were in vogue before him among the Kashmirian scholars. Thus, in the absence of any evidence to the contrary, Bhamaha too may be taken as an Easterner belonging to the Eastern school of Prakrit erammarians. The doubtful position of Lankesvara mentioned by Ramagarman, in this school has already been pointed out.** Even without him the position of the school remains superior. Grierson has very justly stressed on the relative importance of this school for the study of Pkt. Herein lies the great value of the Prakyta-kalpatarw which treats all the different dialects of Prakrit, Apabhraméa and Paigéci with a degree of fullness which is scarcely available in any other work written before it. Moreover its treatment of the various Apabhramsas scem to be based on 9 ०९6 The Prakrit Dhatvadesas ( Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Vol, VIII, no, 2 ) p. 82, and also see AMSJV, III, Part 6, p, 880, 40 Subhasttavali, p,79 and Aufrecht’s Catalogus Catalogorum, under Bhamaha’s Kavyalankara. 42Grammatik der Prakrit-Sprachen, p. 35. +? Kavyalamkiara of Bhamaha, ed, by Batuk Nath Sarma and Baladev Upadhyaya, Benarcs, 1928, Introduction, p. 57. + 2806 the NS ( Baroda Ed. ) Vol. I. p. 271. 44See p, XVII before. XIX INTRODUCTION observation ; for example, Ramasarman describes Praicya Apa- bhramga as having padas including so and wutta ( so-vatta-pada- valamba, ITI. 3 10) 45, The so seems to have been preserved the ablative termination -so in modern Bhojpuria and Maithili,*+® all Eastern dialects, and एतदु ( = Skt. rrt ) similary has been retained in forms like latom, Latem, bala, batas (verb substantive) of the modern Bhojpuria and Avadhi.4? The एक्ट दर A pabhraméa, according to Ramagarman, has frequently the termination di. As Grierson has pointed out*®, this still survives in the dialects of Rajputana which in ancient times was included in the Paiicala region. Another important aspect of the Pralrfakalpataru is its commentary written by the author himself. In it some examples look like genuine quotations from some Prakrit works. As_ these quotation wereavailable to Grierson in a very corrupt form, he could not read them properly and failed to realise their value. Of them he says, “Ihe case is different with regard to the numerous Prakrit verses and short sentences quoted in the commentary (of ch. VIII), Most of these are plainly invented by the author as ad hoc exam- ples.” In a footnote to the remark he supports this statement by saying that Hemacandra too concocted his own very insipid examples in the Desinamamala. Grierson here unwittingingly did an injustice to Hemacandra whose illustrations of the rules of Apabhraméa in his grammar were genuine folk-poetry, by not mentioning the fact in the present connexion. If Hemacandra acted differently in case of the Deésinadmumala, it was not to mislead any body, but to help the readers to memorise the rules with greater facility, The same thing may not be said with regard to metrical passages irregularly scattered throughout the prose commentary to the Prakrtakalpataru. “9817 George Grierson has wrongly read this as Sorutta-padavalamba. « ०७९९ 8, पि, Kellog, 4 Grammar of the Hindi: Language ( Third Edition ) Table II. Post-positions. ‘7 {८12 Table XVIII: Dialectic Conjugation of the Substantive Verb, $87 Ant. Vol, 52, 1923, ], 6. InrRoDUCTION XX One special feature of the Pkt. quotations, is that they are mostly on the various exploits of Krsna, and quite a number are on his relation with Radhi and the gopis (cowherd maidens ). Considering the great popularity which the Radha-Krsna Jegend enjoyed among medieval poets of Bengal, it seems possible there existed earlier Pkt. poems treating all episodes of Krsna’s legendary career. The metrical passages quoted in the commentary seems to be quotations from such works now lost. Some of the quotations are given below with पाला translation : करह करसरोभ' वच्छत्थलस्मि कण्डे, Krsna puts his lotus-hand on the region of ( her) breasts (4). पसण्णम्मि गोसे जम्भाभन्त' area’ wtf, [ remember Madhava yawning in the fair dawn (5) पं areal ण सदह, Madhava does not rely on me (7). facqg माहव, (She) pleases Madhava (7). etal विक्क्रेणह्‌ aq ago, Krsna sells flowers to wives ( cowherds ) (9). forgearfa हंपि ctracqaea, I shall detain ( her) in connexion with the Rasa dance. (12) कंसो facag संमरम्मिं माहवेग, Kamsa is conquered 10 battle by Madhava (19) eg fe qeag कण्ड पेम्मं etn जह्‌ तुह aeAE णेहमारो गेत्तेण जह gE fee eeater, O Krsna, will love be extracted ( from you ) by the wife ( of a cowherd ) if her eyes carry off the burden of your affection and lick the beauty of your body (20) ? ण ag सहि wicq पणक्कैङिभङ्खी onc’ dice णिभ पिह erated, Friend, if only she will not interrupt the love-sport, the be: loved girl will almost carry off Damodara (20). favor’ पसूण' तह रूप्पिगीए्‌ भासह्‌ कण्ड' aan’ पि ere, Then he gave ( Paryata ) flowers to Rukmini and she speaks happy words to Krsna (21). arg सो sey विहम्ब्से अजवि कीसं गवी, He is getting angry in the bower. 0 Gopi, why are you tarrying even now (22) ४ XXI Inrropuctton margornt विरहो fase aor, Separation from the cowherd- maidens afflicts Krsna (22). णेहम्मि सो aye gra dt खप्पसे पेम्माण रसे तुमं कि, Radha is immersed in your affection. Are you also drowning in the water of her love (28) ? सो gra राही sere मग्गा, He, O Radha, is engrossed in a discourse about you (23). भवक्ष्ख aug gen प्पभोप्तं । गिअच्छ कासं ge उभ अन्म ॥ Look at Krsna and look at the evening. Look at the Kaga flowers and look at the clouds (23). छक्कामि णाहं सिविणे-वि wo, [ do not touch Krsna even in dream (25), al कण्ड सकवक gepat an fe faci ण सप्पेसि पसीअ fage कोवं, He, Krsna enters the bower. Are you not quickly, moving to it? Be gracious and give up your anger (26). कमषटणमणो tag रासमञक्े, ‘The lotus-eyed one shines in the Rasa dance (28) arin fsag हरि' san सा, On some pretext, she touches Hari with her hip (29). SONg क्ख हरिणो चरिएण र्क्खो, The ( jamalarjuie ) tree falls down by the movement of the ( child ) Hari (33) भरजस्यन्तं सच्छन्दा Geaq तं atfeedt ङष्गेहम्मि cet, In the bower is seen Radha freely embracing him who is upset (by her love ) (34). Gale भोत्थाह वसन्तं aratert णिभवरम्मि राही, O fair onc, Radha is detaining Krsna ( Daimodara) who 13 living in her own abode (35). The examples quoted above are all from the commentary to the ch. # 111, of the first «akha*®. In other chapters there are i °Nurmerals given after the translation of the quotations represent the serial number of stanzas of the ch. VIII, under which sueh quotations occur, INTRODUCTION XXII passages which look like quotations from some Prakrit grammars. These are as follows: | रदयानुरोधा दिह कभ््विदाह रक््खिज्जए्‌ एत गदा हरिस्स | स्यादेतत्‌ स्त्री विषयेऽपि एत नतन्मतं प्राङृतश्षासनानाम्‌ ॥ (1, 6.19 ) To illustrate the rule that “efad in feminine becomes esa too” some said, lukkhijjae es. gada 11011550 But this is not supported by the Prakrit grammars. अता aotel-fa इता सिणेहो qea@-fa णहो fag होन्ति faod । अता सणाणं gat fac’ ogra पि साकलटमतं वितिण्णं ॥ (1. 3. 18 ) With the separating vowel a, [ sneha ] will be saneha, with 1, it will be simeha,and it may alternatively also be neho, and clhna will be changed to cinia. With the separating vowel a,[ sna@na | will be san@atand with 0 it will be sinana, and it may alternatively be 21200, This is the expressed opinion of Sakalya. Besides these there are similar illustrative passages in chapters on 9. and Mg. etc. Some of them might be quotations from lost dramatie works. The commentary of the Prahrtakalpatarw contains also, some Prakrit words which are not commonly met with. They are SH, TAB, WET ( the cry of victory ). The last form has survived in (क कत्र the East Bengal dialects meaning eyes, The word wex (=bull) occurs in the example trang Sal Tear. The elephant together with the bull, is making a vocal noise. It is a good Indo-European word and goes back to Latin, taurus ( #staurus ), cf Skt. स्थर. It does not occur is the PSM. VI. The Present Edition Unlike Sir George Grierson who used a single ms, I have generally given the important variant readings only, and simple scribal errors have been silently corrected. Written by a scribe who had no pretension to Prakrit scholarship, the mss. present mistakes sometimes affording sure clues of their correction, In this matter I received some help from my predecegsora, though XXIII INTRODUCTION in quite a number of cases their readings and emendations had to be revised with or without the help of the new ms. The Pralrtanie sasana of Purusvttamadeva also was utilized with profit in dealing with some doubtful readings. Typical examples of these are the fourth foot of II. 1. 13 and the first foot of II, 2. {6., And in one case the confirmation of a doubtful reading came from some strange quarters. The sketch of Prakrit grammar embedded in the Visnudharmottara gave support to the corrected reading of the fourth foot of II. 1. 38. For the facility of reference — this grammar has been printed (with a translation) in the Appendix IT. Though in about half a dozen cases it was not possible to be sure of the absolute correctness of the readings oftered, it may now be hoped that the text just now published represents Ramagarman’s original work better than the edition of its different parts made on the basis of a single corrupt ms In dealing with difficult ms. readings I always tried to remain conservative, except when important considerations went against such an attitude. One such reading was, garbhita written tirough- out 88 garvita which I had to ermend as gaivita because in a quite a number of cases the scribe systematically wrote ८॥ (ङ) for va (a) and that was erroneous®?. In the present volume, the commentary of the work also has been given in a re-edited form. Its important features have already been pointed out. Along with the translation of the text I have given in notes besides other matters, references to corresponding siitras of Vara- ruci, Purusottama and Markandeya. Hemacandra who belongs to the Western school of Pkt. grammarians, has been mentioned only in rare cases. Anyone interested in what Hemacandra says on a particular point may easily take the help ofdifferent editions®? of this Pkt. grammar printed with good indexes. 51Such a mistake was also committed in the model of the Newari ms. of Purusottamadeva’s Prakrtanusasana, For in it too, we find garvzta instead of gavdhita, Sea Nitti-Dolci’s ed, of this work IX, 9, See 8150 notes on the translation to IT. 1, 5 ( p. 119). 5?Pischel’s edition of Hemacandra’s Grammar, and Hemacandra’s Prakrtanusisana in Bombay Skt. and Pkt. Scries, No. LX ( Appendix ). Prd RP OL spy mau उपा Jo UoYdoyo> ay] ae L तमे वा. राण्य व x SSCL Ne += + ~ +न "2६८१४८८ DEL bye PR ae le 1621१०४6 09 Gris 0 ` Eh Werle ९५.१९) € ५ Wo +, +~ धु jer Me 15 GS — PFs 4 iUetpPis +; | ८.४अ सुप 9८.112... ERS: दशु "+ ^ ०५१५१. ७९ Pie SEP DIR) शः pres ५४५९१६४ ध pb ees 5/८ नन सरण 6 यन 2H] वषाणा ०००२४५८ (१ saa ९०७०८५५८ 9८ - oe Leb ०० १।७.९५०४.५.०)२॥ ९1. - क 1 1 9८104०७ ए पार ४९ _ (दथ रस ir SINE SEO lee - न 9०0910९ SORRY = सि 1 1111. 1 eg RTGS ग PLAS WE OTE RIS Lo jwersn ae. 3 ( + 8 ef, रामरामक्रते MEARE CIA नथमराला | प्रथम-स्तबके अज्‌-विधानम्‌ | तत्राप्रे वक्ष्यते | अद॒न्तान्‌' सोर्‌ ओत्‌। नप॑ंसकात्‌ सोर्बिन्दुः। इदुन्तयोः Mats: | पदान्तस्य eel aa: | अनाद्ययुक्तानां कगचजतदपयवां छोपः | युक्तस्याधस्तान्‌ नमयाम्‌ BATA रल्वाप्‌ । उध्वस्थितानां कगडतद्पषसां च Sal BR द्वित्वम्‌ । दीघस्य युक्तस्य परस्य च gear अन्यानि विशेष कार्याणि इत्यादि | आदेः Wasa बात भात्‌ स्थान्‌ क ते सष्द्धिः प्रकटं प्रसिद्धिः | तथाभिजातिश्च मनस्विनी च agq सद्रन्तं॒प्रतिसिद्धिर्ज en अदेरित्यधिकारोऽच्‌स्तयकरं यावन | आदेरत आन्‌ स्याद्रा। सामिद्धी अत आत्‌ कत इत्‌। धस्य लुकरोषस्य द्वित्वं । पुनः प्राग्‌ धल्य दः । अन्त्यस्येतोः ad: | सोकछछपः। एवं परत्रोहनीयम्‌ । पाअड' । रेफस्य लुक्‌ आदित्वादूश्द्धिः कस्य ara: टस्य डः सो fares । प्राग्वत्‌ पासिद्धी | आहिआई । भस्य हः जतयो- लोपः दीर्घस्य Male: | माणसिणी । facgma: नयोणः वस्य छोपः। सारिच्छं कतो रिः दस्य ata: क्षस्य छः पाडिमिद्धी । रेफस्य लुक तस्य डः प्राग्वत्‌? | In. अदन्ता, 2 0, न्द्पमाम्‌, m. दपयसाम, (१) 1 mn. दषा for धका, 2 0). सेति, 3 0. रेद्‌ for Ara. १, १. २-४ | WRARCTAS: 2 तथा aga-ataqaeat च सस्याश्वयो नित्थमिहायुते"च | इदीषव दरद दध -पक्वे स्वप्न्येष्यतोः वेतसकादिकेषु ॥२॥ पासुत्तं रेफस्य ल्युक्‌ अत आत्‌ पस्य लुक्‌ तस्य द्विः सो बिन्दुः । पडिवआ रेफस्य Ge तस्य डः पस्य वः हलन्तात्‌ feng आत्‌ अन्यो रोपः सोरोपश्च | समृद्धीत्यादिराकृतिगणः" | पक्षे समिद्धीव्याधहनीयं ' । सस्याश्चयोर्‌ देर्‌ अतो" नित्यम्‌ आत्‌ स्यात अयुक्ते परे । सासं आसो ae तु सससं waar! grate सेवादित्वाद्‌ fa: | केचिद्‌” अदू इच्छन्ति । इङ्काखो रस्य छः । ASR ऋत उ दस्य ara: | पिक auhs कस्य द्विः सो बिन्दुः सिविणो अत दद्‌ वस्य विप्रकषः। qaqa वःसोर ओत्‌। वेडिसो तस्यड सोर ओन्‌। आदि शब्दाद्‌ व्यजनं विभणं इत्यादि | पयन्त शथ्योत्‌कर-बह्टीवह- "याश्च -सोन्दयंसमे त॒ पत्‌ स्यात्‌ | तरयोदशश्चात्र गणेः निविष्टः प्रयोगतोऽन्यत्र समूहनीयः ॥३॥ पयन्तादेर तो नित्यम्‌ एत्‌ स्यात्‌। पेरन्तं, geet? ओत उत्‌ यस्य रेफः सोर्बिन्दुः' तेरह xe # # > # आदिहाब्दात्‌ cafe यस्य^रेफः alfaes: | Bou य्यस्यः जः नीडादित्वाद्‌ द्विः । चउक्केरो तुकि कस्य द्विः । वही अन्त्यस्य दीः | एवे Fadl | मण्डर शस्य छः" fF: य॑स्य रेफः | ओत्‌ देन साधं बदरे च नित्यं स्थाद्‌ वेन ANT! Bat तथातः | विकदिपता या तु समरं मयुर- AQAA यथाक्रमैण ॥४॥ at wtot मोरो मडउरोः मोहो मबहो खस्य हः। (3) 1 . ग्यते ( ण्द्रापर). 2 0. सखपेय्यतो ( खप्रतथा). 3 1), सबौरेद्‌ ( समङ्ञोव्यादिर्‌ ). 4 7, समिद्नौत्वपूयइनौयं. 5 0. लक्यादि, 6 7. क्रचिद्‌. 7 no दशस्य for wa se aw. (३) 1 malaga, n weg. 11. geqaq for grand. 3 1). सुन्दे. 4 1), 01, बिन्दुः. 5 71. तेति for sf 6 7, इख स्ख. 7 nae. 81. छ for s:. (४) ए on, साद्य for साधं 2. m. aga for मचरो 3 अन्‌-विधानम्‌ | १. १, ५-अ भवेच्‌ चतुर्थीति पदे तुना ओच चतुदशीत्यत्र पदे निरुक्तम्‌ | नित्यं च पद्मादिषु arian निर भो बिकरपेन च निरे” सः ॥५॥ अत ओन्‌ स्यात्‌ चोत्थी चडत्थी रल्टुकि थस्य fe: प्राक्‌ धस्य तः। चोदही चउदही रकि दस्य fe: रस्य हः। ded पडमं ओजञ्चरो frag aay ऽपित -स्वास्त-विज पक्ष्म- स्वोद्‌ ' वाथ लोपश्च सदाप्यरण्ये | वातोऽद्‌ यथादोः स गणो विधेयो यथा-तथा-चामर-ताटनचरन्तम्‌ ॥६। ऽएषु अत ओद्‌ वा स्यात्‌ । ओप्पिमो रेफस्य ots द्विस्तस्य wa: | सोत्थी लुकि नादि द्विः स्तस्य थः। प्राक थस्य तः ¦ अन्त्यदीघंः । ated रेफटुकि तस्य दविः। पोमृहो क्षमस्य] महः । पक्षे मप्पिअ स्थी? बहित्तं पमृहो । रण्णं । यथादेर्‌ आतो अत्‌ स्याद्रा | जह थस्य हः। एवं तह चमर तखविण्टं न्तस्य oe: KA इत्‌ । प्रस्तार-मार्जार-कुमारिकाश्च प्रहार -हाखाहल-हाकिक्राश्च | उतखात-दावाप्नि-मरार-ताटः संस्थापित-प्रारत-चाट -तानम्‌* ॥७॥ एते यथादौ पत्थरो रेफस्य "टुक्‌ स्तस्य थः थस्य द्विः प्राक्‌ थस्य तः । AAT "पूर्वाकारस्य हस्वत्वे ^पराकारस्यादित्वात्‌ पक्षे मारो । कुमारिभा कस्य रोपः | "पहरो रेफस्य लुक्‌ हलहर एवं हकिभ कलोपः | उकूखअ' कल्कि खस्य द्वित्वे प्राक्‌ खस्य कः तस्य छोपश्च | दुवगगी युक्ते हस्वः । मलो रो लोपः सोर मत्‌ | तथा संथविभं सस्य क्‌ विन्दुपरत्वान्‌ न fe: पस्य वः तस्य लोपः । पञ कतयो लोपः} “aS उत अन्त्यस्य वीघंः टस्य डः | तण नस्य णः। आदि शब्दात्‌ वहू अन्त्यस्य दीधः । पक्षे जहा इत्यादि उहनीयम्‌ | (५) 1 1). ददौ (पटे). m. पदो. 2 7. fasaat उ a: ( निकरे च). (६) In. चोद्‌ for @z. 2 1. axe. 3 nom, ge ad श्रोत्‌ वास्यात्‌. 4. m बोहि . 5 n. सतृधि for aqui. (७) IN. प्रत्वारत्वालाषहत ( प्रहटारप्रबाहण ). 2 1). न्ताणा; m. cara. 3 0, चाटुराणम्‌, 4 1). लुकि. 5 "0, पूर्वकारस्य, 6 1. परा काखादिलान्‌. 7 0. om. प्रहरो. कलोपः, 8 10, 0171, aw, and has इत before अ्रन्तयख. १. १. ८-१० | प्राङृतकल्पतसः ७ इत्‌ स्थात्‌ सदादो तं सदा यदाच aq कचिय्‌ क्दलीमात्रयोर Tq | इतश्च पिण्डादिषु पिण्डविष्ण- धम्मिह्ध ` सिन्दूरम्‌ carla बिन्दुः ॥८॥ आत इत स्यात्‌ सइ दोपः | एव॑ जइ यस्य जः । तदह पक्षे सा इत्यादि | आत एत्‌ स्यान । सेम्मरी safe मस्य द्विः। मेत्ता रेफस्य ल्युकि तस्य द्विः | सम्मली मन्ता संयुक्तपरत्वात हस्वः । पिण्डादिपु इत एन स्याद्‌ व्रा। Wwe ang ष्णस्य og: दीघश्च । धम्मं ` सेन्द्रं चन्द्‌ अन्त्यदीर्घश्च | पक्षे पिण्डं इत्यादि | आदि शब्दात cer निदा चं fas इत्यादि| सदा हरद्रा-पथिवी-पथिष्वट इतस्तथा तस्त इतः पदादेः | इन्त प्रवासन्यपि sia चोद्‌ AT च धिर इत्यत्र कञः प्रयोगे ॥६॥ हरि द्रादिषु नित्यम्‌ इतो अत्‌ स्यान | ewer रेफस्य wis दस्य द्विः । geat RA उन्‌ स्यात्‌ । एवं पहो । पदादेर इतेः 'तेर्‌ इतो अत्‌ स्यात्‌ ga चिरं इअ *मती(?) इत्यादि | इक्ष्वादेर इत उन । उच्छ क्षस्य ¦ छः छस्य | द्विः : प्राक्‌ } छस्य च अन्त्यः दीघ: । aga रेफस्य Ge अनेन द्रत उने अन्त्यो टुक्‌ दीर्घश्च सोर शोषः | विच्छु ओ इत उत्‌ कोपः सोर ओन! द्विधा-शब्दे इत उद्‌ भोच्‌ चकब: प्रयोगे सति | sera दोहाकञअ' धस्य हः, इत्‌ सिह-जिह्यरिषु ते नु जिहा -निःश्वाम-विश्वासेष्वपि उ्हनीयः | आपाड-नीडेडः;-कोद्र)धु स्य्राद इत पद्‌ अत्र चः वातु पीट ॥१०॥ सिह-जिह्वादिके च इत्‌ ईत्‌ स्यात। सीहो जीहो । णीसासो' वीसासो | वलोपः | श्वस्य सः आमेलो पस्य मः उस्य ठः । णड नीडादित्वाद्‌ दिः । एरिसो ऋतो ऋः दरोपश्च एवं केरिसो | Ge पीदं ठस्य दः | (८) 1 ins. घर्मिन्न. 2 11. Getz (२) In. तिर्‌. 2 1, 0m. मतौ. 3 70, Garg 4 ४. BHA (१०) 1 7. तत जिह्वा (तु विभि). 2 0. og विनित्याम्‌ ( वीखा-विशत्यम्‌ ) 37. | च] for qomitted. 4 0, तीषासी for Wad. 511. Matar उत्‌ saw स; for वौसासो [ बलोपः ] wea a. भज्‌-विधानम्‌ [ १, १. २६.१४ इद्‌ इतो ' विकल्पो गभीरादिष स्यात्‌ के पने गभीर sala तद्वानीप्‌ | इदानीम्‌ अरीक्‌ द्वितीयं तृतीयं "करोष्रा-गरृहीतं पानीयन्तथा च ॥१२॥ TAU दत इत. स्यात । गिरं भस्य हः : वि यस्य हुक नादि fe: । कस्य BI | ताणि दस्य लोपः । इआणि प्रागृवत्‌। afer कलोपः । दु AGH तययो Vl: azar ऋतोऽत्‌ तययोर्छापः । करिसो षस्य सः । गदि ऋतो अत्‌ तस्य दः । पाणी यलोपः Ga गहीरं इत्यादि | उतो भवत्य आदू इह पुष्कगदा त पुष्करः पुस्तक- टुञ्यकौ च । मुक्ता तथा कुष्टिम-नुण्ड-मुण्ड- कुण्डानि खण्डं च तथाऽपर च ॥१२। उत ओत्‌ स्यात | पोक्खरो प्कस्य ख द्विः प्राक्‌ खस्य कः । पोत्थो स्तस्य थः द्धिः प्रक्र थस्यतः। दलोद्धौ बह्ुक्रि धस्य द्धिः प्राग्‌ धस्य दुः कलोपः। मोत्ता कल्कि तस्य द्विः । कष्टम तोण्ड aloe कोण्ड' रोण्ड । उतो भवतः अन्‌ युकुटाद्विकेष युधिष्ठिसदौ तु विकल्पितोभ्रम्‌ | SFIS द्वा सह वा भवेह्‌ siz CIT रिर्‌ निरुक्तः पुरुषस्य नित्यम्‌ ॥१२॥ उतो अत स्यात मउडं कोपः टस्य डः सो बिन्दुः एवं ays आदर एव उभयत्र कलोपः | अगरू अन्व्यदीघः mee । विप्रकषंः | जहिद्धिखो यस्य जः धस्य हः Safe ठस्य ig: प्राकूटस्य टः रेफस्य छः | पक्षे जुदिष्टिखो । ओक्रखलं ह्वा सह उत मद्‌ वा । पक्षे seed वररुचिस्तु seas उदुकूखलं नीडादित्वाद्‌ दिः | युते हस्वः। पुरुषस्य ₹-दाब्दस्य उत इत्‌ नित्यं पुरिसो | उतो AIH खलु नित्यम्‌ उत्‌ स्याद्‌ एन्‌ नृषुरे तु सताम्‌ अभीष्टः | ताम्बुख केऽप्यत्‌ सदा WAZ aie ऋतस्तु अट्‌ रिस्त्वपि केवलस्य levi (११) 7 1. विकल्पितो, and ea in the next foot. 2n. करोषगरहोत पाणोय, (१९) 1 1, विप्रक. १, २. १५-१७ | प्रारुतकल्पतदः ६ wer धस्य हः कल्पश्च । IST पस्य लोपः । तम्बों "बोर ओद्‌ अन्त्यः PNT: | RASA स्यात Got aol ya घञं इत्यादि । केवङृस्य ऋतो रिः स्यान्‌ ऋणं रणे ऋद्धः रिद्धीत्यादि। तदा कचित्‌ त्रश याद्रशादाव SEATED WAZ ऋकारः | ‘eneatiag त्विन्‌ स गणो विधेयः ऋषि-क्पा-दष्ि-मुगाङु-गरधः ॥१५॥ ma ण्व रिः स्यात। तारिसो दस्य छोपः। एवं जारिसो आदि शब्दात ईशो इरिमो सदो सरिसो इत्यादि | ऋरष्यादिषु अटत इत स्यात्‌। इसी अन्त्यदीघ . किवापोवः। दिट्ठी रोपे दि अन्त्यदीघ श्च मिभङ्को गलोपः | गिद्ध रेफ धस्य दविः प्रागधो दः | णदार-भृल्मर-णगाल-भृह्धाः कृपाण-गृष्ी-पृथल-कषिश्च | Bla ्र-वृष-व हिते च Hama वुभ्विके सृष्ि-ङत्याः ॥१६॥ पते ऋष्याटयः fas भिङ्कारो fasnel गस्य छोपः। fire’ किवाणो पस्य वः! गिद्री पट्कि टस्य द्विः dea, पिहुलो थस्य हः। किसी षस्य सः Ata, किदीतस्यदः dea किरी गिद्रीवन विसो षस्य सः। विहिभ त लोपः। fear aga विच्छरुभो इत ओन्‌ कोपः। सिटी किटरीवत। किञ्चा तस्य च-द्िश्च | हण्ट-समद्धि-प्रकृतिषु वान्ये mealfed स्यादु उद्‌ gaa नित्यम्‌ | AGA TH fenga-aa hae पराच्रण-ग्रणालं परथित्री मृतं च ॥१५७॥ हिरटी सिटठीवत ममिद्धी उक्ता | प्राक्‌ ] पटदी रेफ लुक कोपे तस्य दः दीर्घश्च “अन्य इति आक्रृतिगणोऽयम्‌। ऋत्वादिषु ऋत उत स्यात्‌ उदू तस्य दः अन्त्यदीघंः | मुद्गो अत इत aera: णिहु्' भस्य हः । पउत्ती tees बरोपः दीर्घश्च । पासो "षस्त्वं वलोपः अन्त्यस्य सः। युणालं Gaal थस्य हः इतो मत । युभ' तलोपः | (१५४) 1 71, लोरोद way. 0. लौवीद wars. (१४५) 1 7. कष्वादिष्वित एष, (१७) 1 negate. 2 0. अटति for sy sf. 3 7, दुसृहम्‌ for Geax. 9 भज्‌-विधानम्‌ [ १. १ १८-२१ घुलान्त-वृन्दावन स्वृतानि जामतिक-भ्रातक-मातकश्च | स्यात्‌ प्राभतश्चाव्र गणे निविषएौ BT वेण Tat सह वा निरुक्तः ॥१८॥ वुत्तन्तो अयुते ह स्वः | वुन्दावणं वस्य स्थितिः | संवुदं तस्य द्‌: । जामाउभो कतयोखोपः। ARVN रेफस्य ew तक्रयो sta: | एवे माऽ Ted रेफस्य लुक्‌ भस्य हः तस्य डः । प्राभृतान्‌ उ त्वादौ । आष्रनिगणोऽयं) तेन निन्वुदो | VEG GA वच्छौ क्षस्य च्छः | खिर खतो far त्विह केदटस्य वा वेदना-रेवरयोर इद्‌ एतः | स्यराह्‌ ta एच्‌ च तु ‘eats SMR निन्यम्‌ AZ APT: yal any fafed = कारस्य इलि पटकि तस्य द्विः। केवलस्य च कारस्य लिआर कस्य रोपः | एत इत्‌ स्यात “stay: | विअणा zara: दिअरो aura: | ta एतं स्यात्‌ | कवरो ta एन्‌ तस्य टः द्विः सोर्‌ मो ! सेवाछो वस्थितिरित्यादि। देयादेर्‌ ta अह स्यात्त । सैत्य-वैतालिक-केतवानि वशाख-वैदेहक्-कैरवानि" ¦ वै राग्य-वेदेशक-वेशिकानिः स्वेरं च वरः पर ऊहनीयः ॥२०॥ स देत्यादि | ददश त्यस्य च द्विः 1 वकि कतयोर्छपः | कदमवो तवयो- Bla: | वईसादहो शस्य सः खस्य हः । aa दकयोखोपः "सोरओत्‌ । कदरो वलोपः | बहरग्गं यलुकि गस्य द्विः ga हस्वः | वडइएसो दलोषः युक शस्य सः सदिः कलोपः सोर ओन | aghast शस्य सः कलोपः । , सरो] ast आकृति-गणोऽयम्‌ | 23 तथा मैरव-पे्र-चैत्र- कैटास-वेल्यादिष् वा निरुक्तः | इत्‌ सन्धवे ala तथा परव नेयोगिक देर इति तद्देव ॥२१॥ (yc) 1 7, puts this just after 18 and reads it 85 प्रात्रत्तत्तौ wate), Confusion of va and dha should be marked, (१९) 1 1). ady for aut . 2 1). खताया for wag, (po) 1 1), वौसवापि and m. कंसराणि for करवाणि. 2 7). वैरेकाणि and m. वैरिकाणि for ` शिशानि. 3 1, omits from सोर. श्रोत till वद्र), १. १. २२-२७ | पराङृतक्षल्पतरः ८ देवादिषु ae वा स्यात । aed वस्थितिः । भहरवो वस्थितिः। वहत्नो शस्य जः द्विः। चहत्तो रेफस्य ठकि तस्य द्विः। कदटासो चत्तो स्य दिः । पक्षि देवं इत्यादि पद्‌ एव। सिन्धव ta इत णिह यगकानां [ a: | नस्य णः | faq पेनोऽप्प्रथवा प्रकरोष भतो भवत्यत्‌ खलु वश्च कस्य | आह्‌ ओत wa नियमाद्‌ अभीष्टः सोन्दयका दिष्वपि नित्यम्‌ उत्‌ स्यात्‌ ॥२२॥ धीरं ए ई यस्य रः। Ta रेफस्य टक ओततोऽत्‌ कस्य वः sols टस्य द्विः सोर ओः। पक्षे पओ । ओत ओत्‌ स्यात्‌। कौस्तुभः कोत्थुहो स्तस्य थः द्वि भस्य हः । Bae दस्य लोपः इत्यादि | सोन्द्य-दोवारिक -पोच-शोौण्ड- को ध-कोशेयक्-गरा ण्डिकादयः | पौरदिके स्याद्‌ ast ala ‘ad स्याद्‌ “MCT व्याप्येवम्‌ ATEATAT च ॥२३॥ सुन्दरं अत॒ एन्‌ यस्य रो। दुआरिओ वस्य छोपः। सोरअन्‌ कलोपः | पुसो शस्य सः। एवं सुण्डो । great क्षस्य खः द्विः aaa) सेअ षस्य सः। यकयोलौपः सुण्डिओ qe सः कोपश्च । पोरादिर्यथा - परस्तथा पारुव-गोड-मोनम्‌ ओचित्यक-त्ञौ रित-कोशलानि । मो लिस्तथा कोरवक्रादिकानि sata Ticks कोविदानाम्‌ ॥२४॥ ओत अत्‌ उत्‌ स्यात | asta waa: | गडडो मडउणं नस्य णः aqeeqa चस्य रोपः त्यस्यचः द्विः कटोपः। खडरिअं aca खः नाद्त्विात्‌ fe: तलोपः । IAS शस्य सः । मउली अन्त्यदीघंः | -कडरवो गारबो गडरवो | इति प्राकृतकल्पतरो चतुविरातिभिः कुुमेरचस्तवकः ॥ (२२) 1 7. इव्यप्य for एतोऽप्य. (रर) I naa. 2 7). गोरवोप्यस्चवमयोकष्च ( गौरवे वापा ८८ , (र) 1 71.ओीतउत्‌ सखान्‌. 2nat x a» बौ गरवो, | द्वितीय-स्तनके हट्‌-विधानप्‌ | नादावयुक्तेष॒ न BATT aat कगो तो दपया व पर्षा | AAT AAT मः कुःलापि तेषां ` स्थितिरप्यभीष्ः ॥१॥ नादावित्यधिकारः। amet “sae: प्राक्‌ अगुक्तेषिवित्यधिकारः आस्तबकम्‌ | SIM णञरो वअणं विअणं सुरं मणो बिडं गअणं जअणो जडणा । कुत्रापि स्थितिरिष्टा सुगमं अतु अयणं इत्यादि । ‘afta स्थितिर्यत्र सुखप्रयोगो रोषो न ‘ater कविभिविधेयः'। अनादाविति किं कालो गञा-चामर-जाट-ताल-दीहो | ‘Tagen जगुणा age । अयुक्तेषु इति कि चन्दो चन्दणं इत्यादि | मरकतं ककारस्य गकारो ATHS च। वुध्रविधीयन नित्यम्‌ इतो खोपस्य बाधकः ॥२॥ ATS HATS BIT: । इनः परम आदिष्छोपो नास्ति" | वा यस्य जः ` सम्मत sattys नोये tgatasa इ पत रस्य) तथा पताका-प्रति-वेतसादां तस्य प्रतिक्ञादिषु [ चास्य | रोपः ॥२॥ nat यस्य जो वा स्यात । उत्तरिज नडादित्वात्‌ द्वि जंस्य दीधस्य युक्तपरस्य ईतो हस्वता एवं परत्र अनीयः प्रत्ययः तथा करणिज्ञ पठणिज्न इत्यादि । दुद वलोपः “इत उत्‌ । पक्षं Sadler करणीअ Seat ARG: । टस्य अनादेः स्यात | णडा wet इत्यादि । [ जेन- ] प्रन्थादिष्वपि क्वापि प्रतिष्ठित इत्यत्र परिद्धिभ | ऽप्रतिज्ञा इत्यत्र °पदृण्णा । वेडिसो अत इत्‌। आदि शब्दात्‌ प्राभतं TEs ऋत उत्‌ वावडो ऋत अत्‌ पस्य वः। हरितको aves इत्यादि । इह भवति ' ठकारस्यापि नित्यं दकारः शकट इह शटायां केटमे भचापि रस्य | (१) 7, स्थितिरिव्यभौोषटा, 20. इव्यदा लुक्‌, 2 ण. त[म्रण for तस्मिन्‌, 4 1). fade, 5, 11, बृढ. (२) 1 1, reads this as a font of (र). (3) 1 0, awa ( संघट), 2 11071. तस्य afaa: पिचा लोपौ, 3. age शौलः aaa for He’ sa Rea, 47, शत्‌ च, Sn प्रतिष्डा, On gery for qe, 7 n, इरकिं for इरितकौ (8) In. aarcafe. 20, मादि for चापि, P—2 9. २. ४-९ | WUHAN: १० प्रथम-शिथिल-पध्ये थस्य नित्य क्रा प्रवदति निषधे घस्योषधे चापि धीरः ॥४॥ ठस्य ढो यथा। मदं कटोरं इत्यादि। टरस्यढो यथा शक्रः सअटो शटा सढा कैटभः केटबो | थस्य ढो यथा पढमं fates धस्य ढो यथा गिसढो ata | तथा 'गभितेऽस्तीविष्रयेऽपि तो णोऽ प्यराबते चापि तथैव तो णः। q: स्यात्‌ करिरातादिष `तस्थकेते किरात-सम्पदू-ए्जतत्‌ -ताताः ॥५॥ तस्य णः गड्भिणो स्त्रियां "गन्भिणी । एवं एरावणो तस्य च णत्वमित्यादि | किरातादेस्तस्य दः स्यात्‌। | OH A इत्याह किरानैत्यादि। चिदखदो कस्यच तु रेफस्य छः । सम्बदा पस्य वः सियाम्‌ आत्‌ दादेशारवादन्त्यत्वाद्‌ अ-दरोपश्च | ae उद्‌ Ba: उन अन्त्यदीषः । तादो आदित्वान्न पव-तस्य दः | gaga: सभ््रति-संस्छृतो च छसंयतः-संवृति-निवु ती च । तथेह साग्प्रत-हतागतानि प्रयोगताऽन्येऽपि AQAA: ॥६॥ इमे च किरातादयः। सुसङ्गदो सम्पदि सक्कदं 'सुसंभद संवुदी निन्वुदी संपदो हदो आअदो इत्यादि आकृतिगणोऽयम्‌ | पमो कबन्धे भवतोऽपि ' बस्य पस्य वक्रारः GY KZA a: | भः शीकरे कस्य तथात्र फस्य फालिकायां तु भवेद्‌ विभाषा isi कपन्धो BAT च। पस्य वो वा स्यात्‌ करावो कला कविला Hier कला इत्यादि | केढवो भस्य वः । हस्य बाधकः पेत एत्‌ टस्य ढः । श्ञीकरे कस्य भः स्यात्‌ सीभरो। तथा GEA भः सभरी सभं इत्यादि । सेभालिभा-विष्ट- Sfangeel पक्षे सेहालिआ"गन्धविमोहिदा सा | (४) I mss, afaa, 2, कोऽब ^ # 3, mss. गव्विणो, 4 mss. afeqdt, 51), एवाबासारणधनम्‌ aie, 60". कौत, 7 mn. श्राह (ग. भरात्‌ ) दाटे्ादद नात्वाद्‌ दढलोपश्च. (६) 1. Game रदम्‌ for ade, (७) प्र पञ for वख, 2 n, om, an. बिमङटद्हा, 4 7, गन्रिमोद्धिरसो. १९१ हल्‌-बिधानप्‌ [ १. २. ८-१२ मश्चन्दरिक्ायां भवतीह कस्या. पीड पकारस्य AACA: | रो गद्गदे दस्य तथा ` दशानां सं ख्यामिघ्रेयानामयप्युसरेषाम्‌ ॥८॥ -चन्दिमा MAS ¦ दस्य रेफः TW za द्विः । एवं बारह तेरह शस्य ह्‌ इत्यादि | कद्व दाहदके प्रदीप्त ZI Sl हरिद्रादिषु eq BY ar sisgise द्वित्वमुपागतो a: TTY BRITT भवतीह दन्त्यः ॥६॥ कठम्बओ दोहलो wed हरिद्रादि यंथा- ह रिद्रा-परिघाङ्ार-खुकुमार-युधिष्ठिरः | करणञ्च किरातश्च चरणं मुखरो ऽङ्गरो ॥१०॥ हहा फलिहो seiet अत इत। सउमारो कलोपः । जुहिद्धिलो धस्य ह षल्कि दित्वे प्राक ठस्य टः । seo fas! कस्य चः तस्य दः । चल्णं युहलो थस्य हः Best आदि weg । परिहा sfea इत्यादि । डकारस्य खो वा स्यात्‌। दामं away’ पक्षे दाडिमं तडागं इत्यादि । “अङ्को । भवेत्‌ खथो हो Taal च नित्यं तथा शकारश्य दशादिकेि च । बिन्दोः परेषां wey “ खादिकानां नाथवेणाध्माधमादिकानाम्‌ ॥१२॥ खस्य हो यथा ae ०मुहं सहीत्यादि । हस्य दहो यथा गाहा सार हीत्यादि| घस्य हो यथा मेहो ऽणिमाहो इत्यादि । अथव्वणं अधम्मिभो अधमो । वसति भरतयोः स्यात्‌ तस्य नित्यं हकारः धिक्र-निकषमध्ये कस्य चात्र प्रदिष्टः | विकरविकलयोः स्यात्‌ तद्वदेवं घुधीभिः * स्करिक-] चरमवणे ] फस्य शेफालिकायाम्‌ ॥ १२॥ बसी भरो feed णिसो विडो feet फखहि | (८) 1 DN दशनोत्‌ ( दशनि ), 2 1). संख्याविधधयान्यपि डत्तरषां ( °्डतसतरषां ), 7. सद्टया- विघयानाम्‌ (१०) 7 1. परि्दखि परिल (परिघ पलि), ` 2 7, afsa , 3 ”. अरस्य (११) 1 111. wife for afe, 20. सद for qe’, 3 0. निघ 07 निश्राह्ो. (१२) 1 11 प्रविष्टः {01 प्रदिष्टः) 2 mss, स्यरिक weer स्यात्‌. १. २. 23-26 | WAAR TAS: १२ + तथा यक्रारस्य भवश्च काया कान्तो दशानाम्‌ इह शस्य नाम्नि | विकसितम्‌ स्याद्‌ दिवस च मस्य TUTE TW णशिरो हकारः ॥१३॥ छाही ` दहमुहो दहवदो इत्यादि। दिअहो पक्षे दिवसो । सोण्ड | भश्च जो यस्यतथाचणोनो ग्रण्चां लकारः कथितः TATA: | HSH लकारो गड्राभिधाने Wears चो विहितः किरने॥१४॥ नादि निवृत्तं aso 'जोञ्बणो इत्यादि नीडादित्वाद्‌ fe: | वस्य | oars परस्य पृव्व॑स्य च नस्य णो इत्यादि । wel asl गड्रे कि geomet । Fret म्डेष्छात्‌ फि किरादो | खाङ्गलके Best Rady सरा तु णौ लाङ्ल्कै AMAT: | नुः राके रसु च AAT ENTS दण्ड-दौखा-दश्ने इकारः ॥२५॥ अदिरित्येव णङ्गलओ णाहर्मो णङ्धलं गुते हस्वः । ` छवओ छरी क्रममुहो खस्य हः इयादि । छत्तपण्णो छत्तिपण्णो च अग्रे । evel डोला cant | बो मन्मथं स्यान GETZ फो भकार इष्ठे धिसिनोपदे च! स्याद्‌ fags ‘gage च नित्ये इतस्तु पकारः दह प्रदिशः ॥१६॥ वम्महो -फरुसो आदि sea परिख-परिघ्रयोरपि। फलि फला ¦ हरिद्रादि । भिसिणी वेन्भलो युक्ते किं विहलो | इति प्राकृतकल्पतरो षोडशङ्कसुमेद्धितीयस्तबकः ॥ (१९) I 1. तकारस्य भवद्‌ धकार set दशनां fae aa atfe ( यकाग्स्य ae धकारग्काया- कान्णो दशनाश्च च शस्य वासि ), 2 1), eae पण्डवतो. (१४) 1 1, festa हिति for sea इत्यादि (१५) In. लाइलः 2 11. विता 1. east, 3 7. कमहो for कक्षा. (१६) 1 7). युक्त ** ; 7, युक्रपष्े 20, फुरिसी, | त्रतीयस्तवक्रे द्वित्वविधानप TEL GH स्यान नमयाम्‌ अधस्ताटू उपयधस्ताद्‌ THAT अपीह | ऊर्व स्थिताना कगडां तदोः षः परयोश्च ' सनरज्ञ-मनोज्ञ-जस्य ॥२॥ युत्ताधिकार आ स्तवकं “NSE aT fret इत्यादि । aH शषस्य द्विः। तिग्गं रस्सीत्यादि जोग्गो सोम्मो इत्यादि स्वो विप्पो इत्यादि। उक्ता सुक इत्यादि | ween पिकं इत्यादि । fam ‘gel aa seas मुग्गरो aut ‘asta Cast ` खलिआदिकेषु । सव्वन्नो मणोज्जो इत्यादि | ग्यध्चों Maa च भवेत परस्याः स्मेर स्मरं as aay TERT A: | ANKE हस्य विहटे वा द्रं गश्च, नित्यं तु वनस्पतां पः ॥२॥ मस्म सालक आदित्वान्‌ न द्विः परस्य द्विः स्याद्‌ ण्व अन्त्यदीचश्च। wari aU सरो घस्सरो मन्मण्णअ' Ysysl आदि वस्य भः इत एन पक्षे fast) az पक्षे रहो एवं चन्द्रो चन्दो इत्यादि । वणस्सई | भवत्‌ ककारः HIN Bea स्तम्भं स्तकारस्य मतः GRIT: | प्कस्कन्तयोभ्‌ स्फोटक पव नित्यं स्थाणावशम्भां स पुननिरुक्तः ॥२॥ nae कुसुमे किं Asal मउत्तमं। खम्भो नहा aug aR थिरा होन्ति। खस्य वाधकः | कस्य सुकखं पुकखरो इत्यादि | स्कस्य खन्दो खन्धो इत्यादि । क्न[त]स्य wal किरातादित्वात्‌ तस्य दः । गक्तस्यैवायं विधिः । खोड स्कस्य खः। खाण्‌ सेवादित्वात्‌ Bo च । युते हस्वः TRAN तु Pa | (१) 11). मन-मथ सनीट्‌ (-aag ) > 27. omit घ) <अक्म्‌ , ९ 1). aa व 11. सुहष्यस for सुद्धोखग्‌गोड:110 om, उपगन समुग्गरौ ga. 5 nae, ८ nm. Her for सन 7 7. कर्‌ खलिष्वादिकेष. (२) 17, खखकयोस. (स््स्क ०) 2 7058. ग्वस्तन fears for खण धराद 3 ss, ara for aa 2.3. ४-७ | प्राङ्तकल्पतकः १४ कचिन्न निऽकम्प-तुरऽक-मुऽ- नमण्क्रिया-संस्छृत-तस्करादां । च स्त्वत्ययोरत्र भषेत्‌ afan चैत्यादिके सत्वर-गत्वरादो ॥४॥ निकङम्पो षट्क द्विः एवं तुको gat णमक्षिरिया विप्रकषः । सक्ष ` बिन्दु- लकिद्धिः। aed) सर्वत्र पसयोटेक । aad rang) tad 'असश्ं इत्यादि । चेत्यादौ तु Aaa सत्तरो TAT इत्यादि | तरं स्थस्य नातिथ्यपदे alae: ्च-तस-पस एषाम इह च च्छ इषः | लक्ष्म्ादिषु क्वापि भवेत्‌ स्पृहाया स्याद्‌ चोतसवेऽपीह तथोत्‌ सुक च ॥५॥ मिच्छा रच्छा इत्यादि। आतिथ्यादौ तु आतित्थं पच्छिमं अच्छेरं इत्यादि | मच्छो मच्छरो इत्यादि । जहा-पश्चच्छं ` विप्पस्स ण मच्छलिच्छा | उस्समो तस्सयुओ | लक्ष्यादि य॑था -- ' लक्ष्मीः aea: wg मत्तिकादि- रूत्‌त्ति्ता-कन्ञोऽस्त इह प्रदिष्टः षणे क्षमाथाप्रपि वा च्छकारः अर्यादि बृन्तेष्वपि दभ्यते ज ॥६॥ लच्छी सरिच्छो मच्छि °उच्छित्तो . रिच्छो अच्छा आदिशब्दात्‌ छेत्तं छीरं वच्छो इत्यादिप्रहः। कापीति -स्प्रहा | शचा ]। क्षिणादौ छणं छमा ‘gest अच्छी वच्छो पक्षे खणं खमा Heat अक्खी रुक्खो | स्याद्‌ दयययो ज्ञो नियमेन नित्यं शय्याभिमन्योरपि अऊहनीयः | मोः भ्यह्ययोः प्र्तरिते तु श छो भूतिकः पल्लनयोः ates: isi (४) 1 1, चञ्च 21) gaw for असच्च. (४) 1 17155. पच्छञ्च । विप्पद्य, (€) 1 11. eet, 201, उच्छित्ति. 3 mss. स्वषा-मिष्छा (?) 4 1. ङ्च्छम्‌ for कच्छ), १५ दित्व-विधानम्‌ [ १. ३. ८-१० शस्य जो यंथा विज्जा asst इत्यादि । य॑स्य कञ्ञं aren इत्यादि | asm अहिमञजू उतो दीधः | ध्यस्य सजो अञ्फासो इत्यादि । द्यस्य वज्‌भो दज इत्यादि । प्रक्षरितः पज्‌फरिओ मृत्तिका पत्तनयो युक्तस्य टः मिद्टिभा ऋत इत्‌ कोपः TENT । धरतादिभिन्तेषु भवेथा - छो श्रः एकारो गदितः खधीरः | स्थुध तं मूर्ताते-मुहत-वार्ता संवत-संकीतेन-वतिकाश्च ॥८॥ तस्य टः स्यात्‌ Ea वत्म॑न्‌ ae नान्तत्वात्‌ एसि हो wR न BR सोर भ। केवटरो ta एत्‌ इत्यादि | धृतदिस्तु धुत्तो मुत्तो युते हस्वः । एवं परत्र अन्तो YEW वत्ता संवत्तो संकित्तणं वत्ति | आवत -कीलि अपि वत्तमानः पूतिस्तथा afta कतरीद्रक्‌ । ara ठबगान्त स्तत एकारोऽः स्थिनान्वितो डः ag भिन्दिपाखे ie "ूर्तादौ आवत्तो Peet उरत्तमाणो get वत्ति ओ कत्तरी आङ्कृतिगणोऽयं sea टो वायथा यष्टिः west मुष्टिः मुदरी अस्थिशब्दस्य स्थः द्रः अट्टी अन्त्यलोपः। शविण्टो ताखविण्टो इत्यादि । भिण्डिवाखो | SNAG AMAT डा वितदि-विलदि-रपदंके देः | ढो धेग्धयोः स्यादि aorta न स्निग्ध-गावधन-निर्धनादो ॥१०॥ ng सम्भडडणो गडड- | हो ] विअड डी विच्छडडी कवडडभो aga वडटः प्राग्‌ ढस्य डः। विद्धः ` विअडहो । ज्िभ्धादौ तु सिणिद्धो get इत्यादि। गोवद्धणो णिद्धणो । (९) 1 mss. टकारो for इकारो. 2 mss. दद्याच, vat, 3 7. Fast तालेवेगटो. (१०) 1 mss, fae). AD मनि १. ३. ११-१४ | प्राङ्तकत्पतशः पञ्चाशतः पञ्चदशस्नोचणो णो न्यक्ञयो ह स्य aaa fas | स्तः ` वस्तम्बभिक्नेऽन भवत्‌ | थकारः | पतां विभाषात्मनि च प्रदिष्टो ॥११॥ पण्णासा स्त्रियाम्‌ आत्‌ हलो BIG: । पण्णरह्‌ | म्नस्य पञ्जुण्णो | रावण्णां (7) . इत्यादि । न्यस्य धण्णो ‡अण्णो इत्यादि । ज्ञस्य पण्णा सण्णा इयादि । चिण्णं | स्तस्य स्तुतिः AZ हस्तः हत्थो इत्यादि | :स्तम्न तु तम्बो मस्य टुक्‌ । आत्मा अप्पा अत्ता च । पक्षे अप्पणो णो रक्ष्यते+ । माहाल्म्यन्तादाल्मच्पदे त निस्य पः GLAS कमस्य च साधनीयः | फ: प्पस्फयोः स्पस्य च सिः कचित्‌ स्यात्‌ गोजिहिका-गहरयो- भकारः ॥१२॥ माहप्पं ताअप्पं | FERS AACA -पः स्यान Fos तथा क्मस्य पः रुप्पिणी acy इत्यादि । प्पस्पयोः फः स्यात्‌ पुप्फं प्राकर फस्य पः सप्फं इत्यादि । स्पस्य gear फन्दणं इत्यादि । कचिदिति प्रतिस्पद्धः `पडिसिद्धीति। गोजिन्भिभा THAT | रस्तू्य-पयेन्तक-धरैयं शोरी- याश्र्थ-सोन्द्य समे खल्व यः। ga विभाषा कथितः सुधीरः रिथस्त चोर्यादि- | षू ] नित्यमत्र ॥१२॥ तूरं पेरन्तं धीरं सोडीरं अच्छेरं सुन्दरं । सम-प्रहणम्‌ आक्रृतिगणत्वसुचनाय | सुरो asst । वचोर्यादियथा-- चोय च शोय च aia वीर्यम्‌ आश्चयमप्यत्र ' पटम्ति केचित्‌ | पर्य॑स्त-पर्याणक्र सोमाय BAT पयेड्पदे विभाषा een य॑स्य fray स्यात्‌ चोग्िः सोरिअ बीरि अच्छेरिअ' उति कैचित्‌ | पर्यस्तादेयस्य लः स्यान्‌ पछ्त्थो पल्ाणओ AISA पटक पक्षे ISHS । (११) 1 mss, सम्मभिमी, 2 1. gay forga, 2. 11855, स्ताश्रभ्नो. 4 7), qaqa. (१२) 1, 7188. प्रति छि gfe: (१३) 1, 0. समग्रहरेन। (१४) 1, 7, परन्ति ( बद्न्ति ), १७ युक्त-षिधानम्‌ | १७ Ze १५.१८ हो वाष्पे काषापणकेः हकारः कुष्माण्डके स्त्रीविषये सदा | स्यात्‌ | | ष्मस्मक््म पषा PAIL THT "न्ते: एण-स्नयो SUEY च सत्यतो ण्डुः ॥१५॥ हस्य जीहा faget इत्यादि । वाष्पः वाहो अश्रुणि विषयेऽभिधानं “ तेनान्यत्र वप्फो | Mera कोदण्डी । प्मस्य प्रीपष्मः fied इयादि । [ cae | विस्मयः विम्हभो इत्यादि । [ क्ष्मस्य पक्ष्म: ] पोम्हो eet । अस्य प्रभः पण्डो । ष्णस्य कृष्णः कण्हो विके कसणो | विष्णु For इत्यादि सस्य स्नानं ण्हाणं विकषे' सिणाणं इत्यादि | क्षणस्य meet aos कलोपः | तीक्ष्णं तिण्हं युते हस्व इत्यादि | युक्तेषु पूवं [स्थ] भवेद्‌ fans: | ष्छघा-ह्पयो जादपदे च Tea | । अतत्‌ स कृष्णे तु पुनविभषे- ध द्वारपयन्तम्‌ इहापरिष्ः ॥१६॥ युक्तस्य पूर वर्गस्य अता सह विकरः स्यात | सलाहा खमा सारङ्गो रभणं HAN पक्षे कण्डो द्वारपयन्तं विकर्षाधिकारः | ध्री-ही-ङ्ान्त-क्रिय-क्ठेश~म्छान-स्वप्नेऽह-वषयोः | qe च हवं च नित्यं स स्याद्‌ इता सह ॥१५॥ एषाम्‌ इता सह विकषः स्यात्‌। सिरी oferty युते हस्वः। किरि! Pasay | मिलाणं सिविणो ईषदादित्वात्‌। अत इन्‌ अरिहो वरिसो फरिसो 6पस्य फः रेफस्य fans: | [ after ] हरिसो । भार्यादिके बाथ eg! दशाह क चिश्नवषारजनीमुखे तुः । स्नेहे विभाषा च भवत्यदिहुभ्यां स्नाने तथा विपदे इता ar ॥१८॥ (१४) 1 0. [च ] 71. ष्म 20. नपरो saat कारश. ( मपर eat) 3 णच ग्र aA 7. मे indistinct, 4 mss. व्रिधानं. 5 0. WEA. (१६) 1 0, श्रतोत्‌ | अतत्‌ | (yo) 1 xn. fafa for faa, (yc) 1 mss, e# for om, 2 mss. षु, P— 3 | १.३. १९; ४.९ | प्राङूतकद्यतषरः ५ भार्यादौ इता वा विकरः स्यात्‌। भारिभा पक्षे wen दसारो ets न रेफस्य fe: । वस्सा-रअणीमुहं अन्यत्र after इता विकषः। “मता सणेहो-वि इता सिणेहो पक्वे-वि cet ° चिह्न होन्ति चण्डः अता सणाणं fa at सिणाणं ‘meni पि ऽसाकष्टमतं °वितिण्णं ॥' बरिही पक्षे रकि वही हस्य न द्विः। देता सह उया पदै एवं वाच्या वा पद्मतन्वीसद्रशे सशटोता | कश्मीर -वेश्म-स्मर-घस्मरादो वरे qaat grates ॥१६॥ जीभ पद्यादेरुता विकषंः स्यात्‌। वा राब्दा[त्‌] ala व्यवस्थितविभाषया पठमं पक्षे पोम्म अत उन्‌। TE Wee Ges awl कसुमीरो वेसुमो ' नामत्वात्‌ पसि सोर्‌ ओत्‌ हरो लोपः । सुमरो ण्घमुमरो gat wa दद्ुकि वार वल्क दर| इति प्राङरृतकल्पतरौ एकोन |विंशतिङ्घसुमेये ्तस्तबकः ॥ [ चतुर्थस्तबके द्वित्व-विधानप्‌ | GRAINY WIZ अनादे- द्वित्वं तथा `कादिविघेरपीह्‌ | नीडादिके चाथ वुनबिमाषा समास-सेवादिषु साधनीया ॥१॥ एषां feed ea । भत्तो पसत्तो इत्यादि । ऽकादिविपेस्तावत्‌ मटक “हत्थो इत्यादि । अनादेः किं ऽथम्भो मसाणं नीडादेस्तावत्‌ cee जोभ्बणं Inve 2 7. चिश्र 3 7, चिक्म्‌ 4 7. गणं sn. aaweaa 61). हतिम। (१९) Ion. नात्वात्‌ परसिमो वन्‌ eet लोपः 2 n, वेसुमसे। (१) व 7. वगख, 2 7. कौऽधि 3), कादिवोषक्षावत्‌ 4 7). खो 7. wR Sn. aT समाणम्‌ for gay मसाण. “ १६ दित्व-विधानम्‌ | १. ४. २-४ इत्यादि | यत्र यतर पूचलक्षणविषयो fate इयते तत्र [ तत्र ] नीडादित्याद्‌ द्विरुक्तिः | उत्तरिज्जं करणिज्जं इत्यादि । समासे यथा +णईस्सोत्तं णदसोत्तं णडम्गामो णरदेगामो इत्यादि। सेवादियथा- सेवेश्वरो | पूष्यमिहैकमनत विश्वास-पक्राशिव-दुःखिता स्युः । वैलोक्य-देवाश्वक-कणिकाराः- सस्यं च कोतूहलम्‌ एवमादि ॥२॥ Seat सेवा इस्सरो इसरो geal पसो एक्कं एकं विस्सासो वीसासो पिक्कं पि । अत इत्‌ असिव्वं असिवं दुक्खिभं दुदियं तेटोक्कं dere देव्वं दइन्वं अस्सो आस अयुते आन्‌ नित्यं कण्णिञारो काणिभायो सस्सं सासं अयुते अत आत्‌ । ऽकोउदृषं कोउहष्टं आदिशब्दात्‌ tam खण्णु इत्यादि कचिदप्राप्निप्राप्निविधिरयम्‌ | दित्वं मते प्रारृतशासनानां पदात्‌ पदादाबपि 'ल््यृ्टया | न स्यात्‌ ¶ुनस्तद्‌ `रहयोरभोीष्ट ज्ञादेश्च Fares थ परस्य बिन्दोः ॥३॥ | द्वित्वम्‌ ¦! प्पिम प्प]तत्त-प्पयुद्ध-प्पाणं इत्यादि । धीरं “जोहा टुक्‌-शेषस्य न द्विः एवं संखा सुखं आणा आणत्तो इत्यादि । द्वितीयस्य हितीये च area प्रथमो भवेत्‌| aque चतुथं च तृतीयस्तत्‌ कमादिह्‌ ॥४॥ शक्यो वर्धो वच्छो वजो छटटी ऽवड्ढो हत्थो “द्धी पुष्फं meat इत्यादि | | इति srataraa Safa: कुसुमेटित्वस्तबकः ॥ 5 प. शसन्तं ated asa णश्गनामो. (र) 1 mss. qafaa ( ह. 71. ) कमिव 2 mss. मै (7. दै) वारककरिकायां (11. दवाश्रकर्णिंकारः) 3 "0. ASH MU, 4 mM. Brad. (३) 1 "0. merge (weer). 2 7, offre ( रमोरटम्‌ }) 300. srer[ x | 3 mss. एपपिएतभोच्य ( 1. ल ) सुद्धप्पकशम्‌ 4 MSs. जा ४) 1 5. fede: सहितीयश 2 1, चरस्य चतुर्थौ च ( चतुथः स aquy) 3 0. al. + nee} for ett [ पच्चमस्तबके सन्धिविधानम्‌ | ‘aga विभाषाबहुरं भवन्ति सन्धावचां रूपामिहाभिधास्ये* | हस्वयोऽपि ata कचिदप्यभीष्टो हस्वेऽपि gta: कचिदूहनीयः ue 3 जह्‌।(सुहं “Hage Bees जउणामडं णईसोत्तं णईस्सोत्तं कण्णडगौ HOTU इत्यादि । वेणवणं वेणवणं इत्यादि-- sa मभिन्न प्रथ क्रमेण योश्च वातो न वुनद्योश्च | ध्ये मध्यमे asig च सप्तपणें वदन्ति धीराः WS तददित्थम्‌ ॥२॥ प्रथमे मभिन्न प्रथे अत od क्रमेण धीरा वदन्ति । ged पदुमं पुदुमं न पुनद्रयोश्च पटमं । मध्यमं मज्िमं पक्षे मञ्ममं | सप्रपण छत्तिवण्णो छनत्तवण्णो पस्य a: THONG इति | परेण पूर्वेण च Larqarg- रको -गुणं क्वापि पदेषु धीराः! RAL] संगुक्त-परस्य हस्व *फओऽपि सयुक्त-पर च हस्वः ॥२॥ +कण्णिओरो [ कण्णेरो | कण्णङरो कण्णो? । राएसी राअडइसी इत्यादि | feat अप्पा इत्यादि । वररुचिस्तु दीरधादिषु विकल्पयति । दिगृघो der वर घो वाहो °इत्याद्युदाजहार च । तन्नेच्छन्ति अपरे । | भोत्तव्वं | सुद्धप्पणं इत्यादि । सकारसंयुक्तल्वुकीह दीघ पूवर नित्यं विदुखत्‌ सुकादो | faaqantat स्थितिरव तस्य qa: पदे बापि र उक्त Zarat ॥४॥ ऊसुभो RGA ऽपुणङत्त पुणोत्त आ च | ig: 1 1). ae (अजन्‌) < 11. ०विधाख्य, 11. ofrerer 3 7. et@ for oye (३) 1 1). °्मान्त for न्माह ८ 7. गुणः 3 mss, पदेषु 0 परेषु 4 mss. एत्ति ( ए श्चि ) sn, aera 6 11155. 200 west) west 7 0. sarees, 8m. वुत्तपप, 1. gece (४) 1 0. gare (शकार) 2 n. मादौ वारौ. 3 mss, yreuat ( 2). चा ) Freee. २१ सन्धि-बिधानम्‌ | १. ४. Yes भदुजेनादो तु विसजनीय- युतोपसगस्य वदन्ति दीप्‌ | भवेद्‌ SEB दुजहभश्च तथा FRAY दुउहटटभञ्च ॥५॥ दूसिक्खिअ' । दूसिविणं । gaat तु दुञ्जणं दुस्तरं gat इत्यादि । CASA दुङख्अ TIGA | ale: पदस्यापि तथा निस्क्तं वा बाहिर स्याट्‌ बाहर वहा च | अतो ate ATARI ओत्वं वदन्त्यत्र WAZ PLATT ॥२॥ वाहिरं aft व्ही च। ads मरनं {सरोविअणं [ सिरविअणं | इत्यादि | इनः पदान्तस्य सद्‌ा भवत्‌ स्स ` तस्मिन्नयुस्वार ल्ुगप्यभीप्ः | अपेः पदान्ते यवम्‌ उशन्त नित्यं धीरा *अनुस्वारपरस्य पि च isi +कण्डो -ति गोवि-त्ि ऽधणं-ति Sasei-fa "अनुस्वारे छोपः' विप्पो-वि अग्गी-वि धणं-पि तुमं-पि। 1 स्वं -विकस्पेन भवन्युपस्य तथा भवेद्‌ ओच्मबापयोश्च | रहो agree विवुखि बाराणसीव्यत्न रणारपि स्यान्‌ ॥८॥ उपहसितं safaar उअहसिअ उदहासिओ | उअहामिओ उअहासाविसो उहासाविभो अवहसिभओ ओहासाविओ ओहामिओ इत्यादि । °महारष्टो acest [ वाराणसी बाणा ] रसी | (५) ton, दुगं" for दुस्तर, (७) 1 1. तस्य fed स्वरे 4 गद्यानिष्टः for this foot, 2 71, ( वियुणन्ति ). 3 1. serge 4 on. aos fA गोपि-्ति, 5 1. धण-सि. 6 10. मजभं 7 0. खशु सारे for qyarkt (८) 1 mss, St 2 1. विक्ललख्यितं. 3 1. महाराटे महाशसौ, As Al 2. ४. 8-22 | AT HAR MATS: तथा करेण्वां ‘a तयोविधेया 'छनोस्तु sarang? विभाषा | इटो भवेतां मलिने छिनोवां दत्े-डाहो °दृत्तिणे आद्यतश्चात्‌ ei कणेरू BONS पक्षे आलाणं मदं मिणं 'डादहिणं दच्छिणं | प्ररं गृहस्याप्यतो त नित्यं वहो dara बृहस्पतो च । BIN हरश्चन्द्रसखमपु णस्य स खग्रा५ॐः यस्य परण साधम्‌ ॥१०॥ घरं पतं eas भयप्पदं हरिअ'दो तेतीस तेरह | उदुम्बर दस्तु विभाक्वितोऽयं तशा AHIT च माजनेषु | mara यस्थ fast च भवदा बस्य च यावकरादो ॥११॥ उम्बरं GAY उडउम्बरं भाणं भाजणं Bisa Hesse fae किसख्अ' किशख्य शब्दस्य य-लछोपो यावतः जा जाव . तावतः! ता ara | हले त्वगन्तस्य ततः ल्ियाम्‌ आत्‌ विद्यत्ताडदुभ्यां न पुनभंवेह्‌ आत्‌ ' । रार: HAT हः शरदोऽप्यकारा दिक्‌ WTI: संऽपसर आायुर्षोचा ॥१२॥ सरो afe जति (?) वा अण्पा stg इत्यादि ततो हल्‌ श्यामात्‌ । आमि अन्त्यस्य हरो टक्‌ पडि fase तडी गिरा धुरा। ख्व्‌ वाध्यते एवं परत्र Ber परभा नस्य 2अकारः। दिसा पाडसो अच्छरसा अच्छा चिराउसो Frere 1 (~) 1 11. नरयोविंधया for च तवोवि्थ्रा 2 1. wate भालान० 3 1. दकखदाषी 40 Baa (णशब्ट्तश्च) 4 1). efem (7०) 1 mss वष्टोविश्रा for ates 2 1. are (११) 1 11. किसलये (१२) I 17155. 071 आत्‌ 2 7. ate for wane: 23 सन्धि-बिधानप | १. ५. 23-86 प्रार्‌ शरत्‌ पुसि तथा न-सान्ते धण्डे नभः प्रेम-गिसे-धनूसि | “वु षण्डयोः स्थगु ण-टोचनादयाः पर्नावरो भ्जिष्वपि ` संप्रयोऽय। ॥१२॥ पाठसो सरओ जक्खो +रक्खो इत्यादि | सरो पञ इत्यादि | णभ Gee सिरं धणुं गुणो गुणं छोभणो stot पण्डो qe wet अअडा अअडी अअडं इत्यादि | lai ' विभाषात्ति च cieage कश्मीर सामेमनि च सदोष्ना | निन्दोस्तु ga ऽविशसमेषु नित्यं दीघस्तथादरिह BAIA: ॥१४॥ अच्छी अच्छि ^रस्सीए ऽरस्सिणा get gee कसुमीरी सीमा “पडिमआ ‘grea वीसा तीसा विरात्रिशतो बिन्दुखोपे आदेर्दीघः | मो 1 बिन्दुरन्त्यन्तु भवञ्च नित्यं बिन्दोरचि स्थाद्‌ इह वा मकारः | मांसादिके वा स्थितबिन्दुलोपो नित्यं पुनः संस्टृत-सिहतव्ये॥१५॥ वच्छं मणि इत्यादि । मंसं मासं एवं कह कहं णण णृणं वच्छेषि वच्छ वच्छेसु वच्छेसु [ फुरिसाण | कुरिसाणं ang ang इत्यादि । यत्न कुत्रापि वृत्तभङ्- भयात्‌ क्रियमाण बिन्दुखाप्यो भवति, यत्र नास्ति तत्रापि भवति | संस्कृतं सक्कं + सिहः सीहो । ' डणोस्त tareeia नोऽपि अस्य भ्वर्ग्यान्त वा | स्याद्‌ | "ययि “सम्भवा, ऋक ल्‌ र US तथा जथा च शाषो ्िशगश्च न सन्त्यमुषाम्‌° ॥१६॥ ङण]न चां हि बिन्दुः स्यात्‌। अगः संघः अकः व॑चणीयाद विभः Ga अङ्कः सङ्घः वश्वणीआहं faen इत्यादि । ऋ तरर ल्ट [ओ ai विसर्गस्य च सर्॑त्रा- प्रयोगः | जेषानां स्वातस्त्रेयन संयोगादौ स्यादत | (ca) In, न-सान्तौ, 2 71. प्व्वौोवयौः 3 mss, Gey ( न्योज्यौ). 4 1. aR 5 1. ag (१४) Ion. विभाषास्ची. 5 7, व्श aay. 4 0. रसूसौए 5 11. रसरसिष्ण tafe 6 11, पटिमा 7 mss, सदमडग्रा. | (१५) 1 mss. waa भवश्च (wae भवेच्च । 2 11. अन्ये for तुच्छे 3 mss. ara for मंस, 4 7), fae. (१६) 1 7. Gale for ew. 2 mss, वर्गात्त 3 mss. यदि, 4 1) स्मरादौ 5 7158 एवलपगे (1. यवौ ) 6 mss सन्ताभ्युन्यत्‌ 7 सर्व प्रयोगः. १. ५. १,७-२१ | WHaARITAG: २४ बिन्दागमो वक्रपदादिमभ्ये वक्रं पशु-स्पशन-दशेनाद्याः । ततस्तु दा त्वस्य qi च भावे कुत्रापि लग्‌ वस्य पुनविभाषा ॥१७॥ वेकं dg फंसणं दंसणं आदि शब्दात्‌ माणंसिणी इयादि | इत्यादि पीणत्तणं पीञत्तणं Haifa कतं Heat च । भाल्विस्ववन्ता मत॒पा निरुक्ता ' आछेन्तमन्ता अपि षड्‌ भवन्ति | हनुमदादो हणमादयः स्युस्‌- तत्रेव क्वचिद्धणमन्त Para: esi Mes Kes terra tars णेदित्त णेहमन्ता हणुमा हणुमन्सो । खज ल्वुकादावुदित erat ' माला बह सस्छृतसंप्रदायात्‌ | स्वार्थे भतो केवलमह्-णटो ्राकल्य माण्डव्यमते हकारः ॥१६॥ रल्नालर्हणी ` मालव इत्यादि । स्वाथं wae । पुत्र एव पुत्तहो । स्षत्रादिणी aia निरुक्ता a: ` पीतविद्यद्धरितादितो बा | रः स्यात्‌ ऽदुखादार्बाप ऊरहनीयो get दकारस्य भवदधो रः ॥२०॥ खत्तिणी पीथं पी fast विज्जू afters after get सुहं इन्दं बन्दर । सम्बन्धमान्ने इम-शट वतो “तस्येदमाथ TASATE: | कुत्‌साच्चकम्पादरिषु को निरुक्तो मय द्वित्वं स्यान्‌ महभ मभ च ॥२१॥ + सम्बन्धे घरिमो धरिष्टो इदमथं घरं । saat avers Cages ९मम। णारीमह्य' णारीमअ । पीणदा पीदा (१९) 1 mss, ararak (माणव) 2 11. पमौतविद्युन्‌ कच्दुतितो 3 7. मुखादयोऽपि (१८) Im. sana. 2 in, भादि; 4 7. स्वौ (२०) 1 mss. सै्ादिणौ ( चवादिणे ) (२१) 171, सहज्मात 2 1). कुतृसा कन्ितेषु [gq] 3 mss, मयित. 4 7 व्महश्नो 6 7, waded wale, २५ सन्धि-विधानम्‌ [ १. ५. २२-२५ ' अवन्तमन्र जरतो वदन्ति He तृणं नित्यमिर सुधीरः | erat व्यव्‌-विधो ears इअ तूण ऊणम्‌ः +उभाणमप्यादिश्तीह कश्चिन्‌ ॥२२॥ "गअवन्तो पढवन्तो इत्यादि । शीले "भमिरो Mai भमिरी इत्यादि । घेत्तूण "काडण सोजभाण इत्यादि । क्वाथं | तु तुं | शंसन्ति केऽपि धीरा शाकल्य-माण्डव्यमते विलोक्य । आरस्तु मध्यादिकेषु विभाषा प्रयोगतः सन्धिविधो निषक्ता Ral "2S खणं मे णअणे फलदं | मज्छ्भारो मज्ज्ञारञ | Foz eqaed त्वप्रुप्मिन्‌ दाटादयश्चात्र निपातनेन | काढा Aen afog णडारगोसो कन्दोट्र-मामी पिडसी च गोला ॥२४॥ ्रष्टायां दाढा दुहितरि धुआ इदानीं एण्हि wer णडं प्रत्यूषे गोसो उततपले कन्दोट मातुल्यां मामी पित्रस्वसरि पिडसी गोदावर्यां गोला इत्यादि । ततदेरीय- । प्राकृतं निपातनात्‌ सिद्धं । य्क्षणेनानुतपन्नं तत्‌ सवे निपातनेन सिद्धमिति कायायनाद्यः ¦ एवं -अशोकमास्यं सोमं सोमं अण॒कारं ATTA HONE जयकारः जअकारो जोक्कारो जयक्कारो इत्याचयहनीयम्‌ । वाच्यं HEPAT पुर-दूर-कला-माराऽ बा-कोमल हाखा-चामर-भाल-काल-कमला-' कीङाट-तूखाखिलाः | छीखा-केलि-* तमाल-घुन्वर-खल-वाला-मूला-लालसा हेटा-काहर-गोल-तुङ्-कङृह-गोविन्द्‌-रामाद्यः ॥२५॥ (२२) 1 10. श्ररन्तं 2 1. क्तल्य. 70. क्राल्यप्‌ः 37. उण. 4 1. तुश्राणम्‌° for उभ्राणम्‌> Sn. गभरन्तो, Weta. 6 7, afaz, 7 mss, कण, (23) इ mss, क्ारयेएसंगति ( 1. क्राथतुमं शाखति ) 2 7. ag for es 3; फ़रलिन्त for wife. (२४) 1 on. sa (प्रोक्त ) for प्राज्नत. 2 n, awa माल्य for waa माय, (२५) 1 mss. कीलालावलामिलाः (on, ata गग्डामिला; ). 2 0. तजा for ame, 3 7. मृलोल सा ( मूल लोला लसः ) P—4 १. ५. २६-२७ : £. १-२ | UMRARGIAS: २६ हरि हर-सुर.भीमश्चण्ड-भङ्ो पुर!रिः + करर-खर-तरन्टं स्मान्‌ शङ्करो वेणु-रण्‌ः | गुण-गण-पण-हासा १ मण्डर मण्ड-खण्ड +वसुण-तसण-धीर-साल -देहा दिकाया: ॥२६॥ ठेरादयो मता देश्या :स्थतिराद्यसिधायिनः। ऽतथानुकरणे णञ्दराः प्रायो +सणमरणादयः ॥२७॥ इति प्राक्ृतकल्पतरौ "सप्रविशानिकसुमेः सन्धिस्तवक्रः | [ षष्ठस्त्के सुबन्तविधानप्‌ | न ` सुपतिडमं द्वित्वामिह “sais. तथा चतुथी न कदाचिदेव | दित्वे बहुत्वं परियोजनीयं वष्ठी चतुर्यामपि योजनीया ॥र॥ gat cement: gut भ्सुञओजस्‌। अप्‌ ओ qa, टा भ्यां fra) Seaj va) sf म्यां भ्यस। sa ata अप्‌। डि ओस्‌ र्‌ । स्याद्‌ ओदर अतः सो- ‘ata भश्च शस्मेट्‌ 2 त्वग्‌ जस-णशसो al तु ङि-*भ्यग्‌-ङ्सीनाम्‌ | Sr gq aU! सदा तु टामोर fat ङसावामि तथा भ्प्रसि carat ॥२॥ च्छो AAAI ?असहो FeAl वच्छा भुअङ्धा °वसहा azar [ वच्छे, years, वसह, AIS, वच्छे वच्छेण, वच्छाण || (२९६) In, करत्वरत्‌ (qr) am. 2 1). गन्धारो for स करोर ZN, भरग्डत्नामण्डमक्ड़ 4 1. वस्णतम्परि रशोना eer दिकाद्याः. (२७) Ion, स्वादयो. 2 on. तु विवाद्यविधचिन्‌ for म्थविरादयाभिधायिन. 3 7. भधालुकरंणः; 4 1. ऋणा BUT. %§S mss. om. सप्र. (१) 1 mss, मुतिङ* 2 7). प्रयोज्य, 0. प्रयुज्य, 3 आमु {7 सुश्री. 4 nom. श्न, (२) Jon. यसि arg. € on पमि for nae, २७ स्वयन्त चध्चानम्‌ | १. ६. ३-६ भिस्‌ षु [पो | रित्यत्र सदा भवह्‌ पद्‌ अमस्तु Baa बिन्दुः | ततो भिसो हिचङ्मेदुदोहि- हिन्तो च सुन्तो भ्थस पव नित्यम्‌ ॥२॥ वच्छ HEI । वच्छ कीस(¶व्रच्छेहि वच्छाहिन्तौ वच्छासुन्तो | भवन ङसः स्सश्च तनौ णम्‌ आमो डम सुपः खः कथितः wae: | qty सुभिससुपस्विदुतोस्तथा णो ङसि-डसाबिति सदा वदन्ति iy ङसि वच्छस्स आमि वच्छाणं [ वच्छाण | "व्रा St एत्व वच्छे सन्धौ एत एन ¦ ‘aa वच्छम्मि | सुपि वच्छेसु। एवं मुअङ्धादयः । अग्गी वाङ | जसौ ' त्वग्‌ वाच तथा भवद्‌ ओं ओ AT पर त्व््‌-ल्युकि दीघं इष्टः | षडत्र रूपाणि जसि aztea खा णा शसो णोऽथ ङसिङसोवां ॥५॥ ‘anit वणे wing ` तत्थ वाड | जन्ति अग्गी विउणन्ति बाड | कीखाणमजम करिओ विसन्ति। -गसन्ति पोम्मं करिवो sae | मअङ्गए केसरिणो जन्ति | वणे तटा केसरिओ भवन्ति। धाअन्ति केसरिवो मअङ्खअं । एतानि सर्वाणि बदन्ती- ear” अमि अग्गि ae) शसि अग्गिणो वाउणो णो वजंनात्‌ वाडणो न दीघ । टा परे अग्गिणा वाउणा। भिसि अग्गीहिं ask) डसि afing बाउदो अग्गीदो बाञ्दो अग्गीहि ale: भ्यसि अभीहिन्तो वाङहित्तो अग्गीसुन्तो वाउसुन्तो आमि अग्गीणं वाङणं । डो अग्गिम्मि बाउम्मि। सुपि अभीसु ase । सियाम्‌ उदौता विह हस्तोऽपि नित्यं शसो बा तु जशश्च BR स्यात्‌। हस्वोऽमि रा-ङम्स्‌-ङसि डति रषाम्‌ इदेददात्‌ स्याद्‌ विधिरक्रमेण ॥६॥ 3 mss ङरटसैवा च (11. रणम्‌ एता ). 4 mss. तधा wife स्थात्‌ for afa ate स्यात्‌, 5 mss. वसभ., (४) 1 mss. ard} @ शिवा iH. 2 mss, put before this सन्धो एत पत्‌ (४) I m, ait. 1). गणो 101 aaa. 21). तधा. 3 mss, गायन्ति for Tafa. १. ६. 9-8 | प्रारृतकस्पतकः २८ सो माला TE वाङ जसि ASS माङाओ पक्षे BH As च एवं णदेभो BAIA Te aaa SHV वहू । गामणीडउ गामणीओ Ta गामणी । अमि मारं Og ae गामणिं । शसि मालाड मालाम 1s णभ Ags वहूओ गामणीड गामणीभो । टे Ales मालाए आतोऽनदातो। ome ome [ णईअ | ण | aes वहूए चहूअ बहुआ | ' भिस्यादिषु ष्वपि रूपमित्थं नात स्त्वदातो पुनरदितो च । नपुंसके सोखूदितोऽज बिन्दु रि जस॒शसो ° दीघमपीच्छतीह isi fafa माहि of mate, डसि aa arm णद eT णदेअ देआ । कूद ॒वहूए aga aga ud उसिङ्योः । भ्यसि मालहिन्तो माखासुन्तो णडहिन्तो णद्वसुन्तो बहदहिन्तो वहू सुन्तो । आमि मालाणं णद्कणं वहूणं | खपि mer agg गामणीसुः । वणं वणाईइ afe दहीड' मण्डं AEs । Satan: Klara नामन्नरणे बिन्दुः Bret cay दोघां: | lequia पत्वं प्रवदन्ति धीरा “हैतस्तथोतश्च सदेव SEAT NAN अच्छीणि "पेच्छह्‌ HUGE | fale A Hee aww a Alin a aS SANS हे णह हे वहु | सुप्यन्त इदा बहुलं च नाम्नः ' किमो यदश्वान तदः gaz | आद्‌ पव Harta भवेत प्रियादो -भआणंसिणीत्यादिष्ु नित्यमीन्‌ स्थात्‌ Wel छाही ऊहा ऽराही राहा इत्यादि। काजासा पक्षे कीड की sits sitet are ती सुवजे इति ‘fe टादौ :तु ate aie की कीभा इत्यादि नदीवन्‌। बटूर्परहणात्‌ अदेरपि °आण ईत्‌ एवं 7 मणं सिणीत्यत्न इदेव नात्‌ । (७) 1 mss, तख्यादििषु 2 7, wert. 3 1055, Seq भदिषतीषह, (८) 1 on. gta. 2 n, ¶ृलस्तथोतञ्च. 3 n. tex x x दे, 111. पेच्छह पुरङ्गसस se. (€) 1 0, कि तद्यद्‌शतरे aa. 2 7. मशोसिलौव्यादि (n. freq). 3 0. बाहो वाहा, 4 mss, add a at @ cancalled. २६ सुबन्त-विधानम्‌ | १. ६. १०-१३ ' आरस्त्तद्रन्तस्य Ba: Bas उद्वासा टं जसि Wawa | स्याद्‌ ्रनृ-जापः-पनप्बरोताः विभाषा ॥१०॥ amram सः | ३ BU जसि कत्तारउ पक्षे Baa उदन्तवत्‌। अमि कत्तारं। रासि FATS पक्षे BAT | टे Baier उति wa । भिसि कत्तारेहि । say “sara क्तारादु कत्तारादो Baie उति woot शोषा अदुन्तवत्‌ एवं श्रात्रादयः८ | श्रात्रादयस्तु भाअरो भाउ भा णवं जामाअरो जामाड जामा पिरो fas पिभा आमन्त्रणे हे मा हे जामा हु परजा धणं पि देहि fa a fare’ इत्यादि । मानुभवदात्‌ सुपि नत्यमल्र यातुननान्दुदुः हितुश्च वोध्यः! al Tit far at कथितोष्थडाणा जस्‌-शस्‌-ङसा णो णममा णमानः ॥२२॥ मा माखावत्‌। एवं जाआ णणान्दा दुहि । राआ जसि राणो ¦ आमि राआणं शसि राआणो । वामन्बणे सोरपि तिन्दुरत्र णा Remit णं संभकत्यात्‌ | ig: or ' उम्पादेशविधा agar UI ITA पुनरित सदेव ॥१२॥ हे राअं हे राआ। जसि राआणो अमि राणं शसि राणो टे रण्णा अद्वित्व- पक्षे ई राइणा war भिसि राणि डसि रण्णो । राणो वित्तं आमि राणं : 'ब्राहन्तवरद्राजपदस्वरू" sea fare खलु राजवत्‌ स्थुः | -पुंस्यान आदेश इहायनश्च तथात्मनाऽप्पाण Fela AT स्यात्‌ NII (१०) 1 mss. तुद्ख for सूदन्तेपरस्य. ~ mss. ° पिटसुखेताव्‌ for faradar. 3 mss. add anit befor कत्तारा. 4 miss WAIez° (११) 1 90. आत्‌ >, (१२) 1 mss.afcay HAT. १. %. १४-१६ | URARCTA: 30 वाऽदन्तबद्‌ इति cant राआ राअ' राए राण्ण राणि इत्यादि । द्वित्वे “णण वजंयित्वा THAT | अप्पाणादेशमाव्रपक्षे आत्मनः पदानि “ज्ञेयानि । यथा अप्पा अप्पं हे अप्पा अप्पाणो अमि अप्पाणं शसि अप्पाणो । टे अप्पाणा भिसि अप्पाहि डमो ˆअप्पाड अप्पाटु अप्पादो अप्पाहि। स्यसि अप्पाहिन्तो अप्पायुस्तो डसि सप्पाणो आमि अप्पाणं डो अप्पेम्मि युपि अप्पासं । एवं ब्रह्माद्याः अप्पाणादेशो वा रूपानि वच्छववे | षन्‌ स TRAIT जसः शसाल्लुक्‌ ` नादेनमापोऽथ पवनश्च । रानु wai स्यन्‌ खञ्च faq सुपश्च पञ्चादिश्रम्पस्तु तप्रोभवदात्‌ 1793 कद्‌ पथ्व छम सत्त अद्र णम अदन्ताभावान्‌ `न आन णच | Hatz पश्चि छ अहिं ade अद्रृहि wale भ्यास कदहिन्तो कडसुन्तो पच्वहिन्तो पन्चसुन्तो egg) आमि। Bot wan इत्यादि। सुपि कडु पच्चसु इव्यादि । दाक्रस्यमत fea waite पच्च च इतीष्यत पच्चहिन्तो। पच्चण्णं Gag wag इति च। पषस्तु-भिस्‌सुपाः छाच। sax चिटटन्ति छम वेच्छ । भिसि छदि छएहि ane’ भ्यसि छञआहिन्तो। आमि geri | सुपि saa छसु ste इति च | मवा दिकरभ्यो जम CAST म्मित्थो तु डः fea a मवन्वि नभ्यः | क्रि aera इदमेतदश्च ania वसि ङस आस दभ्यरः ॥१५॥ जसि सव्वे ङ weafin सव्वत्थ सन्वस्सिं शो वच्छवत्‌। मवादयो यथा aq विद्व पर एक इतर इनम यतर यनम उत्तर उत्तम अन्य अन्यतर ga shan द्वितीय वतरतीय किं यदू तद्‌ णनद्‌ इद्‌ । प्रभृतयः । किमः कोम वक्ष्यते। सो को जसि के अमि कम्‌ शसि के ट sen बाहुल्यात्‌ किणा केणा पक्षे केण | ङसस्तुदा "सौ च ङस किमदेः स्सा से दयः सछ्रीविषयेष्थ Se | "SUT A Ae a Fear ae आणे तदो ङसेरो भिसि राम्‌ इ णश्च ॥१६॥ (१३) 1 17). व,दन्तवंदराज०. 11. वापिए०द, 2 mos, पदाच्यप) नां. 30. mee for adi, 4 0. x aif. 5m. 0. this. (१४) In, षट्‌गन्टरकैभ्यस. 2 1, Faq, (१४) Ion. प्राय. (१६) In. तो जनत्तो, 2 0. se for wa 217, दन्ना fcr ‘Sly २१ सुबन्त-विधानम्‌ [ १. ६. १,७-१८ भिसि केहि । ङसो कदो क्तो । स्यसि कान्तौ करासुन्तो कमि कास कस्स आमि केसिं काणं ङो afta कत्थ कस्मिं the काटे काणा कादि कद सुपि ta) सरीविषये बाहुल्यात्‌ कादौ wera) gat सुपि कटौ कन्तो भ्यसि काहिन्तो कासुन्तो | कसि कास कस्स । आमि केसिं कस्यापि ईतपक्षे नदीवत्‌ । इदेददातश्च भवन्ति। टे ate कीए की की | उसि परं कोड की कौ कौीञ। डसि alg कीए की की किस्सा कीसे किस्से आत GA टादौ काइ का | Sat काइ FIT | ङसि कासे कससे । शेषं माखावत्‌। नपुंसके स्वपभ्यां किमा- an किं जसि काट इत्यादि । यदः मौ जो जसि जे अमि ज इत्यादि किंवत्‌ । faa सौ जा जसि जाउ नाभो gaa ats जीओ। टादौ आतपक्षे जाई जाए aca sig जीए जीअ जोआ। sal stg जीए जीअ जीभा। आन्‌ पक्षो जाई FIG) ङसि जाद्‌ जाए AeA जसि जस्स । शेपं Haq) नपुंसकं ज जाद | तदः सो area वक्ष्यते, मोसोजसितं अमितं ङ्मिते। रे agm fam am पक्षे तेण arg ones णेणं । भिसि नेहि onze णेदि । उसो तदो तत्तो ओतुपक्ष सन्धो तो | बामातुसिणः डसिना sara सिया च 'कस्त्वत्र किमः सपि स्यान्‌ | स्वमभ्यां तु Ws पिहितः सदा fH तवेद मश्चेद्‌ मिणं खल्व स्थात्‌ ॥१९८॥ sfaa a उसि नस्सख्मासेआमिताणंःसिंणं डौ च afta तत्थ तस्मिं षुपि तेषु feat सो ar aia आन्‌ पक्षे ताउ ताओ ईन पक्षे तीउ तीभो अमि तं ङसि ताउ ताओ टादौ ताइ ताए ई पक्षे ती तीए ata star fafa ताहि दसो ag am alg तीए dia तीरा स्यसि ताहि ate eft तानु ate) पण्डे तं ताईं काल ताणा ताहे AZ इदमः पण्डे इद" Zoi च | अथदमोऽपीह इमः BIT स्यात अन्‌ स्सिं स्सगोर्वाथ ङ्िणा इहश्च | सुना हयं पुस इथ ferany आ स्थाद्‌ स्थो न चङ रतद्स्तु वासो ॥१८॥ (१७) 1 1), क श्रत for Maa, 2 mss. add मा befor सि (१८) 1 MSS, मुना इः ufe 32 far sr era. ota दौ ततद तुवो on. gars म्तियां इमा इन्रः म्यान्‌ cia a ~ = ~ ६ ^ ‘ ध न ङरेतन्‌ ण्मण्मं)). 2 11. vagfamae fufqy’. 3 गा-५, Gem १. ६, १६-२१ | प्राकृतकल्पतसं ३२ अथेति seq इमादेशः। सपि पुंसि इमो अअ च इमे इमं इमे इम हणा इमिणा मेणा पक्षे इमेण इमेहि' सि भ्यसि वच्छवत्‌ | उनि इमस्स इदमता समच अस्स | आमि इमाण zaftd | डौ इमम्मि न eta, इमस्सिं aad अस्सिं eal fear इई fat सुना इअ' -पक्षे इमा शेषं किंवत्‌ । एतदः सो एस एसो । एसो वसन्तो रमणी विअ] -एस पुण्णेण asd fafea’ sae) जसि Ue | पणं तु राऽपभ्यांसहवातु इण्ण ' तो स्थान्‌ `ङतेस्तोत्यपरे तलोपः | तदे तदोः तस्य च सोऽप्यषण्डे सो हादेशा वा ata मुः सदादः ॥१६॥ एण' इति टा अपृभ्यां सह एण इण्ण पक्षे °एदं पुच्छह्‌ । रसि एदे टा परे एण इण्णं पक्षे इद्णा एदिणा उभयत्यक्तपक्षे एदेण । भिसि cafe sat तोप-पक्े एतत पक्षे वच्छवन्‌ एदाह्‌ एदादो एदाहि एदाहुकि एदा भ्यसि एदाहिन्तो णदारुन्तो । डसि एदास पक्षे एदस्स आमि णदेसिं पप्ने ण्दाणं डो एदम्मि एत्थ एदस्सिं । सुपि ata । “ल्षयायुरोधा [ दिह ] कश्चिदाह, ठकखिज्जए एस +गञ हरि[स्स] | स्यादेतदः श्जीविषयेऽपि vq ऽनेतन्मतं प्राक्रतक्षासनानाम्‌।* षण्डे एतद्‌ एताई | इदमः सौ *अत्‌पक्षे अमु वायुवत्‌ अमू feat वध॒वत्‌ षण्डे मधुवत्‌ । gag ती दा सुपि च क्रमण स्यात्‌ तरै्रसा तिण्ण तथा शसा च | "दविस्तत्र वे दाण्णि च विण्णि वैण्णि- stant रूपाणि समीरितानि IRON त्रिद्रयोरिति। ते जसा तिण्णि शसा च तिण्णि। अन्यस्मिन्‌ अपिती भिसि तीहि भ्यसि तीहिन्तो तीमन्तो sar | शसाच ] वे दोण्णि विष्णि | वेण्णि इति | चत्वारि रुपाणि | व्रवीति भ्चतुरस्तार्भ्यां चत्ता ऽचत्तरोऽपि [ त॒ ] | चत्तारि वापि “चस्तरि चत्वारि प्राने बुधः WRU (१९) In. तो न्ती, 2n a@ (#4). 3 7. एवम्‌ ( एभम्‌) पच्छः. 4 1, TERA Sn. नेतदखतम्‌, 6 7), Sze for खट्‌ (२०) 1 mss, तल्लीतुं (तिम दै) 11. तसन्ुत्त for Ga (२१) 1 msg, qatfa (n. aaa), 2 n, aettfor ompsi, 3 7, चरो for चतरो. हह सुबन्त-विधानप | १. ६. २२-२४ व्रवीति | ताभ्यां जस्‌शसभ्यां चतुरश्चत्वारि रूपाणि । + चत्तारो चत्तरो चत्तारि चत्तरि इत्यादि । भिसि चङि भ्यसि रेफतकारयोर्छापि aay. भ्यसि चउद्िन्तो ARYA | उयादिश्रयाणां विदितं ण्णम्‌ भामः समानरूपाण्यपि च त्रिलिङ | स्त दरुदोतो त इतः पदादा भवन्‌-पदे सां भगवन्‌-पदै "चात्‌ ॥२२॥ द ° हस्वः। एवं क्मीनपुंसकयोरपि । द्विखण्डमिच्यस्य दुहण्डं दोहण्डं च । भवा FOE भगवा BE | त्यादित्रयाणामिति। भमि तिण्णं संयोगं हस्वः दवे: दोण्णं चतुरः च्ण्ण "सम्बोधनं site बिन्दुरिष्- शटाजसशसां काथ waa दो । गाकल्य-माण्डब्यमतायुरोधात्‌ शतान्यपि WMHAMATT ॥२३॥ सम्बोधने इति आमन्त्रणे हे भवं हे ward | टादौ भवदा भभषता [ कअ | भअदा भअवदा “ETA Geese वा । भिसि swe भघ्रवपहि'। | श्सो डसि च | भथवो भअवदो अदेः :भअदौ भअवदो धणाई' । भ्यसि भञादहिवन्तो भभासुन्तो ^भयवाहिन्तो भभवायुन्तो। आमि भमाण year धणाः। सुपि भमणएसु भमवणएसु । fa: पदस्येल्यधिकारमाहुः सो युष्मदस्तु' च तुमं भवेताम्‌ | तुशे च तुमे व जसीह qra लथामि तं a तुमं च 9a: स्युः ॥२४। इतः परं यत्‌ weed og पद्स्येवायम्‌ अधिकारः । सौ तं तुमं । जसि "वाभाभो वुञ्म तुम्हे Gea षडह । भमि तं तं तुमं वा पेच्छामि । 4 1, चरो wae. asf wardeanfe. 2 1. डाच ( faa )e 3 70. BATE सुटो (०२) 1 0. ara, (२९) Fon, माह्नः, ( खमिक्म-भ्यसमुपाम्‌ ). 4 mss, safe, 5 mss, भ्मबदो 6 11. om. भभरवाडिन्तो भश्रवासुन्तो. (23) 1 1). ate for arse}. P—s5 १. ६. २५-२६ | प्रारक्तकल्पवसः a3 तञ्मे च तम्हे ala ay च area: शाकव्य-माण्डञ्यमते तु ATT । खा तदतदे तुमए gars तव तुमे सक्च इह प्रदिष्टाः Ne vil qs इति । asm तुम्हे वो तुम्भे वा पेच्छामि। तं द gam तुमाः तप्‌ तुम तड वा कञः | तुञमोहि तम्द्ि ह प्रदिष्ट) qvate तच्तहि सबिन्दुकरा fe | TA THT च तुमा aat qare तो सन Sat तुमाहि ॥२१॥ aqraetfa । qsafe graft तुम्भेहि वा कअ । तत्त तुमादो तुमा तत्तो तुमादु तो तुमाहि वा गओ | fara च geal भ्यसि तुम्भ-तुच्छर assur त्रयाणामपि दीघ दष्टः | तुञ्ं तुअ ते तुह ATH a तृष्टं च सैव डसि wala ॥ : 5॥ हिन्त चेति । तुम्भाहिन्तो तुम्भासुन्तो तुच्छाहिन्तो तुच्छासुन्तो तुश्द्याद्िन्तो sara वा गम । gael तु ते तुह asa दे तुह वा ag | तुम्भाण FST च तुम्म FTA तुम्हाण तुच्डाण स्बिन्दुकानि। निबिन्दुकान्यप्युदितानि वो च ।त्रयोदशादेशाङतयस्तथामि ॥२८॥ तुम्भाणमिति | तुम्भाणं तुज्छयाण get ase तुम्हाणं तुच्छाणं वुम्भाण तुज्घ्चाण तुम्भ ISH तुम्हाण तुच्छाण वो `वा yong | लुम॑म्मि ङो स्यात Faq qa a Jaq ag प्राकृतशासनेश् | त॒ञ्मेख तम्देख aft प्रदिष्टो तुम्भेष्ठु " वाश्रोपरिविन्बधोऽपि ॥२९॥ (२५) 1 mss, 4a. (२७) 1 on. एतानामपि (श्ट) Ion. दशदश युवयक्षथामि. 2 "च fora, (श्ट) In. aq 2 7. चातो न (घ). २५ सुबन्त- विधानम्‌ | १. ६. 30-33 तुमम्मीति। तुमम्मि तुमए तुमे तए agar दिभः" । तुज्चेसं qa Gare वा दिभाई * | | ATCA: साव AKA AUT अहम्मि चाहं प्रवदन्ति सन्तः । av जसि स्थादभि मं ad अह म्मि णं चात्र भवन्ति पञ्च ॥२०॥ अथेति । अहम ह अहम्मि अह वा पेच्छामि। अम्हे श्होमो। fi ad fa अहूम्मि णं वा *पेच्छह्‌ । ave तथा "णो शसि तु प्रदिशं टे मै मप स्यु मह णोः ममाद | arene अस्मेहि sat सबिन्दू भिसि प्रदिशो सुधियाप्यतुस्मिन्‌ ॥३१॥ अम्हे इति । अम्हे 'णो वा पेच्छह। मे मण्‌ मणो ममाइ वा कञः | arene अम्हेहि' कअ । Sat ' ममाहो च तथा ममादु म्तौ fe age महीति पञ्च | हिन्तोश्च सुन्तो भ्यसि चाम्ह “qa- पदस्तावत्‌ MAHAN ATT ॥३२॥ साविति | ममादो ane मत्तो महत्तो महि वा ast, अम्हाहिन्ती अम्हासुन्तो वा गो | धीरा Tales मह as A a ममादि चत्वारि ‘sta बदन्ति, ATI 2थम्होण खदहवम्हो णो च स्युर आमि पते कथिता सुधीभिः ॥३२॥ धीरा इति । मह मज्कछमेमम वा TONS | अम्हाण अम्होण | अम्हो णो }) at aoe” । 3 ss, TH. fo mss. VATE , (३०) In माम्‌. 2. sal fa at fa ( Beat af म ) 31. पच्छ. (३१) 1 1), गा. 2 mss ams, 31) जोर). (३२) 1 mes ममा्दभ ममाह atl fe aaife qn. za x x, व्दति}, 2 mss. तचत्‌ पूषाव्रदत्त्ात्‌. 8३; 1 1. जसि ata, (sap व्दति 2 1, अमृहोगो, 3 on, q 4, १. {. ३४-३५ ; 9.2 | प्रारृतकस्पतसः ३8 ढे ङो ममस्सिं कथिते ममम्मि अम्देषु अम्टोसु ata प्रदिष्टो । ' साम्यं त्रिलिङ्चान्तु तयोः प्रयोगे aa निपाता विदितो BIT ॥३४॥ दे इति । ममस्सिं ममम्मि वा isa अगम्दोयु अम्हे वा fsa निपाता अगर वक्ष्यन्ते । कचिद्धिभक्तेश्च षिपययः स्याद्‌ ' विलोचनाभ्यां ' पिष कृष्णकूपम्‌ |” प्रयुज्जने तत्र बुधा `ङ्गियन्तो "विरोमे षु" ° पिह Reged” ॥३५॥ कचिदिति । कचिद्‌ विभक्तेर्विपययः ॥ इति प्राकृतश्षासने कल्पतरौ पच्त्रिशत्‌-कुसुमेः “सुबन्तस्तबकः । [ सप्रमस्तबके तिङन्तविधानम्‌ | अथ fae उद्यते | ये धातबोऽतर प्रथिता शटन्ता स्ते प्रारतेष्वेव भवत्यव्न्ताः | वदन्ति तेभ्यो aad पदं च तिङन्त कार्याणि धिना कमेण ॥१॥ तिङ्‌ यथा तिप्‌ तस्‌ fai स्िपथस्‌थ। मिप वस्‌ मस्‌। त आताम्‌ ह । थस्‌ आथाम्‌ ध्वम्‌ । इट्‌ विड महिङ्‌ । [ ति ] अन्त्येन डा युक्तो तिङ्‌ ्रत्याहारस्वरूपा | "सक्षात्‌ तु न स्थानिकाः ते यथा च्ट. छिडि छोट. खड ge fee युट्‌ आशीरिद ल्ट. लड: इति ददा स्थानानि यस्या सा तिङ्‌ इत्यथः । ये धातब इति ये धातुगणे प्रथिता हलन्तास्ते अदन्ता भवन्ति प्राकृतेषु । तेभ्यो धातुभ्यो वै उभयपद परस्मे आत्मनेपदं । तिङ्न्त कार्याणि च क्रमं [ विना ] भवन्तीटयर्थः | (३४) 1 1. areata fee नयोः प्रगे. (१४. 1 7), अपि fae for face. 2 n, कियन्तो for कियन्त], 2 90, पि ० for पिह, १) 1 7, बदति. 2m. waa ङम्‌ saa, 1). Way ae दिवक्तनम. 2 9. area म्थानिकानि, 29 विङ्न्त-विधानम्‌ | १. ७. २-४ स्यातामिदेतो ततिपोरिरहेष थस्सिप अन्यन्न सि से भवेताम्‌ | lam प्रयोऽयावनतः erate रिरो मिपो म भवतीह नित्यम्‌ ॥२॥ स्यातामिति । ततिपो “ग्युनक्रमनिदंशात्‌ कमाभाव । सो Tag ay रम Gee Feu तथा cafe रमसं इरि मिपोश्च रमामि पामि अत am: अनत zat न प्रयोज्यो तेन होड होसि । कुत्रचिन्‌ मिप इकारलोपः यथा हं रमाम असुर | परम्‌ एवम्‌ | | any बहुत्व नितिन्तयोभेवेत्‌ न्ति' raat’ भवतां खल्वुल्थष्वमोश्च । तथा मसः स्युमेहिडो मुमोमा भस्नेस्त्वल्वुक स्यात्‌ सिपि ऊहनीयः ॥२॥ अथो ईति । रमन्ति पठन्ति gafaq न्तस्यापि न्ते यथा संगमम्मि महिखाओ रमन्ते ऽतुम्हे रमित्था cae भणित्था भणह । अम्हे mean षिबिणे विराम विहरामो विहराम । “कण्ड्‌ -प्पिआ तुमं} सि ator AER” | स्याल्त्युगविभाषा च मिमोमुमेषु नित्यं हमध्यश्च भवन्ति पत | सदा भवेतां aH १भ-दइजां "[द्वित्वाकश्न उक्तानि 2अनोौः करोतेः teh स्याहुगिति । अहमस्मीत्य्थे ह म्हि अम्हि । वयं स्म इत्यथं अम्हे म्हे। अम्हे म्ह अम्हे we मिमोमुमानां मध्ये सदंवहः राही हि seam +हसीभ 5ऽगोवीओ Hoan efasafea । द्वित्वात्‌ परे at इअ-इज्जौ न स्यातां प्रामो गम्यते इत्यर्थे Say गामो गम्मह अद्वित्वपक्षे गामो गमीअडइ गामो गभिज्जद स्यातामेव। कचिद्‌ इत्यनुक्रियते इत्यथं ` अनुकीरई | (र) 1 7. मैते. 2 1). रुच्यते णिव्यत्‌. 3 mss. एसै for इमौ. 4 mss as रमर. (३) 11158. भवेन्‌ fa. 2 1. sagt 3 mss. puts इ after qae. 4 mss, कष्णप्यिश्रा तुमि. (४) 7 11. दित्तन्रती mat, 2 1. gat. 3 mss. crete. 4 mss. इसी भ्रऽन्ति, 5 1). गतिर, 6 ¢. Om. सा. 7 01. waafces, १. 39. ¥-9 | प्राङ्तकल्पतषः 35 स्थातां म्तमाणां गनृगनयाश्च न्तादीत्‌ ्ियामीदपि ` चास्ति मानात्‌ | az fae लशं स्तो ` व्रिषयेषु हिस्सो HST भवेत्‌ स्स इह ऽ त्वनातः ॥५॥ स्यातामिति | रमन्तो रममाणो Ideal agar feat रमन्ती Weed रममाणी रममाणा पटमाणी पटमाणा ईद्‌ आच्‌ च कम॑भावयोरपि रमीअन्तो रमिजन्तो रमीअन्तं fasted । feat रमीअन्ती रप्रिज्ञन्ती ca रमीअमाणो रमिज्ञमाणो खयां रमीअमाणी रमीअमाणा भावे रमीअमाणं रमिज्माणं एवमन्यत्रोहनीयं । भवे होदइअन्तं gested हवीअन्तं हव्रिज्जन्तं हवीअमाणं हविल्नमाणं इत्यादि । भविता भूयात्‌ भविष्यति अभविष्यत्‌ एतेष्वेव होदि होस्सई एवं रमिहि्ै रमिस्सद इत्यादि | आतः परे स्स नो प्रयुज्यते कण्हो जाहिर डा इति प्रयोगः | हास्सोरमे cas faq at 11. 0. this sentence. ३६ सुबन्त-विधानम्‌ [ १. ७. ८-१० AMAA स्युः पुरुषत्रयेषु हिल्वुगविभाषा wey बिन्दुवजमः । विध्यादिषु TSAR क्रमण तिपसिपृमिपामन्न तथासटां च si श्रवादेरिति। श्रोष्यति ales सोच्छिहिइ श्रोष्यन्ति सोच्छिषटिन्ति श्रोष्यसि सोच्छिसि सोच्छिहिमि ग्रोप्यथ aise सोच्छिदिह्‌ श्रोष्यामि सोच्छामि सोच्छिहिमि श्रोष्यामः सोच्छिमो मोच्छिहिमो साच्छमु सोच्छिहिमु सोच्छाम सोच्छिहिम इत्यादि । णयं परघ्रोहनीयम्‌ । ¦ टुडादि चरके भविष्यत्येवमेवं पदम्‌ | विध्यादिष faq faq भिपां तथा fata RAN SAA अआदेराः स्युः। सा Msi ETS WSs "yg WHET गण्दसु गीञं BN | yg) हं Wey गीं धणाई' गेण्हमु इयादि | धास्सग्रो ग हिरकाच इह प्रदिः खोपस्त्वकावाश्च तयोः कचित्‌ स्यात्‌ ` तथां बहुत्वं न्तु RAT भवन्ति जात्‌ बाऽनधतनेऽपि भव्ये eh थाससयोरिति। Pate दहि मे कण्डं; लोपे मा गच्छ “fees खण | तेषां ^ व्िध्यादीनां पठन्तु teed तुम्हे Same अम्हे च सुणमो । अनद्यतने भव्ये ‘gal Hed Ges Gast गुणिणो पटेज gear! पक्षं सोच्छिहिअट्‌ सोच्छिहिन्ति इत्यादि | aga विध्यादिषु वतमाने SHAE तदत पुरुषत्रयेषु | 1 तिङ्न्तमधभ्ये खलु षा Herat उञ्योजाह्यनेकाच इदं न चेष्टम्‌ ॥१०॥ एदत्रेति । Za जल्नापरे एद्‌ भवति । तथा जो sea) faenfeg ज लना एतौ वाच्यौ ऽसुमणो Sed + सुणेञ्जा सुणेज्जाहि इत्यादि पक्षे ?सुणड सृणन्तु (८) i 1), meric 2 11, Cute (€ ) In. धिग्‌ mi. fez. 2n. aw GF zife सं कद्ध, 3 0. चिटुगखरम्‌. 4 7. ब्धादीर्ना. 5 नकद, 2 ). पुष. 7 0. gery. ६ 11, gaat for qua. (१०) 1 0. fame. 2 n. पत. 3 १, gael for gary, ¦ 1. Gs. 1 मणि खडि for GUS quate, 5 1). yas पणम, १. ७. ११-१३ | परार तकख्पतकः ४० इत्यादि । वतमाने Hed BFA Qos पक्षे ane सुणन्ति एषं मध्यमोत्तमयोरपि | तथा-ञ्ज ज्जा स्थाने sat ञ्जाहि इमौ areal, Saget "पटेञ्जाहि इत्यादि । अनेकाचस्तु तिखन्तमध्ये sa ञ्जा sal sane न शव्रयोञ्याः। कितु हिस्साविति पटिहिई पदिदहिस्सद इत्यादि | क्रिया तिपत्तावपि तो प्रदिष्टो जज्ञावनकाच इह Hay स्तः ट { दहियकः era भविष्यतीह प्रयोजनीयं FETA ॥११॥ क्रियातिपत्तावपि | क्रियातिपत्तौ अनेकाचो ज्ज ज्जा प्रदिष्टौ सो aa 1 मणेञ्ज सा हंपि सच्चं aca Reg TAF । भविष्यत्‌ सामोप्ये वर्तमानकाले यक्त afe: स्यात्‌ । “माहवो * विसुमरिन्जिहिद ' प्पमदाहि ag fe” । एवं मध्यमोत्तमयोः | खड्त्वुङलिरां स्यात्‌ विषये लङ्च देयस्व्वतीते वुरुषश्रयेषु | THA THT भवेस शोभ स्तथैव भूते सति वतमाने ॥१२॥ लडिति | segefest लङश्चातीते इयःस्यान्‌ पुरषत्रयेषु । एकाचस्तु हीः | यथा अग्ृहान BEI जग्राह अग्रहीध्यत्‌ इत्यथे Aspe: तत्रैव ata हसी इत्यादि | अभवन अभूत्‌ वभूव अभविष्यन्‌ इत्यर्थे होहिम हवादेश्चे हवी gal बद्‌ | gar) एवं दाहि काहिम इत्यादि । भूतकाटीन-प्रस्ययो वतमाने वाच्यस्तत्र आसीय देही सोहोअ | ` वंसीगीभं तुल्मः सोही ऽराही'" इति “वाक्येऽतीते Bz | भस्नेस्तु aia लथासि च दा- awl aerated) fea | णिन्रो WACAT सत्र च आदिद. रावे च केचित्‌ प्रदशुम्ति सन्तः ॥१३॥ bn. Jae, 7 11, पाद्रजौ 3 1. पाठसाहि. 9 71. प्रयोम्याः (११) 1 0, भषज. 2 7. तश्रा aad ares. 3 1. fagefaferfe.. 4 on. queer (१२) 1 nadatw 2 ए. त्‌ृ कख. 3 ॥ग्बाहो, 411, ate ४१ तिडन्त-विधनम्‌ [ १. ७. १४-१५ अस्तरिति। अहोसि आसि रत्तो टाद्यथविधो निपात्येते fra एद्‌ भवति ` तदादेरविरच आन। क्रारयति अर्थे करेइ अवे तु Hae चकाराद्‌ अदेरच आत्‌। “केचिन्नेच्छन्ति "गीं Huss aga कण्डोः इति एवं हसावेड इत्यादि ऽदाकल्य-माण्डव्याभ्यामुदाहनय | आ्रिणिचो वा afm aa नाव ्तक्तवातुमोश्चाथ परो भवेताम्‌ | णकय्य-* माण्डव्यमत नु पव °तव्य-तुम्‌-क्वापर पदता च ॥१५॥ आविरिति। यक-क्ता- "तुम॑सु आविः वास्यान्‌। एद्‌ भवेः चन स्यात्‌ । हासाविल्नई Algal “रमणीं ` साडीअं हासाविभो ओहासिज्द ‘area उण सही णवं "त्तवातुमो चोदितो | अत आत्‌ मपि वा मतौऽज् कवीना- मत इच्च ' वहुष्विह चौोक्तपर | ०अत ए वित तिङ ar कथिताः भवुधियां कुषमो विशदो भवतु ॥१५॥ इति प्राकृतकशषासने कल्पतरो पन्दराङ्कसमेस्तिडन्तस्तबकः || (१३) 1 1). तदाच वच. 2 1). केचिध्िन्ति, 3 1. शाकल्यमते याभ्याम्‌ ङदाहतम्‌. (१४) 7 17. मत्व (माण्डव्य). 2 mss. wa. 3 mss, तुमावि. 4 ng वमणो. 5 n. ete. 6 ०. साहृवेया. 7 0. क्ातुमोग. (१५) 1 1. ae ( बहष्वि). ga विषो भवन. P— 6 2 0. अत्‌ ए. 3 1). सुधिधाख | अश्रमस्तबके धात्वादेश्-विधानप्‌ | भुवस्तु wal GY हो-हबो स्तः प्रादेभवो दुप्पहबश्च ' ag wl न प्रादुराविः-सपुदःपरस्य त्वरस्त॒ नित्यं तुवरस्तुरः क्ते ॥९॥ भुव इति । राही पसण्णा जई होड कण्ह तुमं जुआ होसि अ होमि qi एवं Zag) प्रादेस्तु पभवई संभवई[द]ति अदिभवई ङञ्भवद । तथा दुप्पहवद पहवई अणत्ति (2) माहवो संपरिहवई सहीणः मन्ये । क्तेतु भुवः हूः gal हआ war gai safe । पादुब्भूओ संभूओ आकिन्भूओ gaye) त्वरेस्तु तुवरए शाकल्यमते तुवह तुरिअं मा गच्छ एहि सो । घरर्णेस्तु घोलः' प्रभवेच्च घुम्मो णदेस्तु Ms समुद्रौरयन्ति | पारस्तु Hisar वृष तो रिः BIT TINA हषर पि स्यान्‌ ॥२॥ got रिति। चन्तं घोलइ णञणं grag महूुराराअस्सः | णो HSE RISE TNT: चरतो रिः। वरिसई करिसई मरिसई हरिसई | अ-सोपसगस्मरते विधेयो भरः सुधीभिः gate हो । वेविस्सशो वीसर पव कथित्‌ ऋतस्त्वृदन्तस्य भवत्‌ सदा ऽरः ॥२३॥ असोपसर्गस्येति | कण्डं भरन्ती ATE gated! GATE; सोपसगस्य तु अणुसरईइ frag! at: वेस्तु facare dare कथित्‌ | ऋदन्तस्य ऋतो अरः BT सरद ATE UTE इत्यादि । HA: HY बाथ सदा भवेत्‌ का तव्य-तुमं-क्तवास्वपि भूतभन्ये | कते को Ae at ag गेण्ड-हिण्णो धे-तव्य- 1 तु warg विभावितोऽयम्‌ ॥४॥ (१) 2 771. दुष्हवौ च. 2 £. ater. (२) ; £. चोणः, 2 g. das. 3 0), Aywres- (a) सल. (३) 1 mss, विखड्द अरः, ७२ धात्वादेश-विधानम्‌ [ १, ८, ४-८ we इति । साः पसाअं करुणन्ती [ gos] पक्षे “करइ करसरोभं? वच्छ- धरम्मि Hoe” | काञअव्वं काडं काणं काही काहि क्ते फं । गेह feong | एषु घे विभाषितः पेत्तञ्च घण पक्षे गेण्हिव्वं गेण्हिड ^ गेण्हिऊण केचित्त गेहिअब्वं इष्यादि उहनीयम्‌ | जम्भा उक्तः खल्वुज्म्भतेः स्यात्‌ कात्यायनेनोशित पब जम्मा | परादेरिमो at न वदन्ति स्वे मनीषिणः प्राङ्तशासनेषु ॥५॥ Saray इति। | wears “पसण्णम्मि गोसे जम्भाअन्तं माहवं भरमि" | कात्यायनमते कण्हो HABE | प्रादेज॑म्भा जम्भा द्वौ प्राङतरासनेषु न प्रदिष्टौ सो विअम्भन्त SAT | eqraeg विद्धो निषैणिमज्ञो कञो जाण आणश्च [मु]णश्च ' कथित्‌ । उद्धमस्तु नित्यं तत °उद्धमात्र प्रसेधिसः स्याश्च चिणश्चिनोतेः ॥६॥ ज्याघेस्त्विति। विद्धओ fage foram जाणइ amg केचित्‌ मणः भणन्तो * उद्धमई धमई frags चिणई चिणन्ती | भियस्तु भा वीह इमो afzst तस्यैव भासो णिचि मेस-भिसो | स्याच्छदधातेदह्‌ दव वाच्यः 1 मृन्त्रस्तु हसोऽथ तृपेश्च धिप्पः isn भिय इति । wig सा वीह deg, णिचि भासईइ ures मेसद्‌ भसावड भीसह vraag । मं माहवो or ages । कहं पिअ पि शहूसइ (?) | यिष्पडइ माह | अवात्‌ तु ae: प्रवदन्ति वाहं कासेस्त॒ वासं यदि श्छङ्कुत्ता | 'कैवां च वावाभ sarfag स्तः क्रीडः कीणो वस्तु विक्पितः के sh (४) Im, तन्यडतुमक्रा. 2 1. 71. सौ. 3 mss. कषसरोभ्रः 4 g. इति [aed क्ता] fq [ति]. (६) 1 mss. णश्च, 2m. उद्धमातरं. 3 mss. केचित्त wus पुणन्ति, (७) 1 £. सत्सु ( 70. सु). m. मेस्तु, 1 mss, भ्रण, (८) 1 g, HH ( कषां), 2. ८. 8-22 | WMHARSIAS: ve अवादिति। ओवाहिअ' aaaes atarag अववासई° “we दिणम्मि ata दु फेर"; इति । केचित्त ओवासेद इति । वावाअई” किण । वेस्तु विक्षेणई fafeins । /'कण्हो fading! पसुणं वहूणं?? | छठ -ध्या-गाना " डाभ काभ च गाभ- (रा-का-गाश्चेत्यज्न नित्यं त्वमीषम्‌ | स्युविष्यादो वत्तमाने च भव्ये चेदेकत्वे यद्यपीह प्रदिष्ठः ॥६॥ छठा-ध्या-गानामिति। डाअन्ती सा gee गाए तं ठाउ BIS गाड TATA Sls Mls गाई भव्ये sifes aries miss | "उक्तऽथ खा धा aay खादिधाव्योर्‌ “अआच्छिष्यने त्युक्‌ तु हो निरुक्तः | माडो निरो माणप उदाहरन्ति fat: परैरत वलः प्रदिष्टः ॥१०॥ उक्तेष्विति । अण्णं खाई । गोट्रम्मि ae । खाअन्तो सो धाभए गोटरमञ्छ इत्यादि । ह्‌ टप्यतेऽचछिष्यते निम्माणई निग्बलई * | रुदे र्वः क्रापि रुभश्च रोषः + यश्च fase: faa: पिवश्च | घटेश्तु ASIA तथा गदः स्याद्‌ ETARISATTAA टंवश्च ॥१२॥ स्देरिति। wag क्वापि सवइ dag च । -श्चिज्छई सा fnew तुञ्ज बन्धु विभोए पिबडई षट गढ च । इषेः महद आरभतेः saz | ai: ` स्याञ्च aga 7st ख्त्थ-सुम्भो निनादेऽभिधेये कणेरोक्खणः स्यात्‌ | तथेवात्र नित्यं घुधीरा वदन्ति सपेस्तुष्यनेः पुष्दुषरोदंभ ताश्च ॥१२॥ आदेरिति | anes रुन्धर freeads मं सो । निरुभ्भामि हंपि रासप्पबन्धे | भोक्लण८ FAN wean, waz qag चित्तेण gaz gas | 2 mss, ब्यववासद्. 3 £. ्टू( ट) फर. 4 ए, विष. (¢) 1 77. चाम्र syst. (१०) 1g. उती | धु | खाधा, 11. उकछ्षथधा. 2 77. whe ष्यत. 2 £. दसः. 4 £. निव्वसद, (११) 1 £. faqe ( fauq. 2 g. सिजमभद, 3 m. obscure, &, a. (११) I mss. स्यार. 2 £. सदं ( रुधि , ७५ धाल्वदेश-विधानम्‌ [ १. ८. १३-१६ बा-धा-नियां क्तरि डीङ एत्वं जल्पेलक्ारस्य मकरारमादुः | धन्त्यस्य कायं पततेः Ae: 1 कथेस्तु शद वेष्टयतेरपि स्यात्‌ ॥१२॥ दा-धा-नियामिति। दे धेड tre Ss जम्पद्‌ । अन्त्यस्येयधिकारः | पडइ AVE HEE वेहद्‌ | कथे enrcis भिदि च्छिदो भेदै च शाकल्यमते तयोः स्यात्‌ | दत्वं THAT FASS HITT AGE RIT: समुदः परस्य ॥१४। कथेरिति। कह भिन्दइ foray ee cons वड Se संग्वेरलह उच्वेछ्छा । TA AH चो ' ऽथ ुभ्रय॒धर्ज्मः शघेग्र घेश्चात्र तथा सिघेश्च । द्वित्वं विभाषाविहितं mar: गमिः ?शमिवम्‌-मणश्च-स्फुराद्चाः ॥१५॥ vas जेरिति । oraz वः वुज्छः स॒न्मेड Beas “fens fawn. गम्मः सम्मई, [वम्मइ | wong इत्यादि । Ger Her Ass Tos इत्यादि | प्रादेस्नु मीखेः कथितं खुधीभि- " हेनेः GAA ARIS: | बदेस्तु चोऽतस्तु वचेव्देरोत्‌ त्वा-तव्य 2 जुमस्वाप GUTH: ॥१६॥ प्रादेस्त्विति। पमि पमीख्द समिह समी उग्मिहद उप्मीख इत्यादि । गहम्मह eax खम्मई GAL चलद चलद वचेस्तु aes alas एवं az alas बोचई अत ओत्‌। उक्तो गमादिः । अन्तस्येनि वत्तते। क्तादिषु भुजादेरन्त्यलुक्‌ Wrst भोअज्वं ws एवं रुचमुचोरपि | (१३) 1 ९, क्थ. प्रा. ar. 2m. टो, (१५) 1 ९ त्रनेर्चौ. 2 2, शभिर्दसाणश्च ( शसिश्चापिभण ). 3 7) wae. (१६) 1 mss. इमैः खनेमश्च वने०. 2 g. तुम्यन्वरप्रि (?. m, तुम्प्त्वपि (१), 3 mss. BRAS Fas. १. ठ. १८-२० | धारृतकद्यतसः ७६ स्याद्‌ द्वित्वम्‌ ओं खलु वृष्करादि- सेवाद्िपाटादिह वा भुजाः | lyst रुचिश्चात्र प्रुचिस्तथा स्यात्‌ °तथा [च म]म्मापपि दडः वतो ॥१७॥ स्यादिति । भोत्तणं भोत्तव्वं Ara || SEAR दृमई । णोऽन्ते जि-ल्‌-हु-ध्र-धघुवां च Feat जे वां aa’ चाह धुअ धुवं तु" । ग धून्नस्तथोदस्तु wa ल्नातेर्‌ तवाद रवं स्यादिह सो श्रणतेः ॥१८॥ णोऽन्त इति । भिणई Bs हस्वः ae Be Bel जेस्तु बा जस आदेशे जअइ । धुणस्तु धुअ-धुवादेशे धुअ धुअन्ती yar धुवन्ती २उत्‌-पुव॑ुणातेः Sareea उलुवामि vary छवादेशे च्विग ठविभ्व्वं लवि । शणोतेः सोरादेक्षे सोऊण सोअग्वं सोऽ | भावे च कमेण्यधिक्रार इश्रो " उ्यारेभेचेट्‌व्वो धाद्व विभाषा | निष्ठा पदेषु न वदन्ति धीरा हस्यो भवश्चा्र च जेस्नु TACT: ॥१६॥ भाव इति । अतः परे भावकमणोरेव । जिग्वह्‌ geag goag इत्यादि । निष्ठा क्तवतु तयोः fret जिअन्तो gar oral हअ eared) get समन्तो yer qaed | Ae जिष्पद “जहा ठकंसो facag समरम्मि माहवेण"” इत्यादि | दुदेस्त॒ PA वहतस्त॒ asa leeeg fant खलु वा वद्रन्ति | HAT कीरं ETAL हीर at णञ्व-णञ्जौ च वुधा वदन्ति ॥२०॥ दुहैरिति | “agg कि gous कण्ट Gel ` णेत्तेण जई तुह वन्भई णेहभारोः ‘orion जई? ge fesug देदसोदा '” पक्षे दुहीअई दुहिल्नई वहीअह वहिन fediag fetes । “ण जई सहि कोरण्‌ पणभकेकिभङ्खो णवरं? हीर इ व्विअ पिभाई हामोअरो ।" पक्षे करीअदई करिह हरी afestg) ऽचए (2) णाराअणो' णव्वड्‌ Ste सोवि | (१७) I 77155, सुजोरुचिग्राचमुचिसिधान्यत्‌ ( £. ofa भो) स्यात्‌. 2 mss. तथौ ग््ाबपि ge. (ec) I gi घञन्तेष्टतु. 2 ¢. ततप, (<) 1 . ज्ादिभषेलीपदितो विभाषा, 2 mss, कसो. (२०) Ig. aig. 2 mss. He, 3 mss, णोहभारो. 4 ९. Seater 5 g. maz, 6 ¢. om, these two words, Bs धात्वादेश वधानम्‌ | १. ८. २१-२४ RET IG: खलु घेज-गेउभो दिण्णादयः Tat निपातनीयाः | दा्नस्तु दिण्णं च रुदितस्ु °र्ण्ण णषस्तु GFT च मुचेस्तु ART ॥२१॥ प्रहेरिति। धेप्द जो gone? पाराअणो Gg गेज्छह च। पक्षे गेण- हिज गेण्डीअद दिण्णीअद्‌* हिण्णिजद्‌" दति च | "दिण्णं Sago तद रुप्पिणीए Wag BE वअणं पि मुक्खं णवं qe ala | तन्तेस्तु Ble उशन्ति THA Seq AT weg छाविदरश्च | खिदे fant त्रिभं (Tals AAT UA "TISATG चप्पम्‌ ॥२२॥ तक्षेरिति। “कामासुगाः waa adi? चित्तंपि रम्भिजह अल्न तेण क्तरि कर्मणि भावे च । “arg "सो aes विलम्बसे अल वि कीस गोवि" । “ge facqaia® विसूरणए "पेम्मभरेण बलो ` ¦ ' `गोवाङ्गणाणं विरहो विलमेह कण्डं । “ण awe चष्पद सो वि हत्थि" | तहं ga चाच asicat a gas: gagifae 33'qcat । द्रशोरवक्खं qua TAs "चुट SA चात्र वदन्ति पञ्च ॥२३॥ खमिति । हन्ती gag [अ] वराहं । “णेहम्मि सो gage तुञ्ज राही | सुप्पसे पेम्माण रसेः तुमं किं। सो तुज्ज राही sag मग्गा* । अवक्ख कण्डं Squat प्पओसं । ^णिभच्छ कासं GS उअ ^अभ्भं | भावे च कमण्यपि' तस्य दसो णिच्यस्यः दंसो दरिसश्च वाच्यो | ऽभावे च दावा भवतीह तस्य आदिभ्यतेऽज्राङः ITS स्वराणाम्‌ ॥२४॥ (२१) Im. दियंच० 2 ९. (afe UH. 3 €. प्रलोरि- 4g. 0m. 5 ९. डिन्दिभ्जद 6 £. पष्ुणं. m. aged, (२२) 1 70. चेस्‌. 2 71. TH aq’. £. तच [ने] | ay’, 3 ९. कमोहगो. 4 77. सै. ¢. मे. 5 ¢. fa (रि) we. 6 £. Gene (र) ण, 7 ९. व(र)णो. 8 €. erat. (९९) 1 mss, gm. 2 &. घरंणि्र. 3 1). पेग्ण > TH 4 2. रदौ कलुमहेमगया. 5 g. पुण्ष्यतुमम्‌. 6 71, gee sway. £. guy esa, (२६) 1 mss. ww x, 2 g. ख्य ( रिष्यत), 3 £. HIF वदादा. १, ८. २५-२७ | URAR AAG: ८ भाव इति । ण aac आकि tHe ges | णिचि कण्डं dae दृह दरस लं | सि णेहं sag वअणेण तीए । आदिर्यतेऽत्र Sew धण as (१) स्वराणां घावधा- तो धूथई dag धोअः स्यात्‌ । ऽन स्यात्‌ क्वचिद्‌ भुवः होर इतीरशचेषु । आ राहुर सअववाह्‌द वेदशेषु | रोर Was पुस Hag इत्यादि | एके स्तुअस्तीरतरा इमे EY म्र देमटं चा समीरयन्ति | प्लुेभासः gq उदीरितो दा छ.सस्त्यजेग्छरक्क इमा बिह स्तः ॥२५॥ राकेरिति। सा[तु] अन्तो" ण तरर afta ope तीरए ary आलिङ्कन्तो सा मरे वच्छं। Trahan मोस जो भवं रिञ्णं तं सुप्प HIT SSM इण मच्छरोअ Baia aca soi हरिस्स sag कि हरी मं । छक्षामि me सिविणे वि कण्डं | Hea VAs करमतोऽच्छु-धुक्ा at सप्पा-सक्षबुदिता तु ad: | ढो खुम्म-लन्दा कथितो जस्तु AL तोडस्तुडतश््थोडूः ॥२६॥ अस्तीति। कमल्णअणा अच्छए ATR त। हि ' धुक्ष Ta कण्डो | सोः कण्ड्‌ सक्ष कछुडङ्गघरं तुमं कि fara? ण सप्पेसि पसीम विभुश्च: कोवं । grea ed खुन्दर at अहं । alex तुडर तुद थोर | राजेस्नु WIA BIT BEY Taeq ta: aaa: gather: | Hse कालः WIT: BAY aa: खडः खुन्दर इमो प्रविष्टो ॥२७॥ राज्ञेरिति। कमरुणअणो रे रासमश््ये । कढई रन्ध । कण्हो sec गोनिआदि | खारा विसिदैहिः रणे रिऊ। खुडडई grag 4 17). कर लुडन्दो. 2. we yet. 5 ट. नश्यति. (२५) Im सान्ती. £. साशरन्ती. 2m. सौ. g. 4%. (२६) 1 mss. चुः, 22.87. 3 £. 34m. 4 8. विप. 5 £. qeany, (yo) 1 17155, yer. 2 8. खडरिष्ोवि, रि) सिष्ोहवशे. | ७६ धात्वादेश-विधानम्‌ १. ८. 25-32 a fag हरेः aq णो -पेषो स्वपेः GA: सोऽत्र तथव सोभः | तव्ये तुमि asa सस्तु सोढ वहेस्तु aie: कथिता विभावा wes घ्रा इति । saan free णीवुप्फं । ईरिश्ुरादि oes! Gee ; gare सोई सोअइ ; esd are पक्षे afeetsd सददिडं सिअ, वोढन्वं वोढु वोढं पक्षे वहिअन्वं ated afeer इति | aga Kat स्पृशतेरिमो st परग्दिविः स्याच्तुभ पत्र नान्यः? । भावे च कमण्यपि तस्य क्रिप्पो वा लिंक-द्ि्-च्छिव पत्र च क्ते ॥२६॥ sige इति । केटवं' तं आघ्ुक्खन्ती हन्त फंसेमि oar? परिच्छिव गोवकामिणि । अन्यस्तु Gael भावकमणोः जघणेण चछिप्प्‌ हरिं sen सा । क्ते fateer छित्तिअ' fatast इति च | aia: स्थुणः स्याच्च तथा युव्रश्चा- थ फुटुचण्पावपि च क्रमे sy आङोऽञवोहां च तथा भवेतां समो मिटेश्चात्र गलः प्रदिः ॥२०॥ [ स्तौतेरिति ]। amg gar कणं थुणन्ता बिकिणे 'वि गोवा । फु AGE ; आडस्तु अञ्च्‌ ateg संमिरे गद्‌ | fas धरेबणिचि az aa आज्ञः सदा Caz algae way AUS Gi स्युश्च बलग्ग-चुम्मो- SHS! भथा व नमतेश्च बाणः ॥२१॥ (aq) 1 £. णो ( a). (२९) 1.8, कभ, m. टड्‌, ८ m. वमर» 2. वहु पोज्ञामिणि. (३०) 1 g, वि(रि)गेबो(रो) forfa Tar (ae) 12. भूपा P—7 १. ८. 32-38 प्राङृतकस्पतरः xo [ fase इति | विघटते fase: fasag ; oz: परस्य घटेणिचि ओग्धः सोग्घए | आङ पुवरुदे Yar] aga: माणिणि ण aerafa कीस कण्डं | ण चुम्मसि sar चिभ "वच्विदासि। seaes® क्खु पणएण* तुमं विचित्तेः एसो । वेनमतेर्बाणः कं ण वाणसि कण्ड्‌ सीस | उलाल-वुश्नो णिचि तस्य गुलश ACIS एते THI: परस्य | अरश्रवेमो विदितो न्यसिभ्यां' TH: TRINA इह प्रदिष्टः ॥३२॥ egiafa | तस्य उन्‌ 9am नमतेर्णिचि | उल्ला वुलगुलाः ] 20a अ वु शसि माणंसिणिं कीस aca’) कापि उत्थङ्घदई | भनक्तेः कण्हो "णिअर जए तुमं । अहिवेमए qos फलिम । परिअशखई विविणं मअङ्गओ" । SHA उन कोशयतेरिह स्यात्‌ तिल्ठास-तिन्तावपि | तिम्यतेरदो। VERA प्रात्‌ पुस-लञ्त्रपुन्का- MAS उक्तोऽत्र TATA स्यात्‌ ॥२२॥ sala इति । उक्षोसदे fagrag तिन्तद* | प्रोञ्छते स्त्रय अदेशा: पुस GSE TSS | मुद्धा थणे" पुस णक्खवबअ | अवघृतेर ओभः ओअद्लइ क्खु हरिणो चरिएण SFA | Sat ' टरं तश्च बद्‌म्ति नित्यम्‌ ° भावहमज्रापि परेविभावा | पटटटत्थ-खज्ञाविह्‌ पय्यसेस्तोऽ TSH AIA tq U CEA Hasit उद इति । sage ओव । परेर्विभाषरा पक्षे oa एव पटत्थई खुजई पहथिभा दुमवरा हरिणा । न्यदल्यं (१) आगमेः च अज्नत्थ aera इमो द्रौ । अञ्जत्थन्तं सच्छन्दा^ पेच्छए तं आलिङ्धन्ती कुखगेहम्मि राही | 2 &. राजि दामि. 3. sms. 48. पनरण. 5 £. विरिति. 6 This sentence has been wrongly repeated in comm. on 32. (3%) 1 g. प्यभिरभ्यां. 2m. See note 6 on 32. abuve; 3 g. अन्नद for So. 4 g. fauvaued. Sg. quae. 6. aved (२३) 1g. fama तिन्दा. 2 &. fereras. 3 11. सुद्धाखाख. £. gered. 4 8. शक्रम. (az) 1 mss, क्लड़ तस्य, 2 mss. आश्र, 3m, पयमस्त). | mss. सच्छदौ. ५१ धात्वादेश-विधानम्‌ [ १. ८, ३५.३८ NUE स्थगेष्छाद्‌यतेस्तु णमः THE पव स्फुटतमवेत्‌ प्रात्‌ | खाटस्पलाटप्प इमो BY > खाटम्भ-लालम्हा दमौ च तदत्‌ ॥३५॥ ओत्थ दृति । मुमुहि ater! वसन्तं दामोअरं णिअघरम्मिः राही» । TAT जो Het | पप्फोडप्‌। BSE Seca Bera, लालम्हद चत्वारि रूपाणि | स्तृरस्त्वथोत्थहवद्‌ ओल्थरः स्यात्‌ उद्वा ' विना तस्य भवद्‌ विदः | चूण मेमूरः क्वचिद्र चूरो लगे विपूवस्य wag विलमाः ॥२६। eqe इति। उदा सह॒ स्त्रड Meyer ओत्थरद्‌ । विना सह्‌ tages AAs? Fea । विपूवल्गेः farang | चुरः alagisa परररिमो ढो चलच्क्रखों स्तो विरव्रवि हलः | विसह-वोसद्ध इमो विकासः पर fants ` विभाखमाहुः 13.91 quitfa | फि्‌ gag sez विदद । विकारो fangs alae | परिपवविशेः परिविभाख | उदा ' नदेरोक्ख उपग्रहस्या- वसाभम्‌ आहुश्च टसेस्तु टृहसम्‌ः | पषोड-गुजजैस्तता इमो gua’ ददन्ति सन्तः परि्ट्मैव 1135 उद्‌ इति । छत्‌ पूर्वस्य “ नदैः ओक्खइ | उपपूव ae: कण्डं णिउणं गोवी भवसाअए | wesc! salar! fagagit: पहोडइ गजेद्‌ परिहृ त्रीणि रूपाणि | (ay) 7 ¢ Wat. "11. Mae 2 £. निश्रस्बरल (faa) 3 =m. राहि, (8६) 1 mss, वदा २ g. qa. (९७) 1 £. फणिन्न. 2 ९. विभ्राणमाहः. 3 2. फिक्र. (ac) 1 ६. w@afg ( न्वोन्वं ). 2 2. कूम प एसः : £. AG (लै). एदे ˆ“ हपपूव. 40, om. १. ८, २६-४२ | प्राृतकत्पतशः ५२ कथे: साहो यक्षा ara णिवरिज्ञस्तथापरः | स्थादिमै दे ' gaara तिक्खालस्तु" तिजेरिह्‌ ॥२६॥ कथेरिति। कथेर्णिजन्तत्वमाहः साहइ यका ae णिवरिज्जईः gag द्रे रूपे । fast: तिक्ाङई मरगणाई कम्मारो । चुटश्चडः प्रात्‌ ATA: VARA aT उग्गाहमुशन्ति सन्तः | ताडेस्तु ag णिचि an ater बीणं सहेनेणिखुटं ~ त्वपुष्मन्‌ ॥४०॥ चुटेरिति। वचुडई। प्रपुवसरतेः पञ amex | उग्गाहडई ] त्रीणि रूपाणि | ताडः aan । विपृबचरेणिचि वीणं किं cto कण्डसङ्कमे राहि; निपृन्वस्य ae: णिसुढद* ¦ अथ प्रतेः पाटयतेः facte तत्रैव घोरा facaraare: | पीले मतः पीडयतेरसाभ इषेः aT AAT ats ।॥४१॥ अथेति | प्रतेः पायते: fate, facaregi ead: पील । इषेर HAS | प्रतेस्त॒ ओग्गहई ॥ धातुस्वरूपाण्यपराणि पत्ते शाकटय-माण्डग्यमतानुगानि | ' कात्यायनस्यापि मते तथेव ज्ञेयानि रद््यानुभवक्रमेण ।४२॥ इति प्राकरतकल्पतरो द्वाचत्वारिरात्‌ कसमेर्खादिस्तबकः ॥ (१९८) I ¢. न्ड (ह ). 7), न्व. 2m. भिक्वालस्तु. 3 mss. add a after this. (४०) 1 ९.मो(मो) गाद a(q गाहम्‌. 2 £. न पुम्‌ ( णिमुदम्‌ )3 £. निसुडड्‌. (४२) 1 2 शाकल्छय Aas ( °मन्यञ्च ) मतानुगामौ. 2 mss. 7 ary, | नवमस्तक्षके निपात-विधानम्‌ | भथो निपाता विहिता अमुष्मिन्‌ हं दान-पृच्छा-विनिर्धारणेषु' | हं सतेपणे विस्मयस्ुचने च भोः सूचना ताप-विकल्पनादो ॥१॥ च्चेअ faa हे अवधारणा प्रश्ने किणो कीस इमो प्रदिष्टो aa तु 'सम्भावनसूचनादो स्तः cea निर्धारण-निम्दिति किम्‌ ॥२॥ सम्भाष्रणार्थं तु भव श्वे द्रे भाहि Taca निवारणे स्यात्‌ | सम्भाषणे र करे भर स्यात्‌ उच्चेरिहामन्तणके fet ar? 130 थुः" कुत्सने हा तु faug उक्तो णः पूरणे वाथ इहोपदिष्ः । पते :वन्ववा करथता इवार्थाः तेपे हर णण विनिश्चये स्यात्‌ ॥४॥ aq हु इति च वितक निश्चये संशये च णवर-णविरि रतो केवलनन्तरार्थौ | इर-किर-किटा दतेऽनिधिताख्यान उक्ता अवि तु afar क्षिन्तु उ तं विमष॥५॥ इह भवति इ-जेरादे खल्व श्टोकपु्चं पिव-मिब-विषा पते सहूभिरिष् इवार्थे | भ दह वचनोपन्यांसम्‌ waaay हे भण शह तु ART भूषणादिष्वलं स्यात्‌ ॥६॥ (१) 1 mss. वि्निदाश्णेषु. 211. द 3 1. B. (२) 1 mss. स्माषण० aq ( aq). (३) Ii). 27. चविदवा,7चविववा. (४) 10. स (ध). 21, इत्ति (इषो). ५४७ निपात-विधानम्‌ | 2. €. ७-१० अथ शीघ्राथके क्ति" मत्तो तु सणिभर' शनैः | अहो भशरो °अनुतपि तथा णो हि निवारणे is) हो भो alan ह हो ‘feed बीडितभीतयोः। आभिमुख्ये तु श्टुल्थः स्यात्‌ ऽपराहूत्थः TAS ॥८॥ अद-अनच्छरो त॒ Aart Paar: स्यात्तियगर्थके | मनागथ मणं वाच्यं aT qa: पदे उणः Nel ' पण्ड आगन्तुके RIS आम क्रोधे स्मतः पुनः) काटस्य नियमे विद्यात्‌ जहा तहा श्दयो मताः ॥१०॥ इति प्रा्रतकल्पतरो ata: कुसुमे: निपातस्तवक्रः | इति श्रीरामरामतकवागीशभद्चाय विर चिते प्राकृेतशासने कल्पतरो दराभिः स्तबकः प्रथमा शाखा निरुक्ता | १. 1). अ्रव्रचाः m. Way. (६) In, राट. (७) Nn. alata: 2 1). अन्वन्ताचं ( अरनुतापर ). (८) In. fea. 2 i), qa. ‘2 , परा aa (€) १. 11 च्दुद्स्छ) 2 111. उम्‌, n, asa. 311. दंडत्र (१०) 1 111. ग्रनृधिमा० 1, ग्रनूयिम> 2n. विद्यते भा० 31), ताय सता. प्राङृतकल्पतरो द्तीयशाखा | प्रथमस्तबके शोरसेनी-विधानम्‌ | विरच्यते सम्प्रति शोरसेनी gaa भाषा प्रतिः किरास्याः | न वेतसाङ्घारपदादिषु त्वित्‌ न स्पाच्चतुथां वदरादिषु त्वोत्‌ः ॥?। हृस्वो यथादौ कचिदेव कायः पिण्डादिके किशुकवयञ्जम्‌ wt | तुण्डादिषूदोत्‌' कचिदोक्खलं न । SFIS कौडशा-दद्रभो नेत्‌ ॥२॥ उद्रीरितं यनुक्रुरा दिकेष्बद्‌ युधिष्ठिरोपयनयोने तत्‌ स्यात्‌ | न ` चोनिकारः पुरुषस्य कायः OUTER याद्रगश-ताद्रशायाः ॥२॥ नेदेदना [दे]वरयोश्च' रुक्खो वर्तस्य दैवे तुः अदनं हि स्यात्‌ | न वः प्रकोष्ठे न च पोरुषदा- वडस्तथा गोरव arate” स्यात्‌ ॥०॥ अतोऽनादेस्युतस्य तस्य SHIT इष्टः Tasha थस्य | av afaa® तस्य णकारमाहुस्‌- थो धः पृथिव्यां भरतेऽपि तस्य“ ॥५॥ (१) 1. ९. चित्‌. 2. £. न्वीत्‌. (र्‌) 1, mss. तुदादि ०. (३) 111. ay, g. यो. (४) इ. mss. > वरयोश्च. 2. ¢. नु. 23. 7. wale. (४५) 1. 1), तद्य. 2. 11). टौ 3, mss, गवते, 4. mss, तस्थ. २. १. ६-११ | THAR TAS: | ५६ प्रायस्तु पो" वोऽबुरूभ अपूव न शीकरे भो ऽथ न मः कबन्धे | तथा मकारो न च चन्द्रिकायां प्रायो न दस्य स्वरशोष्रतात्र ॥६॥ धमो दवत्‌ स्पृष्टम्‌ उदीरणीयो कचिद्‌ हरिद्रादिषु रस्य लः स्यात्‌ | aaa’ फो भो न शिफादिकेषु न हो दणेऽन्यत्र AGAMA” ॥७॥ अथो पदादो नहि चः किराते Pate Sag हि विहाय। TAT न खो खङ्खल-लोहलादो न णः प्रयोज्यो न च शावके क्कः ॥८॥ सभ्व्न युक्तस्य ₹' उत्थिते न न स्फोटक खो न च जोऽभिमन्यो। संमदेने We न डः स्यात्‌ att सद्रत्तेऽपि aaa च्छः ॥६॥ तथा at weg van fag कुष्माण्डिकायां च महः कदाचित्‌ | area प्रदिषएाविह” वण्फ-वाहो विभाषितो ण्डः ऽखत्वु भिन्दिपरे ॥१०॥ एष्म-क्षन-स्म'पएवां च विकल्पितो म्हो feca न सेवादिषु दैवबजम्‌ | > र * * + ५ ११॥ (€) 1 7.पौ. (७) 1 70. wan £. waa, 2 €. व्दशैवा. (८) 1 mss. दोलादिष्ो. (₹) 1 1). च Sfag च. 2. चन्ति च (€) as above) (१०) mo ae, 2 £. nfewtfay. 3 7. वभाविक्ोण्डः. (११) 1.m.y. 2 Here a half-verse is missing in mss. ५.७ ग़ोरसेनी-किधानम्‌ [ २. १. १२.२७ प्रायेण सन्धि" ष्वचि न त्वचां gh HSA योन न भाजने जः। विपयंयो नाच्च रणोः कररण्वां बृहस्पतो नात्र भरो ° प्रयोज्यो ॥१२॥ स्यात्‌ FACANTA TA: TA बिन्दोरखिदानीम्‌ इति qn विभाषा | पसि casi खलु भागधेयं ।पष्ण्डगोर्गोणमुदाहरम्ति ॥१३॥ at at a! दुर्वाससि कोः परं स्यात्‌ ङसेरदन्तात्‌ क्वचिदा च द्रष्टः | पदेव ङः स्याद्‌ इदु दन्तयोम्मि- ने वो जसि स्यादु दिह खियां न ॥१४॥ वदेव टादेरमि मादर ar fe यश्षदेतत्‌सु ate क्ियामीत्‌+ | er शसो णिश्च न त्वि त्रिलिङ््चा > पतति किमादेन wa: फिखासः* ॥१५॥ स्सा से farat नात्र डसेनहि सो किमः Bay: स्यादिदमस्त्विवो त are gare न किमादिके स्यु- नाप्यत्र सि चामि दइधस्स्विहस्य ॥१६॥ इवं इणं स्याद्‌ EA: स्वमोस्त aa न सावोत्वमिह्ेतदः स्यात्‌ | भवत्ययं arise: ferat स्याह Cat न हः स्याददेशौ ङसि स्वत्‌ esi (१९) 1 mss, विडं पदः ( °ष्वचि म त्वां). (१३) 1 €. पुषसयोर्गोनपर 1 £. om (qa) 8. तु. (१५) im. faq. 2 £. fefafaert ( चैदमादेर ). 3 m, किलाः, £ om, ( कक्ापि ). P..-8 २. १, १८२४ | प्राङृतकसल्पतशः ys प्रायस्तुमम्‌ युष्मद आविशन्ति aw जसि स्याच्छसि चोपदिष्टः। ग-ङम्चोस्तपए तस्य भिसि प्रयोज्यं avafe इत्यादि Set तुमादो ॥१८॥ feed? भ्यसो युष्मद्‌ आह तुमह sala] ते दे तुह ae ase! । * मः st # ॥ * ॥१६॥ ५ ध ++ ॥२०॥ aI aE दयमामि रूपम्‌ अथाम्ह ' इत्येवमुदीरयन्त | रूपं तु शेषं यदनुक्तमेतज केयं महाराध्रजभाषयेव ॥२१॥ प्राय परस्मेपदिनोऽत्र स्वे स्युधातवस्तेषु तिपो fata | भन्तिस्तु केस्थस्य मतो धकारो मसो म्ह-हिस्सो च भविष्यति at ॥२२॥ a er मिपि स्सा वुनरिष्ट श्व न गच््धमित्यादि भवेह्‌ गमेः | ्रशेस्तु tera: कथितो geral? भावेऽपि कमेण्यपि Fat दव ॥२३॥ तिपो ¢ wate सिपः g नित्यं शेषं पुरोवज्‌ जयतेश्च तो हो | सिपोऽनवन्तादिष्ट लोटि हिः स्यात्‌ न्देरथ' देहि जणदणस्स ' ॥२४॥ (१९-२०) The second half of 19, and the 20 are lost. (९१) 1. अम £. अ अभ्‌ह. (२३) 1 £. were (querer). (२४) £. जखन्दद्य. xe शोरसेनी-विधानम्‌ | २. १, २५-३२० प्रायेण न sista gerfenrat! मभ्ये मतो धातु-तिपोर्दिदात्‌ | SAS न तु -तव्य-भविष्यतीत्‌ स्यात्‌” मो शो च शाकल्यमते भुवश्च ॥२५॥ स्यात्ुर्‌-स्यपौस्तस्य भवो" न ह क्ते कुणः रुजो नो HATH तु । स्यात्‌ क्वा-ल्यपोस्तत्‌ परयो दु भस्त "तु aera: का तु रजः प्रदिष्टः ॥२६॥ वचि-त्रषोलोदिषु ga एव TSH FRIST CE waa seq | at fasaca च faz-amt उदस्तु थो qraq उशन्ति qa: Ri गण्डो AB: स्यात्‌ कपिरुस्य तव्य- HAMS: स्याद्‌ अथ WRT’ | भवेऽपि कम॑ण्यपि °गेञ्ज-वेप्पो मज्जेस्तु लादाविह वुड-मजो ॥२२८॥ TH ARTA BA: Fa: स्यात्‌ ध्रा fag उक्तः स्पृशतेभ्ठुवश्च ' । किप्पच्दिवश्चास्य निरूपितो at भावेऽपि कमेण्यपि शुद्रकस्थ ॥२६॥ wees भासः कथितो मिटाभः स्यान्‌ TAA: चुन्द इह We: स्थात्‌ | धः स्यात्‌ कथेस्थस्य हु-द-श्र-जीनाम्‌ भन्ते णकारगममामनन्तिः ॥२०॥ (२४) 1 71. न्नं दिभभणदिकौ. ६, नजपितु लादिकादौ नज्नेदिभनादिक्षादौ. (२९) 1 ९. भुवो, 71, Way. 2 g. त्यतो. (९८) g. अध पुत्रकस्य ( मतन्व तस्य). 2 2. ts. (९९) 1 om. न्ड. (३०) 1 1735. तातेख agi. 2 mss. °मानमलि, >. १, ३१-३६ | ATHARTAL: 0 Ra: खनश्चान्न रमो वहश्च न द्ित्वमन्त्यस्य तथा FET: स्वपेः सुभः स्यान्‌ तु सुबो ह्वडदो स्तोतेस्थुणः सवेलकार उक्तः ॥३१॥ सकः शकेः स्यादि सक्षणो a भावेऽपि कमेण्यपि नास्य तीरः' | aq रुदेरिच्छति रोचरोदो ie gar माभा भियो fase: ॥२२॥ gaa दे इह दाङ उक्तो द्रस्तु तस्यैव भविष्यति स्यात्‌ | तु-तभ्ययो्दां ate fe ae: a "णचि teal द्‌ाव-दवाव-आद्ययाः 11331 " लोपश्वुरादो च णिचो न हेतोः कवित तस्यापि लुग्‌ ऊहनीयः | “राही हा चोारदि कण्ड-वंसिं कण्हो हरावेदि FS उदासो"> ॥२३४॥ अथो निपाता मह-केर-भाया 1 मदीय इत्याद्यमिधानीयाः स्युः | TIM TAT तु सहः स्यात्‌ MA त॒ 2 भिम्हस्त्वरिते तडिल्िः igen स्थादोपदीश्रातरि धिद्ज्ञण्णः स्युजेततिआद्या इह यावदादौ | इहाञजकादया ' गणिकादिकात इत्थि ferat *sReq यथान्वयेन ॥३६॥ (az) 1 7. om, गयरपि नास्यतौरः. (३३) 1 mss. He. 2 7, om. the pada. g. fate चता at = Ua BTA: (em, givenabove ). (३४) I m. om. लोप (Qu) I 77. 071 मदोयः*"तु. 2 mss. fae. 32. ततिति, (१९) 7 me om. ofgarg etc. 2 £. sqqyTaaa, ६१ शोरमेनो-विधानम्‌ | २. १. ३५७-३८३ २ १-२३ ' बिन्दोः परः क्वापि ज aor एव यथा पिभ sea पिभो भणादि । मतः सहाथ सहससि कश्चिन्‌ निरूच्यतेऽस्मिन्‌ ससोत्ति शब्दः ॥ \५७॥ इवे faa-aat nana ita’ ' आश्चयेके नानि नहि किवन्ताः | gat विषादे इति न प्रयोगः सोद्धोदनीत्यादि : पदं कदापि ssi इति प्राङतशासने aeqact दहितीयशाग्ायां अष्टात्रिशतङ्कखमेः प्रथमस्तबकः ॥ [ द्वि्तीयस्तनके प्राच्यादि-विधानप्‌ | | प्राच्या | प्राच्यां विविच्याय भणामि भाषां सा शोरसेनी sata: प्रदिष्ट | बिन्दुस्तु सो तो मवतल्ियास्त्‌ तस्यैव सो जायत ओदवश्यम्‌ ॥१॥ मूख परुरक्खो ' GY होत्थमाणो भविष्यति स्याद्‌ “कचिदोत्थमाणः | निहीन-सम्बोधन आद्‌ अतः स्यात्‌ “hat प्रवीणा दुहितयु शम्ति ॥२॥ "परेऽपि लोकात्‌ ° सुखमूहनीयाः ऽलोकरोक्तयोऽस्यां ATA प्र्ोञयाः | वाक्यं च पूर्वो्रयोविरुदं “बोध्यं तथा amar निरुक्तेः ॥२॥ (ae) Im. om fae: पर. 2 ए, em. जकार. (ac) 1 m. Om. अाश्चयके-..इति म्‌. 2 ¢. सौङ)दमौत्यादि ( सौख्य इलौत्यादि ). (१) +I m. om. प्राच्णं*""प्रदिष्टा, (२) 1 mss, एषं, £ 'प्रषु (खलु) गोक्रमाणो. 2 mss. HIATT. 3 mss. fat. (१) 1 &. परै (परौ). 2 g. सु डइसूडनोखाः, 3 1 लोकोक्तया, 48.4% 7 1). awe | २ ९. we | प्राङृतकल्पतसः ६२ ही हो भो परिताषणे निगदितं ही माणे विस्मये wae अविव्‌ दितक्तिसदहितं वक्रे तथा वङ्कुडः' । बोभ्यं चोपङृते वुधेरवहदं saga: स्यादिणं arta तु विदृषकप्रभ्रतिभिर्वाच्यात्र area’ ॥७॥ | आवन्ती बाहीको च |] भावन्तिभाषा प्रतिपद्यतेऽसो ' बाहीक-भाषा च विभिन्नपात्ना | fafa: “समुन्मीरति शोरसेनी- प्राच्याह्यी सकरतो यदीया ॥५॥ प्रायस्तकारे स्वरशेषतापिः धकर रेफलोपोऽज विकस्पितः स्यत्‌ | पवाथेके ga ge व्चिअश्च तथा सद्रत्ते कथितः सरिच्छः ॥६॥ स्थात्‌ त्वस्तु तृणोऽथ भविष्यति at ज्ञ-जा feat ततिपोरिहापि मध्येऽपि हो श्व भुवो दरशस्तु पेक्खो णिचि स्याद्‌ दरिसस्तु तस्य INI ged ध्रुवो Site जिप्पमाहु- AOU भमणेगम्ममथो गमश्च किल छो कस्तु मुणिज्ञमित्थं यक! सहदेशम्‌ उशन्ति ater: Fh तिपा समं वाञ्छति सोच्छमादीन्‌ भविष्यति श्र-प्रभुतिष्विहापि | चेषां किलोद्‌!हरण-प्रपञ्चो बोभ्यो महाराष्टगिरां विचरे ॥६॥ (४) 7 £" aye. 7. वङ्डः (५) 1 £. बाहलोरकि. 2 7, सप्चमौलति, g. स्च्यश्चति ( aquewfa). (६) 1 g. cafe, 2 00. दोरथ £. द्र वैच, ( दस्यापि ). (<) 1 mss, qe ६३ प्राच्यादि-विधानम्‌ [ २. २. १०-१५ पषा तु भाषा नगराधिपस्य तथव ' द्वाःसाधक-धरतयोश्च । संयोजिता मध्यमपाघ्रकाणां नास्यागमे दाण्डिक-पाणिकानाम्‌ Nott | मागधी अर्धमागधी दाक्षिणात्या च ] अथेह मागध्रचुशिष्यते या करन्याद्‌ -भिन्लु-त्षपणादिकानाम्‌ | अस्या महाराप्रक-शोरसेन- भाष प्रबीणैः प्रती निरुक्ते ॥११॥ पवाधमागध्यपि किन्तु तत्र रहस्यम॑तत्‌ Hava वदान्त हगेऽहमथ यदि मागधी स्यात्‌ यथाधमागध्यहमेव रूपम्‌ ॥१२॥ तारव्य TAA सषयोभवेन्‌ शो मूधेण्य-षः कापि मतः THAT: | एषे हगे alae विहुषिदे क्ख ' भवेदिद्‌।तस्त्वधुनास्वरूपे ॥१३॥ gt ण वरो ‘agin क्खु यामि सवज्र सो छः “HT far | घगस्य यस्यात्र भवेद्‌ यकारो यदे यथ। याणदि याव यश्डा॥१४॥ RTA श्कः FATA WH १दुभ्केण ae विणिवाडदेशे | न FANT महन्ते पुलि क्खु भीमे भवेत्‌ WHIT युतकेपरीत्यप्‌ ॥१५॥ (१०) 1 mss. टीः साधिक (£. दौः साधिक). (१९) Im. भवेदिदातस्व wafeat, &. अवै दि्ास्लघनेचिष्पे ( भवेदिकारस्वधने ) (१४) 1 mss. हनि. 2 mss. कानां (£. कषुर ). (१५) 1 £. eee ( शशंएञ्च ). 2 mss. लेग्केण. २. २. १६-२१ | प्राङृतक्षस्पतसः ६४ PASAT शे बयणम्मि यश्के ट-टरस्य तु श्ट-ण्ड अनुक्रमेण | कहं ण भष्टालभ णणष्टररेशि + सतत्थस्य तु श्च कथितः प्रवीणः een आणश्च मोश्चे 'पधणाश क[य्‌]उजे हाल्ुश्चिष येम्मध शे क्ख परे कचित्तु न स्यात्‌ शमलेश्च अश्श- त्थामेण मण्णं दख HRT ॥१७॥ ्चः प्रायश SIA तु गश्चदि क्ख ण पश्चिमे घम्पपटश्शश | xe SH | चवगकाणामुपार प्रयोञयो JAY चान्तःस्थयक्रार एव ॥१८॥ मं यच ण ' शम्पुयच्छदि aa rare णिडउञ्ज AIWF, AAS Fara | *faATAU SAA इह प्रयोज्यं मामा “garfs ण afaxagxerg ॥१६॥ क्ताप्रत्यये दाणि 'पर्टि[य्‌ च्छि शे “गोवङ्धणाहि हशिद्राणि कण्डे | कचिद्‌ भवेदिश्च इभश्च तस्य पठि[य च्छिद भे हशि गोषिभाहि ॥२०॥ पलियच्छिदाभो हारम क्ख aren” [तमा ट-कुञजम्हि sector ata: कणि स्यात्‌ कचिद्रश्र एण “यणाहणाक पुलिणे क्खु यामि ॥२१ (१९) Im. लखस्यतश्च, go. तणश्यतश्, (१७) 1 mss. प, (yc) 1 mss, eu (£ ल, Wat). (१९) 1m, प्रजच्छदि, 2 mss. निविष्ट, 3 g, परारि, (१०) Ig. €ाण. पसोदए. 2 £. me नाहि ( गौिन्द्‌ art), 3 mss. इलि. (११) 1 mss. faq. 2m. Gan, वतै, 3 70), away, g. अन्तर, 4 mss, यश्‌ णाक ६५ प्राच्यादि-बिधानप्‌ [ २. २. २२-२७ अवापयोरुक्च उशन्ति [धीराः] "खण पि गोची उशलादिः पाशा | निपात्यतेऽथो वुलिशो ° पुमर्थं तथा हिडक्तो हदये प्रवीणाः" ॥२२॥ मित्रे बशो लिदनं तु ca [पिशह्वभो]ऽप्यत्न पिशाचके स्यात्‌ । "लिका च BIT गणना-वुभुक््वि- त्यस्मिन्‌ पदे tara वरो agea: ॥२३॥ उदीरितो गोरविते च कोष्णो मनीषिभिर्गोमिक-कोरशिणो at स्यात्‌ कु ्तिमत्यामिह कुय॒ च्छिमादी तथा मता मातरि "माई च ॥२४॥ आद्राद्र॑म्‌ मोषह्टोह्टमुदाहरन्ति कविप्रयोगैरपरं ` सुबोधम्‌ । अतस्त्विदेताविष्ट पसि सो at ण एशि fants यच्छिविद ण परे ॥२५॥ 1 क्गुन्दोऽनुरोधात्‌ बहर GAT कुःडलुप माहव ः दीश शे । शो वा ङस स्यात्‌ प्रकृतेश्च दीधेः पुप्फे मण णिय्‌ज्दि माहवाह ॥२६॥ धदोदिष्टामन््रण हरितो (हो) हे भध्टके “कि भुक्ल aca ar । भआच्तेप आद्‌ बा वुलिशा अषेऽन्यहू हृष्टं मतं विस्मयतापयो af ॥२७॥ (२२) 1 £. खणदि (खणेवि). 2 £.. उपलालि, "7. उसुनानि- 3 g. पलि. 48. em. प्रवीरः. (२९३) 1m. फियनौयठतु, g. फिय्जीजक्न. 2 mss. लिधा ( 7. लिका) च भमुकखा. (eu) 1g. afer. (२५) 1g. atte ( त्‌ बोध्यं). (२६) 1 £. SME. 2 £. VTE ( आआशुह ), (२७) 1 7. किंुक्‌. gi fen (wen). 26,4. प. 4, P—g २ २. २८-३२ | TBARS: ६६ सम्बोधने Fa a च छे छे आहं च es च CSA | aq च तुम्हे जसि युष्मदः स्यात्‌ at स्था-वषोर्र [च] य्‌ वचिण्ट axa? esi भुवो इुवभ्चात्र " लृरि प्रयोज्यः Ha सते चात्र गते च रूपप्‌ | ae ne चात्र गडं बदन्ति कं अ YA AA गभ तथाऽन्ये ॥२६॥ कृन्तेस्त॒ कण्पो न च स्वता स्याह saa आतश्च “अदेव ariq | स्याद्वयत्ययः कापि gd विभक्ते- दध स्तिङः कुज चिदेवमन्यत्‌ ॥२३०॥ कस्यापि ेशचिकधीर्टिव ` न वेति यो छन्नषण-मेदमन्र | पेशाचिकानां gaa पव निरूपणीयं सविशेषमत्र ॥३१॥ दाक्षिणात्य-पद-सम्बलितं" यत्‌ सं स्छतादिभिरभिच्छुरितं* च | स्वादुसारममताद्‌ पि काव्यं दाक्तिणात्यमिति तत्‌ कथयन्ति ॥३२॥ शति प्राङ्‌तश्ासने कव्पतरो द्वात्निशतक्कस्मे्धितीयशाखाय प्राच्या मागध्यधमागधी-दाक्निणात्याभावा-निणयो नाम द्वितीयस्तबकः ॥ (२८) I 7), ami. £, वससौ. (२९<) 1 mss. लिटि, (१०) 1 mss. अतेव कापि. (३१) 1 mss, र्चाशिकानां. (३२) 1 £. दाषिणपदसम्भलितं ( समिलितं). 1, eifts ge wofed. 2 £. सुख तादिभिदधुरितं ( भपि च्छरितं ). | व्रतीयस्तबके विभाषा-विधानप्‌ | [श्चाकारिकी भतो विभाषा नवधा निरताः शाक्षारिकी प्रागन॒रिष्यतेऽत्र | मवादियुक्तो निरताचि cra: श्यालः शकारश्चपलोऽतिमूखंः ॥१॥ शाकारिकी तस्य वचो विभाषा लिङ्गम-न्याय-करखादि-हीना । अस्यास्तु सिद्धिः ag मागधीतः Tt वात्र दुष्प्रकष्य-सदक्तयोः स्यात्‌ ॥२॥ teeter [यू ]चाण्डाट ‡शलिश्च [य्‌ |चिण्ट "ण्टृस्योदितो णठः शुरपि कचित्‌ स्यात्‌ शिभाखभा [य्‌)चिण्ट aafta [य)]चेडा ae तुमं बा (alfag यामि as nan त्थः स्यात्‌ प्रङृत्येव न मागधीवत्‌ [याचिण्डामि अत्थाणगदे क्खु हक्क | क्वचित्‌ क्वचित्‌ ण्डोऽपि च यण्ट तण्ड वभ ` शिरं मिश्शशिः तण्ड दाव ile कण्‌-ग्रत्ययः .प्रायज्ञ इष्यतेभ्त् वः स्यादिवाथं हदये हडकः' । rare fatal? बहुलं बिकार- खोपागमा लिङ्विपयेयोऽपि ॥५॥ किब्भीशणे भिश्चदि तश्च esi 1 इन्दूदणि यो ण अ RITE? । an sa एत्थ हङे विशामि पत्ते यथावत्‌ स्थितमूहनीयम्‌ ॥६॥ {१) 1 mss, दुष ( £. दुप्येश्च ), (3) 1 m. frafaafa, ६. शिलिमिसुशि. (4) I g. wea (wee), 2 g.fam@® (€) 1 £. sind. 2 £. Ras. 2 mss, चाण्डाल शरिय ( £ अलि ). 3 mss. ` दित, - २. ३. ७-१२ | प्राङतकद्यतशः gs तिङ्‌-सुप-विभक्तयादि-बिपर्थयोऽपि यथातथं सूरिभिरूहनीयम्‌" | eat क्वचिह्धोपम्‌ उशन्ति धीरा az वा teat जस्यपि सषेनाम्नः ॥७॥ प्रायो भवेत्‌ शदरिणी-सटशे | विकर्षो युक्तपरेऽपि गुरवोऽत्र रघूभवन्ति | कामेण esl क्खु मे gem तवश्शी अङ्ाल-लछाशि पडिदे विम ंश-खण्डे ॥८॥ ona निरर्थकम्‌ अपक्रमं विशदं ` "न्यायागमादि-षिकटं विहतोपमानं | प्रायः शकार-वचनं पुनरुक्तमिष्ट दोषा पदेऽपि गुणतामिह संप्रयान्ति ॥६॥ [बाण्डाणिका] चाण्डालिकेति प्रथिता विभाषा प्रवक्ष्यते ATA यथोपदेशम्‌ | एषा तु संसिध्यति शोरसेनी- मागध्युपष्टेश-वरेन BTA ॥१०॥ aed स्त्र्या जस्यमि चेह fare ये इत्थिके तत्थ [य्‌] चिल anita | म[य्‌]ज्मःं पि ताणं efor रमन्ति ते छाहिके Qa कुड ङ्भम्मि een भवेन्‌ ङसः श्शः पुटिशश्शा अत्थे हः स्यात्‌ प्रत्या रम हट- तुह । अतो भवेत्‌ Gans पेश्क उभ त्थिप [य्‌]चन्दु णहङ्णम्मि ॥१२॥ (७) 1 ge परिभि ( सूरिभि° ) (८) 1 £. शविलोखपुसे ( asfaat wet). (2) 1 £. श्यादागमादिविक्गलं विह्धितोपमान. (१९) 1 g. चृ We. ९९ षिभाषा-षिधानम्‌ [ २. ३. १३-१८ म्पिरऽ डः पेध्क धरम्मि कण्डं ध च कचित्‌ पेशक वणे बि ag | प्राम्योक्तयोऽस्यां AES प्रयोज्याः त्वा-प्रत्ययोऽस्यां तु ‘gat प्रवीणः ॥१३॥ स्याद्रोरवामन्त्रण ओ तु नित्यं यद्‌ WAR तु ' AAT | भगोरवे त्वात्‌ कह पत्थ [य्‌]चेडा भआणेशि मे >अयज्ञ-वि ण क्लु वेदं ॥१७॥ रे meas: कथितस्त्वदीय - मदीयमाहस्तुहकेिभादि | आत्मीयम्‌ भष्पाणभकेखिभ' च प्रायस्तकारे स्वरशेषतां च ॥१५॥ [ शाबरी 7 अथोच्यते सम्प्रति शाबरीयं पुरोदिता मागधीकेव सूते । भङ्ारिक-ग्याध-वहित्र-काष्ठो- पजीविनां वाचि नियुज्यतेऽसो ॥१६॥ Way कतक त्वस्य मतश्चक्रारः शामि *मद्‌ चेश्चदि अहम | नान्यत्र कान्ते AE दशकिणे शे आहं ETT द्वाबहमर्थंको तु ॥१७॥ Sfe विभाषास्य ' मतं लघुत्वं सा इशचिभा [य्‌]चिण्टदि पाशि a | 'उुञ्मलिभा कदि eased आपेश्चमाणी " किर Gre Bret ॥१८॥ (१९) 1 1785. द. (१४) 1 £. मदभानिषेशौ or मदम्रानिवेशौ. 2 mss, अयन. (tu) 1 £. छ. रः. (ye) 7 ¢. मतल (मतल). 2 g. उमरत्तिभ्रा, 3g. भापश्( पेश ) मालौ. प्र. भपेशमाषे, २. ३. १९-२४ ] प्राङतकस्पतषः mata तस्येह भवेदिकारः शयच्चं हला मे घलि णत्थि शामी | भधारवाचिन्यपि पञ्चमी स्यात्‌ तुमं घलादो शरि [य्‌]चिण्ठ दाब ॥१६॥ सलक च वा [य्‌]चिण्ठदि aman शेरे सम्बोधने नित्यम्‌ अगोरवे त्वात्‌ | ad तुमं बम्हणभा णिभयच्त प्रायेण देश्या इह काव्यशब्दाः ॥२०॥ wate वा पहि ata पही- त्यथऽथ पूर्वापरयोतिरोधः। स्याद्वक्ययोयेस्त स इट पव विक्ञयमन्यत्‌ कबिसम्प्रदाय।त्‌ ॥२१॥ धकेव सा मागधिकात्र भाषा विभिद्यते पाज विमेदतस्त | भआभीरिका द्राविडिकोत्करी च वानोकसी मान्दुरिकेति नाम्ना ॥२२॥ [ आभीरिका | आभीरिकायामपरं विरोधं वदन्ति केचित्‌ तमिह व्रवीमि | भस्यास्तु सिद्धिः खलु शावरीतः शषो पुनदेन्त्य-स-कार धव ॥२३॥ कचित्‌ qa: कस्य भवेदिह त्वो स्यात्‌ HAR मधभ्यम-चस्तु YH च । पवहि ठे कोभ कीन मं पेभ्व ति भीमेण हओ क्खु कीभो ॥२४॥ आदेरण्येऽ न BIT शषः क्रचित्‌ प्रयोज्यो द-रयोल-कारः। अतो Wags इह सौतु नित्यं भट्धारकः संकथितोऽज् AST ॥२५॥ ˆ go ७१ विभाषा-बिधानम्‌ [ २. ३ २६-३१ प्रायेण सम्बोधन भद्‌ अतः स्यात्‌ यथातथेत्यन्न जिधस्तिधश्च | पोषं प्रयोगात्‌ कषिभिर्निरूष्यं न बिस्तरणाश्र निरूपितं तत्‌ ॥२६॥ [ zat | Zan विभाषां aq तां वदामि या य॒तक्षारादिक-धूर्तवाच्या । अन्या पुनरद्राविडभाषयापि प्रविश्यते यन्न न BEA तस्याः ॥२७॥ स्यात्‌ AST संस्कृत-शोरसेन्यो- स्तु सिद्धिर्‌ ae पदान्ते । स्यादट्‌पचरामं खगुडे हणेद भ्यसस्तु हं हं" कथिताविमो at ॥२८॥ भामोऽपि वा तो विदितो किमादे- ह-दीध्रता च एकनेनिरूक्ता | Re च aid कथितं च जाह ददाह पतान पद्रानि AT ॥२६॥ तुं त्वमे हमु चाहमधं lag ममाथ जगदुः पदानि । जिधं यथा५ fast तथा AT निरूप्यं क विसम्प्रदाय्ात्‌ ॥२०॥ शकारकोड-द्रणिडादि-वाचोऽ पथ्चंशतां यद्यपि संश्रयन्ति। स्या्नारकादो यदि सम्प्रयोगो नैता अपश्रंशतया AV: ॥२१॥ इति प्राङृतशासने कल्पतसो पकत्रिशतक्षसमेस्तृतीयः स्तबकः ॥ इति रमशर्मं त्॑बागीशभद्धाचायविरचिते कल्पतरो त्रिभिः स्तवक ह्वितीयशाखा निरुक्ता ॥ (र्ट) Im. म. (Re) 1 mss. care (९. एदा). (३०) Ig, मह. (११) नेताखपम श ° | 1 g. TEAK TIAL तृतोयशाखा [ प्रथमस्तबके नागराप्रंश-विधानप्‌ ] निरच्यते सम्पति नागरादि- mara इष्ट प्रसिद्धया । सवास्वपश्रंशमिदासु सदि- मेता पुरोवीरित भाषयोस्तु ॥१॥ भयुजि कखयोरत्रानादौ गघो तथयोर्दधौ ‘alge निपुणा नाके ony ब्रुवन्ति ga घुघु । पविदु पतिते शोथे सोधु कमात्‌ सकलादिके पुनरपि महारा संसाधयेत्‌ सभटादिकम्‌ ॥२॥ कः ष्क-स्कयोर्भवति वुष्कर-मस्करावो त्स्यापि राक्तस-मुखे स शदोपदिषटः | 'संदानिते fase: कवयश्‌ शब्दं तुः शुण्डकेऽपि विरभ तु मतं विरुद्धे ॥२॥ भ्यास-ग्याडि-प्रभूतिषु पदेष्वज्न रः स्यादधस्तात्‌ वासु -बाड़-प्रिय-मृग-समे स्यात्‌ प्रत्या रश्च | देश्या 'वीरादय इह ' टता-दुबेटाद्यथक्ास्ते gerard खघुनि च तथा "arate: स्यात्‌ कवीनाम्‌ iil स्तोके 'थोडं स्याश्च भदरेऽ्र भह 2at At च त्वदीये मदीये | तस्मिन्नथ [तोर मो हर ऽ [च] Relea: कीद्रशीत्थादिकेषु ॥५॥ (x) 1g. तदिह grasa ( तदिह च gaat लोगु). (2) 1 £. fame m. बिदानिरै, (8) 1g. Morea ( रौणदय ). 2 £} णतास्ववनाद्यथके (मवा खवेनाद्यरकके). 3 0. Sree, ९. ure ( arefe: ), (४) 1 £. ais (ate). 2g. तेष ( वैरं ), 3 0, इर, 53 TNT -fagrag [ ३, १. ६-११ स्यात्‌ ' कोद्रशादेरिह केह-आदि धियां सिभा कापि गुरोलं चुत्वम्‌ | अतोऽस्त्रियां डा eas प्रसण्णं डितु स्त्रियां गालडि way कण्ठे ॥६। सव्र दुर wie कामिणीदु' 1 आकभ्यक-प्राम्यपदानि AAT | स्तयां सुपो लुक्‌ प्रकृतेश्च हस्वः स्यादा बा MAT Wars च isi Bast TTR Waar दीधः स्याद्‌ अगि अगगी बणड़ quire | कम दिके ऽप्येवनुद्वाहरन्ति। AUTH: स्यादत उत्‌ स्वमोस्तु ॥८॥ कोलन्तु AA कण्ड्‌ पलु कीलन्तु wissen कण्ड्‌ गोषो | सोरोदपि स्याण्णरभ TST भवेन्महारप्रसमाश्रयेण ॥६॥ इान्यतोऽपि क्वचिद्‌ उन्‌ प्रयोज्यो TT बाखाड ज्ञुभाण कण्डु | g: स्यात्‌ ‘HIT Stag ag sq" हे eusM masse चरन्ति ॥१०॥ नपुंसके स्यादिह जश्शसोरि" दीघं तथा वा वण TTT । घा जश्शासोः स्त्रीविषये भवेदु उद्‌ AEST AIS TES श्च ॥११॥ (६) 1 mss, Mentarfas ( कौटशादाविह ). (७) 1 g. Saga (अगाप्रव). m, indistinct 2m. waaay सच च, £, waa aag, 4. (८) 1g प्यवसुदष्ैरन्ति ( प्यव सुपोडरन्ति) (१०) rg. कणोङ्कद्धखत gue (११) 1 £. °रिदि for ofty, P—to ६. १. १२-१७ | (ta) 1 ge शणश्हौ मसडनदन्तकानां ( यणो इदुद्न्तकानां). 2 mss, तिशष fewfeefi: ( टाभिङंसिडमस्‌ डिभि: ). (१६) mss. असुमितरणनद्म ( 7. ge ) afresh ( ए, Sere येवां dcafest ). प्राङृतकृटतषरः a arfeng स्याह बणव बहर पणालिव भिस्‌-डि-खुपां वुनरहि | aan wae बहि तेहि हो SS By घरहे तथान्यत्‌ ॥१२॥ हं हुं भ्यसः काणणहं हं पत्ते मतं काणणहु' षह । हो हे ङसः काणणहो णहे हं हं च केचिद्‌ वणं age ital घु-रसो तथा SHAG SIA हृदूत थवा हु विभाषितोहे। भामस्तुहं नु ANE AEE प्रयुज्यते केऽप्यपरे age [१] ॥१४। रूपं महाराण्रकयोहनीयम्‌ भामीह 'ण-ण्डो [१] इदुदन्तकानाम्‌ प भघ्य ° टाभिङ्सि-ङस्‌-ङभिः स्थात्‌ aaa रूपं पुरिसे बदम्ति ॥१५॥ टेनासत्विदुहुभ्याम्‌ 1 आसिष्ण [ तुम्हे | रूरक्णिभो ora [अ आा|सुदण , धहि भिसः स्याद्‌ afaate” gst? विषण्ण asa सुरि og ॥१६॥ ae स्त्रियां ङो णद age संबोधने हे ang हे | alae हस्वोऽपि निरक्त Faq पुषं तथोक्षाहतमेष स्वम्‌ ॥१७॥ 9k नीगरापञ्चंरा-विधानप्‌ [ ३, १. १८-१६ लिङ्येऽपि जसि हो बणहो हो गन्धञ्वह्ो क्वचिदिहापि च सक्ल-भादि | कि-यत्तदां तु भवति प्रथम-दहितीया- सप्तम्यपीह ATLE-AAr प्रयोगे ॥१८॥ कोके कके He केस्वपि wala पदं aaa: stq-arat- रप्येवं रूपमाहुडस ce फथितः घु प्ररव्याश्च दीर्घः | aad कालु करषव्यपरमपि मतं Reg षण्डे लियाम- प्येवं स्यात्‌ यत्तदोश्चाप्यमिद्रधति तथा चामि वा ay तदु" gan इह az ag [ङि] ङसोस्सयोभंवेव इदमः स्वमोरिमुर अयं तु न दयाम्‌ भदसस्तयोः सुपि [च] निदिशन्त्यमु मतम्‌ पतदलिषु च पह धीमताम्‌ ॥२०॥ दशो स्वमोभवति ‘ag च पह चोक्तम्‌ हेच डे च ane कथयन्ति रूपप्‌ | सो यसदोः पवमनुक्रमतोऽत्र जे सेः प पत्रो भवति पूवमपोह रूपम्‌ ॥२१॥ ag: स तहं quae जश-श्सोः स्यात्‌ परः रामि ङो तुम्हहि cara fala | ' ङप्त-ङसा-[वात्र] saad मैनिरे तुमह तुम्हे Fe स्याञ्च Tar कचित्‌ ॥२२॥ aia हमु aan जसि शसि स्यात्‌ aver’ टामि ड तस्य स्यान्नष्टं svete भिसि मतं अम्हेहि ane त्रयम्‌ | fafte मह मऽम any डति डस्यप्यम्ह ङस्यामि च स्याद्वा णो भ्यसि ate al iT मतं BART वा अम्हघु ॥२३॥ ` ` (द) 7 7). ure @ चोषा एषे च डाव Taal सपं. £. एसु See Mar एहि चौ हसकखमन्ति दपम्‌ ( ( एह च एड चोक्तम्‌ Ce चद च सकलं कथयन्ति रुपम्‌ ). 2 mss, जे ते. (द्‌) 1 mss, ज स्सावव, ३. १. २४-२६ | TRAITS! ७६ ce काममचां ग्‌ इति षिशेषाः' प्ररुति-प्रत्यय-सन्धिषपदिष्ठाः | तदुदाहरणादि लक्ष्म ्रष्स्या कतिचित्‌ संप्रतिपष्यामि तावत्‌ ॥२४॥ लोपश्वेदिषह [खक्ख] खक्खड तथा Tay ` यदवाजागमः स्याट्‌ HEME हो कख "ay वो देश््व्ो Jaw? | बाख हि बाड (?) बाड तथा Tears इत्यादिके रूपे रूप-विपययः वुनरचाम्‌ उक्ता विरेषा बुधेः ॥२५॥ धातुतो भवति नात्मनेपदं तिप्‌-मसोस्तु दि-हुमो क्रमान्मतो | सो हसेदि AE ण भभ्ह्‌ तदिधि-प्रकतिको तु मिप्सिपो ॥२६॥ [मिप्‌] चान्न fasta हत्थि कण्डं म्ह-मसस्त्वदेतो [च ANTE देग्ह। शिवां सिपो देहि aor” ara हः स्थस्य AFIS FST WANT ॥२७॥ लृटि इहि fa च ares [ag] gfafes पहु हसीसदह HIE । क्वचिदपि gear इव्यपि रूपं त्दटि मसि का पुनर इभः स्यात्‌ AUSSI aa gt अपि तिष्ठतेः पसरः स्यात्‌ प्रेण सार्धं विरशे- aleve: वनरा ्छिषेरिष्ट दशे दौ देक्ख-पस्सावपिः | णिच्यस्यैव वदन्ति दाक्ख-दरसो तिम्मस्‌ तिमेः स्याच्च वै *ठञ्वः स्थापयतेः वुननिगदितष्ठाबोऽथ > वञ्च AH ॥२९॥ (२४) 1 £. शुग इति विशेषाः ( शुग्‌ विभाषा; ). (au) 1 mss. यदृङोगम. 2 £. yx a} (gue). 3 "183. बाल च्रोष्ववोलुवेलाङ. g. वालास्नो (g. arent इतरं गु ares). (२६) 1 mss. तिप्सिपीच्य. (Re) 1 mss. faa erating 2 1055, कन्दु देताभभरघा इ (६. wife ) दैमु. 3 g. fertfat हेहि. (८) 1m, adds. तसुषिड. (ke) 1g. gar. m. °पुस.सा० 01 पञ्चस 2 mss. बरं 3 mss. °qraisy for ° हावोऽथ, oe नागरापन्रंश-बिधानम्‌ [३. १, ३०-६१ ¦ २, VB गुण्ड प्रहेरिह मुचो मुभ-मुक्-मेल- TS वदेरथ रः कर दिशन्ति | भाणाघम्‌ भाङ्युत-णियो णिचि चात्र are भाचनक्ततेः शतृ मतस्तु [>] शस्तिकाङे ॥३०॥ तोम्मे arom मुवहि(?) पहि च पद्‌न्याहुयथा-सं ख्यत- स्त्वां तेषामघुना अमीभिरिति ये शश्ास्तवर्थान्विताः | fasaret ox तिष्णि चारि न मया बाहुल्प-मीत्योदितं AMARC वरातन-कवेः काव्येषु बोध्यं TPT: ॥२१॥ इति [नागर ]पश्रंशस्तबकः ॥ [ हितीयस्तबके त्राचडापश्रंरा-विधानम्‌ | अथ बचडाख्पराम्‌ AW श-भाषां वदामः प्रसिद्धा तु सा सिन्धु-देशे | स्मरता नागरादरैव सिद्धिस्तदीया विशेषान्न यत्रोच्यते BEA तस्याः ॥१॥ area पव सवषयोरिह शाः प्रयोऽयो शरत्यापरष्र-ऋृताविह [तु] प्रकृत्या | भन्तःस्थ-याधरगतो तु च-जो विधेयो द्वित्वे यथा गिरिश-भिय्‌च्चु adia रय्‌ञ्जु ॥२॥ द्-धयोः स्वरशेषता च न स्याद्‌ तडयोः किञ्च zat मतो पारो वरानादिषु डोऽथः? सोज्ि सेवे- त्यभिधाने Gy खण्डुमाह खडगे ॥३। (९०) 1 7055, गुण, (९१) J mss, तोमावान्रसु एहि (g. सुरि ) एहि. (२) 1 g. भप्तेपवनकता ( wats ware) 2 11158. तु. 3 755 दित्वे. 4 g. गिरिशसियद्नदोर ( cen य॒ च्छलङ्ोभ्र ). 5 mss, aay ( £, wa). (९) 1 755. उभयोकिञ्च टादौ. २ £. सोजिख ( सोजि). ह, २, ४-१० | प्राङृतकस्यतदः ye भुबो भो पुनभू मतः क्ते प्रवो प्रो | नभो प्रादितःस्युबुषे व्मादुः। ag Aa तत्‌ संस्कृतं शोरसेनी- महाराष्रू-भषश्च संसाधयन्ति ॥४॥ उपनागरमन्न संस्कृतादुभयोराहुरनन्तवरोक्तयः। भथ शासति रक्ष-सन्धवावपि पाञ्चाख-मयुष्य-लन्षणीः ॥५॥ at धुरा निगदिता खलु या विभाषा सा नागरादिभिरपि जिभिरन्विता चेत्‌ | तामेव रक्क-विषये निगदन्ति राक्षा पञ्च AAA तदुदाहरणं गवेष्यम्‌ ॥६॥ ये नागर-ब।(चड़कवयोऽन्रा- प्रशमयेद्‌: कथिताः वुरस्तात्‌ | aga बिरोषाश्रणेन पञ्चा- लिकादयो षिंशतिरव पष ।॥७॥ भादि इडि-बहुखात्र पञ्चा- [लिका] तु-भूम्ना GY मागधी स्यात्‌ | aah agaat वदन्ति कादौ तुं सम्बोधन-शाव्वभूम्ना IFN भोड़ी तु sat agar निर्दिष्टा SRT वीप्सित-शाब्द-भूम्ना । समास-भूविष्ट-पदा तु गोडी डक्रार भूम्ना क्रिल कोन्तलीं स्यात्‌ ॥६॥ धकारमृम्ना निरवावि west स्यात्‌ AGA?) संयुत -बणे-मम्ना | कलिङ्गजा हि-खचितामिभ्‌ म्ना प्राच्या तु ` सो-वट-पदावदलम्बा ॥१०॥ ॥ # ॥ (\) 1६, 01, this hemistich, 2 713, वृक्ष, (१०) 1 ए. eae ( dite) ७8 नागरापश्ंग-विधानप्‌ | ३. २. ११-१२ ! ३. १-२ भाभीरिका प्रायिक-मद्रकादि कार्णारिका रेफ-विपयंयेण | देशी पदान्येव तु मध्यदेश्या स्याट्‌ MA संस्छृत-शब्दभूस्ना ॥११॥ zara द्राविडी छस्य विपर्ययेण पाश्चात्यजा स्याह र-छ-पर्थयेण | देतालिक्ी नाम त-कारभूष्ना काञ्ची तु व-आओ-बहुलोपरिष्य्या ॥१२॥ परेऽप्यपश्रंशमिदास्ति aaz- देशीयभाषा-पद्संप्रयोगात्‌ | न सा faxing शह सप्रदिष्टा भेदो यदस्यामतिदुनिरूत्यः ॥१६३॥ इति प्राकृतशासने वाचडाद्यपश्चंशस्तबकः | [ वृतीयस्वबके पेशाचिक-विधानंम्‌ | पेराचिकानि द्विविधानि शुद- संकीणमेदेन त्वथोदितानि ` | "तचछादिमं ऽस्तकमनत्र Te संकीण मन्यस +चतुष्कमाहुः ॥१॥ केकेय-पैशाचमथोच्यतेऽस्य सिद्धिः स्मता संस्छृत-शोरसेन्योः | तर्वत्र ait प्रथम-द्वितीयो त्रि-तुर्ययोर््र नियोज्ञनीयो ॥२॥ (११) 1g. पराप्य 2m. दुनिरुपः, £. दुनिपः ( द्रिकष्पः ), (१) 1 mss, लवो (ह. खनौ ), 2 ए, तम्बदिभं, : 71. इरमकलव, 4 ९. चलीमाहंः, (२) 1 "1. शोसैन्योः. ६. ३. ३.४ | HARE: ८9 वुन्त्योऽत्र सः स्थात्‌ शषयोष्ट-वम्यै- 1 णस्यापि दन्त्यः कथितो न-कारः | भार्याश्ष यस्य fie: सनश्च खामादिष er निरूपणीयः ॥३॥ रत्नादिके युक्तबिकश्माह गहे किहं age वे fae च । कष्टे तथा टस्य az: ofezeat निपात्यते [वे] पृथुमीतिः रूपम्‌ ie हितपकः हृदये प्रथमे a: ' पृथुममिच्छति बिस्मयसृक्ष्मयोः | १ पिष सखम कवचिदथकं sala qeaqe ‘qad मतम्‌ ॥५॥ काय कश्चं ` तूनं भदिभ्यते wa:? ९ण्य-क्ञ-न्यानां ज्‌जो भवे्नित्यमत्र | राज्ञो राचिष्टा-ङसि-ङस-* ङु स्यात्‌ तस्मिन्‌ THAT राचिना AAA PAA ॥६॥ वैशा विक यत्‌ fae mca तस्मित्‌ ष्र-सोः स्यात्‌ प्रथमः श-क्ारः | सब्वर॑श्र रेफस्य छ-कार पव ष्कः चस्य कोत्तेयक-रात्षसादो ॥७॥ ' अहूनि बुधेमेतमधुना भषति fas’ तिषिः पिबतेः | एएत-मरतयोः क ड-मड-वद्‌ ma उदितं गड मानैः ॥६॥ (३) 1 mss. भल्ापि ( श्र्यापि ). (४) 1 £. पिव, 2 em. by g. 3. mss. शटदैति (8. प्रथुनीति). (x) 1 €. प्रबुममि० 2 1285, विखमम'. (g. पिसुमभो). 3 "0. qua. (६) 4. ह. प्रमं 1 mss, तून, 2 7155. क्रः, 3 g.fegaty. m.fegery. (©) 1 &. ग्वा, (८) 1 mss. We fe (8 भहणि ). 2 mss, पिति (क्ि)पि. ८? पशाचिक-विधानम्‌ L ३- ३* eRe मतं ' भारिभा-यादिकः qaqa तथा त्वत्थि भद्‌ पुनस्‌ त्थस्य ग्रह्‌ | इट्‌ ` स्था-विकारे टकारस्य चण्डः {स्थन TJ faa 1 श्चिण्डदीत्यादि बोध्यम्‌ ॥६॥ निन्दादिकरे स्याट्‌ अत £ शिली: अन्यत्र एर | परे agen]? | TART वा प कथग्रन्ति गायै गामं [ तु वा |° केकयवत्‌ प्रयोऽयम्‌ ॥१५॥ र-लोः पुनः " पययत्वे वदन्ति पाञ्चार-पे्ाचिकमत्र ALA: | तद्‌ गोड-दैशाचिकमिष्यते [त्‌] स्यातां रखो रस्य A BEA a gt ।॥११। मतं मागधं नाम दशाचिकतु यदा मागधानां प्रज्ञायेत भाषा | अथ Aas नाम पैशाचकं तत्‌ पदानां यदा संस्छृतंसिश्रणा स्यात्‌ ॥१२॥ जज्ञे श-मेदादपरं च पेशा- चिकं भवेत्तत्‌ किट सृष््म-मदम्‌ | ग्‌डन्तु-माधुयवदस्य तान्‌ न बिद्यते निवचनाय शक्तिः ॥१३॥ संक्ीणे-" पैशाचिकमत्र शद्ा- शद्धपरमेदात्‌ प्रथम दविभेदम्‌ | ga? त॒ माषा पदशद्धमेदाद्‌ _ द्विधा विभक्तं कवयो वदन्ति ॥१४॥ (<) 1 mss. नियरियादिकं. 2 mss. स्ताविकरारं. 3 fae. 4 gy धिभ्रास्कौरहि""" व), (१०) 1 mss. fame. 2 mss, SHAE. 2. g. em. नवा for the om, syllables, (११) 1 mgs. प्रत्ययति, 2 11155. om. तु. (१२) 1 11155. THA. (१४) 1 185. रणचिक्रमाग््खो पडे (70. न्मा > > BE) AAA. 2 8. शङ्गा. ३. Be १४५-२० | WHARCTAS: ८२ द्विविधं पदशद्ध मिष्यते मतमेकं पुनर दं शुदधकम्‌ | अपरं तु निरुच्यते चतु- ०पद्‌-शुद्धं तदिदं बिविच्यते ॥१५॥ 'यदेकभाषामयमद्धमन्य- भाषामयं चापरमद्धश्चद्धम्‌ | चतुषु पादेषु ‘aq aaeit भाषा श्चतुष्पाद-विशद्धमेतत्‌ ॥१६॥ तिर-तण्डुल्वद्यदा तु भाषाः प्रविशन्तीह बहुप्रकार उक्ताः! तव्शुद्धमुदाहतं तु काव्यं तदिह त्वस्य च [कारितं] क्रमेण ॥१७] यथा मम- "कमखा-काम-[सं]खोलट-काम-कखा-कुल-कोमलालक्राः | कटिकाल-काट-कलिखं मुखता पु मोहकलोलम्‌ ॥१८॥ aa पाञ्चार-पैशाचिकाविताः संस्छृताः | शब्दाः |) सर्वा धव पञ्चपश्चाश्‌ भाषाः। PRT: शोरसेनीसंस्छृतयोः संकरो यथा मालती-माधवे ( ६।१० )- ‘ard साहस रागं परिहर TANS मुञ्च संरम्भं | विरसं ° विरष्टायासं सादु तव चित्तमसहं मे ॥१६॥ ‘gg भाषाद्वयसंकसे Fe: | तश्च अदश॒खं यथा- भावेण ` विरह-सििणो मणीषु सभणे giza-aieag | कण्डे Hamas ° विरहिण्याः काटपाश ईव ॥२०॥ (१४) Ig, यपरन्तु, m. indistinct. (१६) 1 °भाषामवमङ्ै° ( £. ake). 2 £. सदावेशखौभाषा० (१७) 1 ogargarfa काव्य. 22. खस्य. (१८) 7 mss कमलाकमं लोलाकाभकला कालशेम- लालौका। कलिकालकाल कलिलं सुच्ासुमीहकष्नोलं। (१९) 1 mss. ayaa (£, ate ). 2 mss. विर इायमिसो. 3 ह. em. तव. 4. एवं भाषा इरशंकरो... तच्च भर्धंशद्धम्‌। यथा (२०) 1 mss. विरह सिंडिशो मणौमुसयलेफुडिभपड्िएमु. 2 g. विरडिग्याश्तु, 53 पशाचिक-विधानप्‌ | ३. २. २१ यथा वा कध्यचित्‌- | जयति जनतामिवाज्छिति-फल प्रदः कल्प-पादपो गिरिशः | जभ्‌ "मडमारहन्ती गिरि-तणभा* पणद-कप्परभा ॥२२॥ TT BEA* ey सत्रासा भाषाणां संकरो zee: | इति प्राृतकस्यतयो पञ्चवशकुसुमैस्ततीयथशाख। निरुक्ता ॥ इति श्रीरम-तक्रवागीर-मद्राचाय-विरचितः सप्तपश्चाशत्‌-त्रिशती-विनिमित- शाखा-त्रग्रेण एवान्‌ [प्राकृत | ृद्यतरः सम्पूणः? | १(२) 1 This hemistich is from the Sarasvatihaulhdbharava ( 11. 11, 9) See Grierson’s 10105 0) 21, 2 0. मतमा.. 3९. गिरितिणदा 4 ६. ला), नक्त for wey. 5s The following stanzas eccur at the end of the mss. : श्राधिभवदयख कलक्तोनल। ( कसय Tal?) दो Bz) ara fae स Me तस्येव qel फलवान्‌ सुप्रदारारौपिणः केल्यःरुम्नि "खः ॥ ननम्य लस्वोदर-पा AIT दनासभूरालसित्‌ शकरा । शोक्ञणरामोऽभ्यलिखत्‌ प्रयतात्‌ विगानं प्राक्रनकन्पहपम्‌ ॥ Put the last line does pot occur in the India Oilice Ms, RAMA-SARMAN’S PRAKRTA-KALPATARU TRANSLATION ]. 7. Vowels 1. The first « of the words of the samgddht group, 18 optionally lengthened. What are they १ [ They are: | samrddla, prakata, prasiddhi, abhijati, niauascing, sadgksa, pratisiddha, Notes: See Vr. 1, 2 ; Mk. I. % Such a lengthening of @ in the first syllable, occurs also in Pali ( Geiger § 24) and the Asokan Pkt. 2. Others [add to this list ] prasupta and pratipad, while some [ add also | sexsya and aéva. [ For the latter two the lengthening of ^ 18 | compulsory before a single consonant. The first a of words like 7sad, anyara, medanga, pakva, svapna, and vetasa ete. become +. Notes: Sec Vr. I. 2-3; Mk. I. 3-4. The change of @ into @ in the Pkt. of @sva@ and sasya, is called Compensatory Lengthening. It occurs sporadically also in Pali ( Geiger § 6). The change of @ into 2, occurs also in Pali ( Geiger £19 ) and early inscriptions Including that of Asoka. 3. In words suchas per yarnbet, SLY YA, uthara, valli, willari, ascarya and sanidarya ete, [ the first a] becomes €. Trayodaga is also included in this (i.e the foregoing list of words) In other cases | the change of @ into € ] may be learnt from the usage. Notes: See Vr. 1. 5; Mk. 1.7. The change of @ into ८ as in paryania occurs in Pali ( Geiger, § 27.5) and the Asokan Pkt. too. Sef probably comcs from «#sedya < *sadya from the root sad, to sit, to lie down. Skt. sayvya too seems to go back to Mg. +<. < *sadya; cf. 710८7 from *dyotts. 4. The first a of relara and lavana with syllables da and va respectively, becomes v. But in combination with the syllable yu of maytra and mayukha, the | first | ¢ | in these words ], is optionally changed into o. 85 Vowels 4. 5-11 Notes: See Vr. I. 6-8 ; Mk. I. 8,9, 11. 42८ 111 lavana, becomes © in Pali too ( Geiger § 26. 2 ) and ay in maytura becomes a and gets contracted with 7% in Pali too ( Geiger § 27. 8 ). 2. In words caturthi and caturdas, the | first |a and the syllable é combine into ^ [ optionally |, In words of the padma group, the | first | « becomes always o when there is no anaptyxis. The | syllable | १८/" of the word nirjhara becomes ० optionally. Notes: See Vr. 1.9; Mk. I. 12. 6-7. The first ^ of arpila, srasti, vahitra, and paksma optionally becomes vo, and in case of aranya it drops. The @ of the yatha group, is optinally changed into a. These are yatha, tatha, camara, tdlarruta, praslara, marjara, kumarika, prahara, halahala, haliku, uwlkhata, davayni, marala, tala, samsthapita, prakrta, catu, tana. Notes: See Vr. I. 4, 10; Mk. J. 6, 18. 8. The @ of the sada@ group, ५. ८ sada, yada and tada, always becomes 7, but in case of the first @ of sa@limali and matra this change is optional. The {£ of the words of the pinda group 2, ९. (१411, visnn, dharmilla, stadira, and buulu, becomes optionally ८. Notes: See Vr. I. 11, 12; Mk. I. 14, 15. The forms saz, jai and ८८८ probably go back respectively to forms *#sa@z, yad7 and #८ ८2८7. 9. J of haridia, prihiv, pathi, and of the syilable é of the word (८८ in the beginning of a word, is always changed into a 4 becomes i in iksu, pravaste, and crsetha, and into and o tn deve when it is preceded by the root /r. Notes: Sec Vr. J. 13-!6; Mk. I. 16-19. 10. J of simha, jihra, aigcasa and visrasa becomes 7; in apida, ida, idrsa and kidrsa, i beeemes ^ but वआ case of 7८/८४ this change of + to ^, 1s optional. Notes: See Vr. J. 17,19; Mk. I. 20, 23; 1V. 5. 11. 0 the words of gabhira group, 1, ५. gabhira, vyacuka, tadanim, idaniun, alika, dvitiya, trtiya, karisa, yrhita and paniya, becomes 2 optionally. Notes: See Vr. 1. 18 ; Mk. 1. 21. Such a reduction of vowels, occurs in Pali also ( Geiger, § 23 ). I, i, 12-13 | Prakrta-kalpataru 86 12, The w of the words of pushara group te. puskara, pustaka, lubdhaka, mukta, (({{1॥10, funda and miunda becomes 0 ; others add kunda and riunda to this group. Notes: See Vr.I. 20; Mk. 1. 24. Such a change occurs in Pali also ( Geiger § 10. 2 ). 13. The first ९ of the words of malta group becomes a. This rule is optional in ease of yuihasthira. In wdikhala, 04 together with the syllable « optionally becames 09, and the syllable ru of purusa always becomes 10. Notes: See Vr. J, 21, 22, 28 ; Mk. I. 26, 25, 28. Purusa becomes purisa in Pali too ( Geiger, ऽ 29). The comm. scems to include in the gana the word 2८2८ instead of 22८272८, and leaves out saukumurya and wpart (sce Bhamaha on Vr. I. 22). Udukkhalam ascribed to Vr. ( I. 2] ) does not occur in Cowell’s ed. which reads in its place w¢luhalam (Cv.l. udukhalam). Our commentator scems to interpret Vr. in a manner different from that of Bhamaha and Vasantaraja. See Nitti. p. 7. 14. In madhika, @ becomes always v, but in vapura, ¢ 18 prescribed by the sages in place of % And in case of faimbala it becomes 03; the $ when it is alone, (2 ^ not preceded hy a consonant ) becomes 77, otherwise it becomes (५. Notes: Sce Vr. 1. 24, 26, 27, 30; Mk. 1. 30. 32, 24, 33, 86. The metre of the first two feet seems to be irregular ( Nitti, p. 7 ). Madhukesu ia probably a wrong reading for madhuke tz. 15-16. But in case of certain words such as tadrée, yadrsi x preceded by a consonant, is changed into +1. But 7 becomes 2 in case of the words of 7st group,i.c. rsi, kepa, dysti, mrganka, grihra, arngard, bhengara. sryala, bhrnga, krpana (१8८१, prthila, 61, krta, 21130, veymbata, krta, akrta, £ 4९140, srsti and kptya. Notes: Sce Vr. 1. 28, 31 ; Mk. I. 37, 84. 17-18. Others add to this /rsit, samrdidhi and prakrtt also. But in case of words of the rt group, the change of $ to w 18 compulsory. This group includes réu, mrdanga nibhrta, prarrtti, pracrt, १111170, prthivi, mrta, vrttainta, vrndadvana, samurta, jamatrka, bhrateka, matrka and 2201114. In case of trksa, vr is changed optionally into vw. 87 Vowels | {. i. 19-24 Note: See Vr. 1. 28, 29; Mk. 1.35, 38. 2 has the same develop- ment in Pali too (Geiger § 12). See Vr. I. 32; Mk. I. 39. Nitti has misanderstood Arstz etc. for vi azye merely indicates that the group ts an Gkrti-gana, 7.€.it may include words according to the good usage ; seo the comm. on it. 19-20, preeeded by a consonant, is changed into १८१ while i osmple । (not so preceded) becomes (६ = पिट « af vedana and Menard, becomes (, That ai always becomes ¢, has been said by the wise. Bat in cease of the words of the daily group, at always becomes "८. ‘Phe laity group includes, daalya, vaatalika, (1110 0 ratdsileha, catlehaha, 1111 catvayya, caadesyaka, vaigiha, sve and cated. Notes: See Vr. J. 33-36. Mk. 1. 89-43. 21. The change of «ai into «4 is optional in ease of diva, bhainiwe, vratlya, cara, (2116-0 and vatitya, At becomes + in ४८८।॥(॥५९ ८८१ as well as in we npagder Notes: See Vr. 1 37-38 ; Mk. 1. 44-45. 99-94 Tn the word dhauya, at becomes i 3 in prakostha, 0 hecomes a,and { changes into c.f always becomes 0, except in words of the saaliacye evoup, where itis always changed into. The osaunadarya eroun includes scuudarya, danrariva, pausa, 11171, haukseyu, hangeyaka, saundite. Tn words of the para eroup, (i becomes त ; but in case of {1111109 it may be etther at or ठ. The panra group includes paura, parse, garda, marna, aweityalea, ksaurita, (कद, 1144167 and ॥ (१1/१6. Notes: Sce Vr. I. 59-41, 44, 42-43; Mk. I. 46-48, 52, 49, ol. Here ends the [ first | Posy on Vowels, consisting of twenty- four flowers, of the Wishing-tree, in the [nstruction of Prakrit. 1, ii. Simple Consonants 1. Simple intervocal ¢, 7, 4, 9, 4,4, py 1/9 and +, are dropped ; so does m of yamuna. [ But | in some cases they are retained. Notes: See Vr. I. 1, 2; Mk. IJ. 1, 2. The commentator’s dictum ( asti sthittr-yalva ete.) seems to be a quotation from a versified Pkt. grammar now lost. 2-3. In the word aarahkata as well as medayala, ’ changes into y. The rule about dropping | simple consonants | extends thus far; y becomes / optionally आ ullariya, -anuiya, and dvitiya ; and[ the words with | ¢, always change it to d, and so also does t of pataha, prauti- and cetusa, but { of prate- व words of pratyna@ group, drops. Notes: See Vr. 11. 8, 17, Mk. II. 4, 16,18,10; Vr. does not mention #@rakata and madagala Nitti’s reconstruction of the stanzas is different. {. Th always changes into dh ; so does ¢ of words such as, Sakata, Seta and ॥ (11८1044. Th of prathama and sithila always becomes dh. ‘The learned say that dh of ausadha and nisacha too always changes into dh. Notes: See Vr. Il. 21,28, 24; Mk. IJ. 21, 19, 27. 5-6. In yarhbhita even when the word does not relate to a woman, t becomes 2; 1 of atrarata also undergoes the same change. 7’ of the words of hivtita group becomes (^ This group includes hirata, saupad, rajata, rb, ततव, susangata, samprata, samskrta, susamyata, samerti, nivrti, samprata, hata and agata, More such words may be gathered from the usage. Notes : See Vr. If. 10, 11, 7 ; Mk. 11. 11, 7. The word gardhita has been wrongly written in the mss. as gavvifa. But as on several occasions they confuse between va and bh, this word has been emended. See v-l.on I. 18; V. 10 etc. The first pada has one hypermetric syllable. RT.’s &tvatad? gana is Vr’s révadt. 7. DB of kabandha changes into p or m, p changes into 2, and so does bh of hkattabha, K of sikara 88 well as ph | in general | becomes /h, but in case of éephalika this change is optional. Simple Consonants | 1. 11. S-14 Notes: See Vr. If. 19. 29, > 29; Mk. IT. 17, 14, 28, 5, 24. According the comm. the change of # into v is optional. This view is available in the text when the present rule ig taken gether with I]. 1 above, about the general Cf. Nitti. to- disappearance of 4, 8. WK of candrika changes into m+ 80 does » Of apida. And ^ of gadyada as well as of dage in nunerals more than ten, becomes 7. Notes: See Vr. 1]. 6, 16, 13, 14 ; Mk. 11. 5, 15, 13. 9. Dot kadambaka, dohadala and pradipta becomes ॥. In words of the haridia group + optionally becomes 1. Th of ankothala is changed into 77, And & and s always become s. Notes: See Vr. I]. 12, 80, 25, 43; Mk. II. 12, 29, 22, 44. 10. | The heridv@ group ineludes | harila, pubrigha, angara, SUA MME ; yuchisthira, (2/1 1"1(.02/1., rirata, carana, math hara, and anguri, Notes: See Vr. 11. 30 ; Mk. as in 9. 11. AWA, th, gh, th and bh always become ॥ ; ह of uaa and such other words also changes into h. The change of aspirates does not take place when they are preceded by an anusvara, or in words hke atharvan, atharma, adhama, ete. Notes: See Vr. If. 27, 44 ; Mk. II. 25, 45. 12. In rasati and bharata, ¢ always changes into h ; the same change occurs for / in cikura and nikasa, vikata, rikala and sphatika as well. The ph of sephalika also becomes h. Notes: Se2 Vr. 11. 9,4;Mk.I1L 9,6. > 13. 2 of chaya meaning ‘beauty’ as well as & of daéga in proper names, will change into h. S of ¢ivasa will be optionally ॥., and 8 of 81152 will become /) preceded by n 1, €. nha. Notes: See Vr. II. 18, 45, 47 : Mk. II. 48, 46, 47. 14. Initial y becomes 7, and w is always changed into १४, but y Of yastr, becomes J, ॥ of ktubja meaning a ‘hunchback’, will change into (0, and i: of kirata in the sense of mleccha, becomes ¢. Notes: See Vr. II. 31, 43, 32, 34, 33 ; Mk. II, 30, 31, 33, 32. P—12 1. 1. 15-16 ; 7. 1-2 | 9 Prakrta-kalpataru 90 15. Some say that 2 of langulauba, lohula and langalara always becomes n. Sibilants in sardra, set and saplaparna change into eh while, jad | of ditnada, dila@ and (1६.11.14. becomes d. Notes: See Vr, [. 40. 41, 35; Mk. IL. 30, 40. 34-35. Cowell in his edition of Vr. wrongly reads doka/a ( made of iron ) as lahala, thouch his mss. DE give the correct form. This inecorreet form appears in the current edition of He.’s grammar too. Mk. (comm. on II. 39 ) however reads this correctly. 16. In manmatha ne becomes £ ; / of words of puritsa group will change into ph. V of ristu: becomes bh. V (lit. in the ६५१५ before the conjunct consonant ) will always be ॥॥ in rikealo, and when ? stands before a conjunct Consonant 1 will be changed into «. Notes: See Vr. LL. 39, 3h; Mk. UL. 3x, 36, 57. For paresa he- coming pharusa in Pkt. see Ns. XVIII. 15. According to Vr. ( 111. 47.) 27742८0 becomes vehbbhalo and nat bdkembhalo as RY. says. See Pischel, ३ 209. भ]. ignores this latter form, but does not mention Vr.'s vebbhalo cither. Here ends the second Posy consisting of sixteen fowers, of the Wishing-tree in the Instruction of Prakrit. I. iii, Conjunct Consonants J. „४, 1 and y, when they «are the second element (lit. helow), and +, /, and r, when they are either the first or the second element, and /, y, ^^ » when they are the first element of a conjunet consonant, disappear, and so do 5, <, and 2 of sarvayna and Mano IN. Notes: See Vr. II]. 1, 2, 3,5; Mk. 111. 2, 3, 1, 5. 2. From smesru and smasana the first & drops and so does sof smara and smera, And m drops from ghasmaru and h from madhyahnaka ; but from vihvula, ॥ drops optionally. / may drop from dr, and pu always drops from vanaspali Notes: See Vr. III. 6, 7, 47,4; Mk. I1I. 7, 8, 63, 4 91 Conjunct Consonants | I. itt, 3-9 3. Mydutra in the sense of ‘a flower’, will have [f7 changed into | / [after the elision of ^]. The st of stanhhia change into ih, and so do sh, sh and its. Sph of sphotiht always changes into hh, and sthanu not in the sense of Siva, will have its sth changed | {0 /॥ |. Notes : See Vr. IIT. 14, 16, 29, 15 ; Pu. IIT. 6 ; Mk. ITI. 39, 17, 87, 18-19. khambho>Beng. khaim ( post) and khandho> Beng. dialectal. Aaudh (shoulder). +. This change | of sh and sh into (॥ | does not. take place in words like wishuipa, tuensha, muska, namaskrt ya, samshyta, tashara ete. Tr and ty become ९, but this change does not always occur, 77. in words of the evifya group and in case of sdtrara and gatrarda ete. Notes: See Vr. TIT. 27; Pa. U1. 2; Mk. 111. 38, 39, 31, 32. ;). (Ch has heen prescribed [as a substitute} for [fly] except in-ease of aithya, and [ch is also, to be substituted | for ée, fs and ps as well. In words of (५) group as पनु] वह 10 sprha, 111 : 1८", and 1६5१4 the conjunct consonants will change into ch. Notes: See Vr. IH. 27, 40,42; Pu. JIP 2, 14; Mk. III. 31, 53 54: miccha>Reng. micha; racchi, *laccha.>Beng. *lach, nach (‘front? as in #ach-ducr, front door ). 6. Laksni, sadehsa, maksita, ete, ulksipta, risa and alsa are included | in this group |. This rule is optional in case of ksana, ksaina, aksi and rrksa. Notes: 920 Vr. 111. 39, 31; 20, TT. 7. 8 ; Mk. 111. 41, 4(), 4. ; macchta>Beng. 210८1. 7. Py and ry are regularly changed into}; such a change will be available in Sayy@ and abhimanyn. Ah is preseribed for dhy and hy, and aiso [ for fs | in praksaritu, And { is preseribed for tO in mgtlih@ and puttaid, Notes: See Vr. II. 27, 2६, 23 ; Pu. 11. 84; Mk. 11. 31, 20, 23, 28 ; ०८100 > 1. 247 (a surname) ; sej/i>Beng. se, mattea> Hindi 21111. 8-9. Tis used for 7t in words other than those included in the Utara croup. “The wise prescribe th for st. The dharta group IS as follows: dha@rla, marta, a@rla, muhurta, carta, I. iii. 10-15 | Prakrta-kalpataru 92 samuarta, samkirtana, vartika, avarta, kirti, vartamana, 1111, vartika(?), hartari. Vynta will have its † as ¢, and th will occur in asthin, and bhiwlipala will take d [for its ^ | Notes: See Vr. III, 24, 22, Mk. ILI. 27, 13. Vr. ITI. 45, 46 ; Mk. III. 65, 16; atthe > Bengali ¢ (seed). 10. Dis substituted for 7d in words like garta, sammarda, gardabha, vitardi, viechardi, kapardaka, and dh is preseribed for rah and ydh in words other than sniydha, govardhana and nirdhana ete. Notes: See Vr. [II. 26, 25, 12,3; Pu. IIL5; Mk. III. 29, 30, 35. Viaddha probably gives rise to Bengali veada (obstinate). 11. Ne of words panrasut and pancadasa as well as mn, ny and jn change into n. So does hn of cthna ; st becomes th except in stamba, P or ( is substituted [ for tim | in 11/14 ॥. Notes: See Vr. III. 2, 44, 33, 34, 13, 48; एप. III. 16, 18: Mk. III. 57, 47, 16, 61. Sanna>OB. sana (hint) ; kattho>NIA. hath, hat (hand). 12. In words imahatmya and ta/a@tmya one always substitutes » [ for ém | and the same 18 substituted for ém = in kuimila also. Sp and sph become ph, but in the place sp sometimes st occurs, Bh replaces [ he | in gojthvika and gahvara. Notes : See Vr. III. 48, 35, 35; Pu. IJ. 12; Mk. III. 60, 61, 48, 50, 62. 13. There occurs + for vy in térya, paryantaka, dhaarya, gantirya, ascarya, saundarya, ete. The learned think that this rule is optional in case of strya, while in words of the caurya group 142 always becomes 7'l. Notes : See Vr. III. 8, 19, 20 ; Mk. III, 21, 22. 14. [The cauryt group includes] cauryam, sauryam, viryam, and ascaryam also is included by some in this group. In paryasta, paryanaka and saukumarya, ry becomes ¢, but the change in paryanka is optional. Notes: See Vr. III. 20, 21 ; Mk. III. 23, 24, Pallanka>Beng palan (eushioned bed). 15. In place of hve, and in words like vaspa, harsapanalka and usnandala in the feminine gender, ॥ occurs. The conjunct 93 Conjunct Consonants | 1. 111. 16-19 consonant sm, sm and Asie change themselves into mh, and su, sn, and ‘sn become nl. Notes: See Vr. [ 39, 32,33; Pu. III. 10, 11 ; Mk. III 52, 46, 4), 11; 18, 66, kihkavano>Beng. kakan (an aggrevate of eighty articles such as cowris) ; Kanha>Aana (Krsna). 10. First elements of the conjunct consonants occurring in Sagha, hema, sGrnga and radia are separated by the vowel a, and this kind of change in Arsu is optional. This rule extends til] the word dear (in 19). Notes : See Vr. ITI 59, 60, 63, 61 ; Pu. JI. 30, 27; Mk. I. 77, 92, 78, 17. The separating vowel is always । in case of 871) ha, 11611. I lest, mula, SVapita, (11"॥/1 । "(1 (९.५ Spars, darha, he rs, Notes: See Vr. II]. 62; Pu. TT. 28, 29 ; Mk, IT]. 77, 80, 81, 82. 18, In case of words of fharya@ group the anaptyxis of conjunct consonants, 1s optional. Tn case of dasarha, his dropped. Anaptyxis sometimes does not occur in case of [the compound | varsa-rajan7-mikham. In sneha the separating vowel is either 2 ora. The same is the ease in svaua. Tn the word (111 the separting vowel is 7, or there is no separation | ait all |. Notes : See Vr. ITT. 64 ; Pu. WL. 381; Mk. TUL. 107, 87, 90, 89. 85. 19. The separating vowel in jy@ is 7, and in pueda it is ८, and is optional, and in words of tana group the separating vowel is ॥, and such is the case व Aagmira, regsman, smara, ghasmara ete. In the word drara either there is the separating vowel ॥, or ¢ or r drops. Notes : See Vr. III. 66. 69 ; Pu. 111. 32; Mk. IIL. 93, 94, 96. Here ends the [third] Posy on Conjunct Consonants consisting of nineteen flowers, of the Wishing-tree in the Instruction of Prakrit. I. iv. Doubling of Consonants. 1. Stops which remain after the elision of an element of conjunct consonants as well as stops which remain under the rule relating to conjunct consonants beginning with / ete, will be doubled. But in case of words of the vida eroup, the consonants may be optionally doubled, and the same 18 the case with the second element of a compound word and with words of the sera group. Notes: See Vr. ITI. 50, 52; Pu. 11}, 21, 23. Mk. I, 69, 71, 16, 75. 9. Words of the ser@ group are as follows: — seva, vara, 11116 (1 eh, CISA, palehea, ASI, dubthita, triecilok ye, daiwa, 01817410, karnikara, sasya, kantahala, Note: See Pu. TI. 22; Vr. and Mk. As in 1. $, Prakrit grammars on the basis of some examples, prescribe also the doubling of the first letter of a word preceded by another word. But the doubling does not take place 1) ease of + and ॥, and after an anusvara and in the substitute of the root / 142. Notes: See Vr. TT. 54, 55, 56 ; Mk. 111, 73, 74 ; sassa ६ but) 11 (1/1 {*//*@ and the like, the same (ie, the preeeding vowel ) remains, and in case of the word pander the ।' may remain. Notes: The difficulty about this passage has been removed by restoring the correct reading. Cf. Nitti. 5. Except in eases of words like durjana the vowel of the prefix uh together with the visarga, becomes lengthened. And in Pkt. dithala would be (( (1.(1/((( 100, duilim or duullaam. Notes: See Mk. I. 29, 31. 1. +, 6-12 | Prakrta-katpataru 9() 6. In Pkt. the word (11, they say, will be rahiram, and aha The visarga after «, in words such as serojaka will hecome ov optionally. Note: See Mk. IV. 6. 7. There will always be ffi in’ place of ॥( immediately after a word, but after an anusvara an elision | of ¢ | 1s desired. And the wise always desire १८ in place of a7? immediately after a word ; but after an anusvdra it will be pe. Notes: See Vr. I. 14; IV. 28, Pu. IV. 5, 3, 4. Mk. I. 17, Vill. 17. Vr. ignores the second part of this rule. 8. UO may replace the prefix ya, and o may optionally be substituted for the prefixes ava वात्‌ aca. And 10 the word Maharastra, v and & may be transposed, and so may be + and a In Varansi. Notes: See Pu. [V. 22. Mk. LV. 33, 31, 56. 9, The same (transposition ) of + and » will take place in case of aren, andin case of @lana, ^ and uw will be optionally transposed. iva of the word malina will be optionally ta, and the dufsina may have dulkhha and daha in place of dakesa, Notes: See Vr. IV. 28, 20, 31, Mk. PV. 55, 58, 63, 10. The word yrha except when it 15 followed by pati hecomes garda, In (21.101 (19 ¢ and hk will be changed into bhaa. In words like /anéeandra, ह is dropped, and in words indicating numerals ¥ 1s dropped together with the letter which follows it. Notes: See Vr. IV, 32, 30 ; Mk. IV, 61, 62, TI, 10, IV, 8. 11. In the word wdéumbara, dis optionally dropped, and the same is the case with ja in bha@jana and with y in kalayasa and husalaya. And v together with a following it, is dropped optionally in words like yavat. Notes: See Vr. TV. 2,3; Mk. IV. 7, 12, 10, 9. 1, The final consonant is dropped. Feminine words ending in consonants except vidyit and tadit have @in place of the con- sonant lost. Feminine words ending in 7, will have 7@ in its place, and the final consonant of /:sudh will be ha, and the final vowel 97 Sandhi | I. v. 18-17 of saral, a. The final of i$ and praurs will be sa and that of apsaras and @yns will be optionally so. Notes : See Vr. 1V. 6,18,7,8; Pu. IV. 12-16; Mk. IV. 13, 14, 15, 16, 17. 13. Words such as prarrs and इना, and words which end In either 2 or s, are masculine, while weblas, preman, gras and dhanuws are neuter. Gunaand loeanet may both be neuter and masculine, and pragud and 4४ ' 1 are used in three genders. Notes: See Vr. JV. 18,193 Pu. 1V. 18, 19; Mk. 1V. 27, 30, 29. 14. Aksi, vagsmi and yarstha ave optionally feminine while Kagmira, seman, suet and words ending in Gian, are always so. The anusvara is dropped always in words such as cimsett, and the vowel in these cases, 15 always lengthened. Notes: See Vr. 1४. 20,16; Pu. 1* 20, 21; Mk. 29, 28. 15. In place of m at the end of a word, there is elways an anusvara, though before a vowel it may be retained ; but in case of words like m@msu the elision of the anusvara, is optional, while प ` samskita and xim/'a, it is compulsory. Notes: See Vr. IV. 16; Pu. lV. 2; Mk. IV. 21, 22, 25,26. The commentator adds that this rule stands modified in metrical passages ( 22/72 kutrapt ertta-bhaiga-bLhayat kriyamano bindur lopyo bhavuti, yalra nasti (८८१62 bhavatt ). 16. An anusvara will be substituted for 2 ”, n,n and m before consonants ; but in cases of words cf the sambhara group the anusvara before consonants included in [the pratyalara} yay (1. € stops and sibilants) will be optionally changed into a nasal of the class of the consonant following it. In Fkt, 7, long 2, é, long 4, ai, au, n, 7, 8, 8, and visarga \h) do not exist. Notes: 86९ Vr. IV. 14,17; Pu. 1४. 2; Mk. 1V. 23, 24. 17. An anusvara is inserted in the words of the vakra group. i-e vakra, pasu, sparsana, daibana, ete. Abstract nouns with दद take d@ in its stead and for tva, ttunam is substituted. Sometimes » of tva is dropped [and ¢ is doubled}. Notes: See Vr. IV. 15; Pu. HI. 24; IV. 28; Mk. IV. 20, 34, 35. I. ४, 18-24 | Prakrta-kalpataru 98° 18. The suffix matup is represented by alu, १८१५ and vanta, and ala, itta and manta too are so used. These in all are six [to express matup| The words like hanumat ete. will however be hanum@ ete., though some will have hanumanta ete. Notes: See Vr- IV. 25; Pu. LV. 29; Mk. LV. 42, 43. 19. Words such as laqjaluka ete, will take in feminine the suffix in; but the form malavai (malavati) is due to the Sanskritie tradition. The suffixes alla or ella are used pleonastically. Sakalya and Mandavya however allow ha in such a case. Notes: See Pu. ] ४. 30. Mk IV. 45, 48, 49. 20. The word /satra forms its feminine with the suffix ini. Sometimes the suffix la is added to words pita, vidyut and hart. Similarly 7 is added to words-of sukha group. In vrnda, ra is added to da. Notes: See Vr. IV. 26; Mk. IV. 50, 54. 21. To indicate connexion the suffix ima or tla 18 used while the suffix wlla is used tu indicate anything belonging to. The suffix ¢ is used in the sense of contempt and pity. The two, maiam and madam are used for the sufix maya(t). Notes: See Vr- IV. 25; Pu. IV. 81, 32; Mk. IV. 47, 46, 51 (comm. ). The example of the £2, in contempt ca” dalao vollahao mama (My wretched lover is a Candala 2.८. 9 person as cruel ) seems to be a quotation. 22. The ancients prescribe avanta here (i. e. in Pkt.) 19 place of frn ; in the sense of habit the wise have always the suffix tra. The suffix ५८४८ (lyap) of the indeclinable perfect participle would be substituted by za, {2222 and ina and also sometimes by ५22 Notes: 898 एप, IV. 23, 27 ; Mk. IV. 40 41, 36, 37. 23, Some authorities according to the teachings of Sakalya and Mandavya prescribe tum in the sense of ktva. Ara is optionally added: to’ words like madhya. This optional addition may’ in practice come under the rule of sandhi. | Notes: See Pu: IV: 24. ; Mk. 1V. 38. 24. Words of the dramsta group, will have irregular forms such ‘as dadha, dhud, enht, nadala, goso, kandottham, mami, piusi, gola. 99 Sandhi | I, v. 25-27 ; vi. 1-2 Notes: See Vr. IV. 38 ; Pu. IV. 34 ; 4, Mk. IV. 64. Katyfyana mentioned 10 the commentary seems to bethe author of the Prikrtamajyari, who says: samskrla-prakriitvena ye na Stddhyantt kevalam| tesam laksyesu ‘sabdanam didhidtiram uimrsyatam// The purport of this dictum is that all desi or deéya words are to be included in the dadhaad? gana. 25-26. Words such as pura, dara, kala, mala, abala, komala, hala, camara, bhala, kala, kamala, kilala tala, akhila, lila, keli, tama@la, sundara, khala, bala, mila, lalasa, hela, kahala, gola, tunga, (40/21, Govinda, Rama, Hari, Hara, vasu, bhima, canda, bhanga, Purari, kava, khara, tarala, sankwa, ९101८, renu, guna, gant, pani, hasa, mandila, mandi, khandt, Varuna, taruna, dhira, sala, deha ete, are to be uttered as in Sanskrit. Notes: See Pu. ITV. 35. This enumeration of tatsama words, is not exhaustive. 27. Words thera ete indicating sthavira ete, are desi words. Onomatopoeic words like jhana-jhana, are also such. Notes : See. Pu. IV. 36. Theva considered to be a desi word, comes from sthavira which is of Indo-Aryan origin. Here ends the [fifth] Posy on Sandhi, consisting of twenty- seven flowers, of the Wishing-tree of Prakrit. J. vi. Declension 1, The dual number is not used here (i. €. in Pkt.) in deciene sion and conjugation, and the fourth case-ending similarly is never used. The plural number is to be used for the dual and the sixth case-ending for the fourth one. Notes: 8९ Pu. ४1. 1, 2; Mk. V. 129, 130, 131, Vr. does not give any rule of about the fourth case-ending and hence it may be assumed ihat in Pkt. it was not altogether absent. In fact, in Bhasa one mects with forms which may ke instances of its use, e.g. bhattidariae (=bhartrdartkayar), Svapna. III. 0. 30. 2. In case of masculine bases in a, the termination for the nominative singular, will be 0 ; the terminations for the accusative I, vi. 8-5 } Prakrta-kalpataru 100 plural is € but terminations of the nominative and accusative plurals are sometimes elided, and thit of the locative and Instrumental singular and the ablative plural are also dropped. In case of the Jvcative singular ¢ becomes the termination, and in cases Of the instrumental singular and genitive plural 2 is always added to the terminations. Before terminations of the genitive singular and plural, as well as the ablative plural, the final vowal of the base is lenethened. Notes: See Vr. ए, 1, 2, 4,9.6,&,11; Pu. V.8, 10; Mk. ४. 1, 3, 4, 10. 14, 5, 12, 13. As has ben pointed out by Nirti, the loss, in Pkt., of case-enlinzs of the ILocative, instrumental, accusative and the ablative singular, is difficult to be accepted. 3. In words ending in vowels, the termination for the instrumental and = locative singular, will always be € and an anusvara will be the termination for all words in the accusative singular. The termination for the instrumental plural is /im and of the ablative singular is da, do and hi, and for the ablative plural, itis always info 810 suuto. Notes: See Vr. V. 12,5, 6, 7, Pu. V. 3-659; Mk. V. 1}, 4, 6, 7, 8, 4, The termination for the genitive singular is ssa and that for the genitive plural is nam. The wise prescribe mmu for the locat:ve singular and sm for the locative plural Words ending in 2 and 7 lengthen their final vowel in the nominative singular and in the instrumeital anol locative plural. The termination for the genitive and ablative singular is always 120. No'es: See Vr. V.8, 9, 10. 4, 18, 14; VI. 60. Pu. V. 16, 21-23. Mk. V. 9, 5, 10, 11, 22, 19. १, Words «nding in ८ and w have their nominative plural with 10, vo and 0, and before vo and o the final vowel may also be a. Before vo and 0 and when the termination of the nominative plural drops the. final vowel is lengthened. Thus six are the forms In the nominative plural e.g. rai, ran, raitv, rain, raavo, tvavo, The instrumental singular has the termination 2@ and the accusative plural 2°, and such is optionally the case with the ablative and genitive singular, Notes: Sce Vr. V. 6. 18, :7, 143 Pu V. 17, 20; Mk. V. 20, 21. 17, 19. The examples given in the commentary ( egzi 101 Declension [ I. vi. 6-10 vane laggai ete.) seemsto be a quotation from some metrical Pkt. grammar like that of Katyayana. 6. Faminine, words ending in short vowels, will have the termination wand ० in the accusative plural, but in the nominative plural the termination may also drop. In the accusative singular the vowel will be shortened and in the instrumental, genitive, ablative and locative singular the termination will be i, ¢ @ and @% without any distinction Notes: See Vr. V. 20, 21, 22, 23 ; Pu. V. 38-41, 43; Mk. V. 24, 29, 26, 27, 28, ¢. But in three cases-endings beginning with the genitive singular ( 22.८5 ) 1, €, in the ablative, the genitive and the locative singular, the termination will be for words ending in 2. not « and ठ but only e¢and 1, It has been said that the locative plural will have an anusvara and there will be 7m in case of the nominative and accusative plural. The vowel before these terminations will be lengthened. Notes: See Vr. V. 25, 26,30; Pu. V. 36, 37, 42; Mk. V. 29, 31, 32. This stanza is differently translated by Nitti. Her emendation does not seem to be accep'able. 8. According to some [ grammarians | the termination 71, is desired in the nominative and accusative plural [ in neuter | In the vocitive case there will be neither the anusvara nor the lengthening [of the final i and 1]. The feminine bases ending in 2) the wise say, become | in the vocative case | € 3 and those ending in ४ and #, are always shortened, Notes: Sce Vr. V. 27, 28, 29; Pu. V. 45-48; Mk. V. 33, 34, 85, 37. 9. In their declension feminine nouns i or @, may take indiscriminately {+] before the terminations. Pronouns kim, vad and tad however take @ ori except in the nominative singular. But in certain places i.e. in words of the priy@ group, there will be a, and in words like m@nacmsini there will always be 7. Notes: See Vr. V. 24; Mk V. 30. 10. The r of words ending in 7 will in declension be Gra. But before the terminations of the locative and the instrumental 4. vi, 11-15 | Prakrta-kalpataru 102 ‘singular, nominative and accusative plural, and the genitive singular if may be 2, Words like bhratr, jamalr, pitr will have ara {in stead of r |. But in the nominative and the vocative singular they may have 2 as the termination. Notes: 8५८ Vr. V. 1,33; Pu. V. 21-27 ; Mk. V. 38, 40, 39, 4}. 11. In declension the word १८२८ always changes ¢ into ठ and the same 18 the case with yal, nanaudy and duhity. The word 7ajan has ठ and ० [ as terminations | in the nominative singular, n@ in the instrumental singular, 29 in the nominative and accusative plural and the genitive singular, and nam in the accusative singular as well as in the genitive plural. Notes: Sce Vr. V. 32 ; Pu. V. 33-353; Mk. V. 42, 43, 44, 46, 45. Pischel, §399. 12. Inthe voeative case singular one may have an anusvara. Before no of the nominative and accusative plural and nam of the genitive plural there will be an @ Na is optionally doubled in the instrumental and genitive singular, and in that case ja is dropped ; but when the doubling does not occur, £ always comes [in place of ja}. Notes: Sce Vr. V. 37, 39, 33, 49, 41; Mk. V. 51, 49, 46-47, 48. 13. द} may also be declined like a word ending in ५, Words ending in av are to be declined like va@jan except for ४ and doubling of na. In the masculine gender an may be changed into ana. In this case one will have appan in place of Gtman, Notes: See Vr V. 45; Mk. V. 50, 53. 14. Words known as the sat, drop their terminations for the nominative and accusative singular; but there will be no @ or 6 in the declension and sas will be chaa, In the feminine gender s78 will be cha before the terminations of the instrumental and locative But panca and such other words will take @ in these cases before their terminations, Notes: See Mk V. 125, 128, 124. Vr.is silent on this rule. The term sat means words ending in s, 2 and -a¢z. See Panini 1, 1. 24-25. Nitti understands this differently. 15. Words of sarva group ie. pronouns will take e in the nominative plural and mmi, ttha and ssim in the locative singular, 103 Declension | 1. vi. 16-19 Kim, yat tad, idam, etad will take in@ as the termination in the instrumental singular, esstm in the genitive plural and @sa in the genitive singular. Nites: See Vr. छ. V.6,5; Pu. छ, 45, 51-53, 57. Mk. V. 55, 56, 57. 58. 59. 16 ‘The ablative singular termination of ८८ ete, will be do or fo, {1110 genitive singular termination in feminine, Is 8s@ and se, In the locative singular it is -/'/m and when the sense of time is implied the termination is also @ a, ake or ta. The termination for the ablative singular of fad may also be 0, and in the instrumental plural, and the instrumental and genitive singular na may be substituted for tad, Notes: Sce Vr. VI. 7, 9 10, 5, 12,16,6; Pu. V. 50, 55-56 ; Mk. V. 63, 60, 61, 62, 65, 68. 17. In the genitive plural [of the prononn tad] one may have the forms sim, nvm, and in the ablative and genitive singular of the feminine the form is 5. Aim becomes /a in the these cases (i.e.in the ablative and genitive singular). In the nominative and accusative singular neuter [of kim] one has always kim, (for the pronoun kin) and wdam and inam for the pronoun iam. Notes: See Vr. VI. 7,6,14; Pu. V. 58, 60, 67.80; Mk, छ. 67, 66, 69, 74. 18. Jdam will also be ima before the case terminations, and it may be @ before terminations ssim and ssa, and in the locative singular the form will be tha. In the masculine nominative | singular it will have two forms, and in the feminine [the two forms | will be] iam, and 2 [added to ima]. There should be no ttha. in locative singular. Ztad becomeslin the nominative singular] also eso [besides the usual form esa}. Notes: Seo Vr. प, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19; Pu. V. 59. 64-96. Mk. $. 70, 71, 72, 73, 78. Evidently due to corrupt reading Nitti finds it- difficult to. interpret-thisrule 19: The accusative and instrumental singular of the pronoun etad may be enam and innam, to is the termination of the ablative singular before which, as before ttha [in the locative singular), fa of etad is dropped. 7 व्व and etad in maseuline and I. vi. 20-23 | Prakrta-kalpataru 104 feminine change ta into sa. The pronoun adas may be aha in the nominative singular, but it becomes az before all terminations. Notes : See Vr. VI. 18, 20, 22, 21; Pu. V. 70. 71,72; Mk. V. 75, 76, 77, 78, 79, 82. An interesting quotation by the commentator, 18 as follows: Laksya’ nurodhat tha kasttd aha ‘lakkhuyjae esa gaa 222755८ ' / syad eladah strivisave’ p21 esa natlan matam Prikrla-sasananim // 111 this conpexion some writers on tl.e basis of the example lakhhiyjae esa gaa (41554, (Hari’s mace is being scen ) suid that from the base efad one can also lave ८८ in the (nominative singular ) feminine. This view however 18 not aceepted by the grammars of Ukt. 20. Before terminations, fri and drt will respectively be {7 and du, but in the nominative and accusative plural, tt will be {11101 {४४ will have four forms such as ve, donni, vinnt and venn. Notes; See Vr. VI. 54, 55, 56, 57 ; Pu. V, 79, 80 ; Mk. V. 113, 115,116. The ditfculty about the interpretation of the rule is gone after its emendatiun. 91. The wise say that in these two cases some admits in Pkt. (in the nominative and accusative) four forms for catuz, such as cattaro, caturo, catt&ri and catlart. Notes: See Vr. V1. 58; Pu. V. 81; Mk. V. 119, Vr. knows only ८4८८272, ८५८८2. Mk. adds to them callara, cattare. Pisehe] recognizes only the first two ( see § 4:9 ). 22. The three words denoting numbers (two, three and four) wil] have the termination nn1m in the genitive. These will be equally used in the three genders. J of dvi in the first part of a compound will be ८ or 0- Words bhavat and bhagavat will have @ as the termination of the nominative singular. Notes: See Vr. VI. 59; Pu. V. 82 ; Mk. V. 121, 117, 118. 23. In the vocative singular these two words (lit. here) will have an anusvara as the termination, and in the instrumental singular, nominative and accusative plural, the termination will be da, and in the ablative and the genitive singular and it will be do. According to the teaching of Sakalya and Mandaya these are also included in the Pkt. grammars | Notes: See Mk. V. 52. Nitti’s emendation is different. 105 Declension | I. vi. 24-30 24. From now on, [the rules given], will relate to words and not to any termination. In the nominative singular the pronoun of the second person will be éwm and twimam, and in the nominative plural it will be twujjhe, tumhe and tumbhe, and in the accusative singular it will be the three, tam, tum and tumam. | Notes: See Vr. VI. 25-28; Pu. V. 73, 74; Mk. V. 81, 83, 82. 25. In the accusative plural it will be, tujjhe, umhe and vo. But according to Sikalya and Mandavya it will be tumbhe also. In the instrumental singular it will be tai, tr, de, tumae, tuma@t, fa, tums the seven different forms. | Notes: See Vr. VI. 29, 30, 32, 33 ; Mk. V. 84, 85, 86. 26. In the instrumental plural one uses (१८10८1५1, tumheha, bumihelt, turchehi, tucchehim. In the ablative singular there are seven forms, tatto, tumadlo, tuma, taitto, to, tumadu tumahi. Notes: See Mk. V. 87, 88 27. In the ablative plural the terminations /Ainto and sunto are added to tumbha, tuccha and tujjha, of which three the final vowel 15 lengthened. Inthe genitive singular there are seven forms : tujjham, tiam, te, tuba, tujjha, de and tuham. Notes: Cf. Vr. VI. 36; See Mk. V. 79, 91, 92. 28. In the genitive plural of the pronoun of the second person there will be thirteen forms : tumbhana, lujjhana, tumbha, tujjaha, twumhana, tucchant (each of these ) with or without an anusvara, and vo, Notes: See Vr. VI. 37; Mk. V. 93. 29. In the locative singular the form according to Pkt. grammarians will be ftumammi, tumae, tume, tae and tai. In the locative plural the forms will be ¢ujjhesu, tumhesu and tumbhesw with or without a final anusvara Notes: 8०९ Vr. VI. 38, 39 ; Mk. V. 94, 95. 30. The good people say that the pronoun of the first person in the nominative singular will be akaam, ham, ahammiand 04010. In the nominative plural it will bo amhe and in the P—14 L. vi. 31-35 | Prakrta-kalpatari 106 accusative singular, mam, mam, ahammi, and nam the five forms in all. Notes: See Vr. VI, 40-42 :Mk. V. 97, 101, 98-100. 31 In the accusative plural there will be amhe and 209 in the instrumental singular, me, mae, maz, no and mamat. In the instru- mental plural they have amhehim and amhehim. These are the opinions of the wise. Notes: See Vr. VI. 43-46 ; Mk. V. 102, 103, 104, 105, 32. In the ablative singular there will be mam@lo, mamadu, matto, maitto, mahi, the five forms. The termination of the ablative plural will be Aimfo and 5111110 added to amha_ its first element. Notes: See Vr. VI. 48, 49 ; Mk. V. 106, 107. 33. [he wise prescribe the four forms of the genitive singular such as maha, majiha, ime and mama, Tn the genitive plural the wise speak of forms like, amhana, amhona amho and na. Notes: See Vr. VI. 50, 51; Mk. V. 109, 110. 34. In the loeative singular there are two forms : mamssim, munammt and 111 the loeative plural amhesu, and amhosu. In the use of these two [pronouns] there will be similarity in all the three genders. Sometimes terminations drop from them due to special causes. Notes: See Vr. VI. 52,53; Mk. V. 111, 112. The new + reconstruction of the passage removes the difficulty of inter. preting it. Cf. Nitti. 35. Sometimes the cases are transposed in use, as some learned persons will say for wvilocanabhyam piha Krenartpam, mloanesim piva Kanhartivam (Drink the beauty of Krsna with the two eyes). Notes: See Mk. V. 133. Here ends the [sixth] Posy on Declension, consisting of thirty- five ftowers, of the Wishing-tree in the Instruction of Prakrit. 1. vii. Conjugation 1. The roots which are known here (i. €. in Skt.) as ending in consonants, will be changed in Pkt. to roots ending in a. To these, the terminations of voices [ active and middle] will be added indiscriminately (lit. without regular order ) Notes: Sce Pu, VI. 1; Mk. VI. 2. 2. Instead of ta and tt there will be [respectively] ए and ^, and for thas and si there will be st and se. But these two terminations are not to be used except with verbs ending in a. And for iéand mip there will always be a. Notes: See Vr. VIL. 1-3,5; Pu. VI. 2,4,7; Mk. VI. 4. Nitti translates it differently. 8. The termination of the third person plural is १८ ; 4a and ittha 816 terminations the second person, while am, mo and ma. are those of the first person. The root as will drop its @ in the second person singular. Notes: Seo: Vr VII. 4,6; Pu. VI. 3, 5,8; Mk. VI. 8, 11. +. The «a of the root as will drop before the terminations mi, mo, mt and ma. In all these cases ॥ will be inserted in them. The a or 117 will be substituted for ya of the passive voice. But these will not be used with a verb ending in a double consonant, or with the root ॥१ preceded by anu. | Notes: See Vr. VII. 7, 8, 9; एण. VI. 33; Mk. VI. 12, 10, 173. 5. ‰( and mana will be the terminations of present participles 10 the active and middle voices. The feminine of nta will take 2 and that of m@na,i [in addition to) @ Hi and ssa will come before the terminations of the periphrastic future, the optative mood, the future tense and the conditional. Ssa_ is not employed after roots ending in @. Notes: See Vr. VII. 10-12; Pu. VI. 34, 87,18 Mk. VI. 17, 20-22. 6. In the first person of the future tense one employs the infix h@ and ssa, and in the first person singular the termina- I. vii. 7-11 | Prakrta-kalpataru 108 tions may also be ssam. And for the first person the termination will be also hiss@ and 11117. In the future ete. ( 1, €. the optative and the simple future also ) Ai and ssa will be preceded by i, according to many [grammarians]. Notes: See Vr. VII, 18-15; Pu VI. 14, 15.16, 17; Mk. VI. 24-26. 7. The roots Ay, d@, Su, vac, rud, gam, dr, mue and preks in the future tense will be kaha, daha, soccha, voccha, roccha and gaccha ete. Notes: See Vr. VII. 16; Pu. VI. 19, 20 : Mk. VI. 28, 29. 8. Siu ete. keep the same form in the future of all persons, but inthis case the anusvara drops, and the insertion of hi is optional. The three terminations of the third, second and the first persons in the imperative, are respectively 1, si and mw in the active and middle voices. Notes: Sve Vr. 17, 18 ; Pu. VI. 18. 22 Mk. VI. 30, 81. 9. In the second person singular [ of the imperative mood | the termination fz will be used after the monosyllabic roots in the active and middle voices. Sometimes the termination may drop and then ^ will replace it. The termination of the imperative plural will be 1106, ha and mo. But in the future not relating to the present day, one may employ terminations like jja and )/2. ` Notes: See Vr. VII. 19. 20; Pu. VI. 23, 28; Mk. VI. 37, 33-35. 10. Before these suffixes there will be e¢ in the present putential etc. In the imperative mood and in the present tense one uses in the three persons jjo and jjahi in the future tense ete. But in the conjugation in the future tense, of roots with many vowels, 11० and 1/ 2/४ are not used Notes: See Vr. VII. 21-22; Pu. VI. 29; Mk. VI. 35-36 11. One may use these two substitutes jja and 112, for indicating the conditional in case of the roots which are not mano- syllablic. Jhtis the suffix that forms the future in the passive voice in the three persons. Notes; See Vr. VII. 92; Pu. VI. 29; Mk. VI. 39. 109 Conjugation | 1. vii. 12-15 12. Ja is used as a termination in all three persons to indic- ate the conditional and the past tense of the type of the imperfect, the 8011151, and the perfect. But in case of the monosyllabic roots hia will be the termination. One may however use these past forms in the sense of the present. Notes: See Vr. VII, 23-24; Pu. VI. 30: Mk. VI. 49-42. 14. In all the past tenses of the verb «as, one may have ahost and @st. Fis the causative suffix and before it the first a of of the root will be lengthend. Butf{ in the causative | some authorities prescribe the termination 2/९. Notes: See Vr. VII. 25-27,2)3; Pu. VE 31, 40, 29; Mk. VI. 15, 45, 44. 14. In the passive of the causative, and in तट [१51 participle, the indeclinable perfect participle and the infinitive | of the same | the suffix will wri, and not € or ave. But according to Sakalya and Mandavya e or ८ may optionally be used in such cases. Notes: See Vr. VII. 28; Pu. VI. 42 ;Cf. Mk. VI. 7. 15. In the first person singular of the present tense, there will be @ after the a [ of the root |. And a will optionally come before the congugational terminations wi and 111 (lit. before those already mentioned). Let [ this | flower (i. ५. the stanza ) be clear to the wise { without any commentary | Notes : See Vr. VII, 30-33 ; Pu. VI. 11, 12, 43, 44 ; Cf. Mk. VIL 7. Here ends (€ [ seventh | Posy on Conjugation, consisting of fifteen flowers, of the Wishing-tree in the Instruction of Prakrit. J. viii. Substitution of Roots 1. In all tenses and moods 0/7 will be ho or ha. Preceded by pra ete, it will be bhava, and there will be, besides, the form Cuppthava ( dusprabhava, Skt.) and inthe = past participle (kta), it will be hw. But after pradus, Geir, sam and ud, it will not change. And tvar will always change to turara, and in the past participle it will be fra. Notes: Sce Vr. VIII. 1-5: Pu. VII. I, 2. Mk. VII. 1-4, 6, 7. < Gharna will be gholt as well as (1110470, and aud will be nolla, and pata will be phalu, while rrs, Irs, mrs and hys will change ए into ari | and the resultant forms will be variss karis, maris and haris | Notes : See Vr. VIII. 6, 7, 10, 11; Pu. VI. 4, 19 ; Mk. VII. 8, 9, 1}, 53, 54. /ghola occurs in Beng. ghof ( buttermilk ) and ghola (turbid ). Grierson secins to equate pata, and pada of Vr. ( VIII. 10). 3. When not preceded by १ prefix, sar will be bara or sumara ; and according to some authorities, when preceded by vi it will be rissava and 74.47. And roots ending in r will end in ava. Notes : See Vr. VIIT. 18; Pu. VI. 20, Mk. VII. 14, 16, 54. 4. Ay will change also to kuna. But in the gerundive adjective (tfavya) infinitive (tumun) and indeclinable perfect participle, (/éva@) and in the past and future tenses it will be ‘a while in the past participle it will be ka. Grah will be genha and hinna, but before gerundive adjective infinitive and indeclinable perfect participle, it may be ghe. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 13, 17, 15 16; 1. 27, Pn. VII. 5, 6, 8, 7; Mk. VII. 112 114, 96, 97 ; I. 36; for Atmna Mk. and Pu. have hinda. 5. «१0 will change into jambhaa, but according to Katyayana it will be jambha, and according to the wise, the rules of Prakrit do not permit these substitutes when the root is preceded by a prefix. Notes: See Vr. VIII, 14; Mk. VII. 32, 33, Katyayana mentioned in the text seems to be the author of the PM. iti | Substitution of Roots [ 1. viii. 6-12 6. Vyadh will change to viddha and ni-sal to ni-majja and 172 to 212८ and muna, Ud-dham will be uddhama, and gras, ghisa and ct, cina. Notes See Vr. VIII. 23, 32,29; Pu. VII.13; Mk. VII. 13, 41 42, 35 ; for ana weread muna as suggested by Grierson, because an@ meaning ‘to know’ does not oecur in the PSM. 7. Bhi will be bha@ and biha, and the causative form of this will be bhasa as well as 00450, and bhisa. Dha@ after sradh will he daha, and mantra will be hisa (2) and trp, thippa. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 17, 33, 22; Pu. VII. 16; Mk. VII. 29, 30, 37, 12. 8 Gaha after ava will be vaha, and kasa, likewise, after ava will be vasa if it relates to any evil sound ; and according to some, these two roots after ava may be r@va 100 ; kré will be kina and after vi it will become fhe. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 34, 35, 30, 31; Pu. VII 14; Mk. VII. 49, 38, 39. 9 Stha, dhya@ and y@ will respectively be tha@a, jhaa and gat. But in the singular number of these rootsin the potential mood etc., in the present and the future tenses they will always change respectively into tha, jha and g@. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 25, 26; Pu. VII. 22, 25. 10. Ahad and dhav will respectively be kh@ and dha in cases mentioned. [ But they may have forms in which ] vowels are retained after the elimination of consonants M@ after the prefix nir will be mana, and pada after the nir will be vala, Notes: See Vr. VIII. 27, 36 ; Mk. VII. 59, 100, 26, 27, 25. 11. Rud will be ruva as well as rua and rova. Kei will be 14/10, and pa, pita, and ghat, gatta and gadha. TJs will be maha and rabha will be dhava. Notes: See Vr. भ. 42, 37; Mk. VII. 80, 115. 12, Ad will be cakkha, and rudh, rundha ahd rumbha For kan indicating the cries of an animal (in distress) the root okkhana is to be used $ and the wise alwys prescribe a long vowel in case of rus, ६1८9, pus and dus. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 49, 46; Mk. VII. 152, 69, 83. I, viii. 15-18 | Prakrta-katpataru | 112 13. Da, 712 ni and di will, in their conjugation, have ८ for a, and 1 of jalpa will change to # The final consonants will always, be da in roots ptt and sad, and in kvath and vests they will be dha. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 24. 51, 39,40; Pu. VIL. 12, 11; Mk. — VII. 19, 74, 70, 71. 14. The tha of atha will be h, and according to Sakalya chid and bhid meaning ‘piercing’ will take wéa for da, and there will be doubling in ease of roots like Sah, and (7/८ will have dha and vest will take lla after sam and wid. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 38, 52, 44, 4 ; Pu. VII. 11; Mk. VII. 66, 84, 75, 72. 15. Nrt and vray will have cea, and bith and yudh, qyha and so will be dh in case of sudh, yrdh and sidh. There will be an optional doubling | of the second consonant | in case of roots of the gum group. ‘These are gam, sam, vam, bhan and sphut. Notes: See Vr. VILL. 47,48; Pu. VII. 29; Mk. VII. 79, 77. 16... The same rule [of doubling] is prescribed by the wise for mil after pra ete, and for hav, khan, cal, vae and vad. Of these, han, and than will change the » into m, and cal and vac their final sound to ५, vad its ¢@ toc. Besides these the first vowel of vac and rad will change to 0. And the final consonant of the hu group will elide before the indeclinable perfect participle, gerundive adjective and infinitive. Notes: See Vr. VIII.56; Pu. VII. 31; Mk. VII. 87, 90. 93, 92, 91, 89. 17. The final consonant, will be doubled and the first vowel will be changed to ० iu case of the roots of the (ष्णु group ; because these are included in the puskara and the sev@ groups. Bhuj, ११८८८ and mue will, therefore change their wu to 0, and the root da will take ma or mm after it. Notes: See Vr. VIIJ. 55, 8 ; Mk. VII. 102, 10. 18. [ The roots ] ji, tu, hu, éru, and dhu will take na and shorten the vowel ; and jaa may be substituted for ji, and dhua and 113 Substitution of Roots [ I. viii, 19-24 dhuva for dhit, and tuva for tz But before the indeclinable perfect participle ete. (i. ९. ktva, tavye and tumun) li will be lave and &ril, so. Notes : See Vr. VILL. 56, 9 Pu. VI. LD; 26 j Mk. # 1}. 87, 90, 93, 92, 91, 89. 19. [ In case of roots mentioned above | ८५५४ will also be added to them in the passive voice, and vera will be optional for dhu ete. But before the nisth@ terminations (ktu and ktavutu) they will remain unchanged except for the shortening of their long vowels. Ji will be jippu [ in the passive voice | Notes: See Vr. VIIL 57 ; Mk. VII. 95, 94. 20, [ In the passive voice ] (wh will be changed to dubbnu, rah {0 vabbha and lik to libbha. And kr and hr will respectively be kira and hira, and jna will be narra and 14/12. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 59.60; Pu. VIL. 30; Mk. VII. 177, 174, 181. 91. (rah will be yheppa, ghejja and gejha, Forms such as dinna when ‘lca ete., is added to them, conform to no gramma- ticalrule, Dinnais formed from da, runna from rud, sukkha from gus, and mulka from muec. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 62 ; Pu. VII. 32 ; Mk. VII. 178, 183. 22. Inconjugation, sambha will be substituted for tals, and 2/0 for krudh. Visira will be substituted for AAad, but in the causative the substitute [ for the same | will be vilabha. The substitute for tras will be vajia, and for ruh it will be cappe. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 64; Mk. VII. 48, 130, 126, 63, 197. 93, Luha or pusa will be substituted for mj, and cvuddo and khuppa for mas). Dyé will have five substitutes as follows : avakkha, pulaa, niaccha, pula and ५८. Notes; See Vr. VII] 67, 68, 69; Pu. VIL. 17, 18; Mk. VII. ४6, 98, 105. 24. In the passive voice dé will be disa, and in the causative, it will be dams and darisa, But in the simple passive P—15 I, viii. 25-31 ] Prakrta-kalpatarn 114 voice (rs will be dava. Vowels [of the root in conjugation] may sometimes change to @. Notes: See Mk. VII. 178, 106, 10}. 25. Sak will be changed to tue, tira or tira, and mad to mala, Plus will be changed to bhisa and khuppa, and chutta and chakka will be substituted for fy. Notes: See Vr. VIII. 70, 50; Mk. VII 55, 73, 46, 104. 26. «fs and krudh will change respectively to accha and dhukka. Srp will be sappa and = (द and ksi, (10111110 and khundu. Toda, tuda, tutte and thodi will be the substitutes for tind. Notes: See Mk. VII, 116, 22, 47, 52, 64. 27, ‘The wise say that +ay will be reha, Ars will be faddha, and ra@/h, rautlha., Besides these they have prescribed that (vid will be fila, khac will be fhaura, and skhala will be (तत and ८ huada. Notes: See Mk. VII. 103, 76, 99, 127. 28. (rhra will be ytyhra, ivt will be nolla and pella, and svap will be sia, so and soa, Sah before turyu, tumun and kta, will optionally be sodha, and vah too before these will be vvdha. Notes: See Mk. VII. 43, 58, 50. 29. Alukkha and phamsa will be substituted for 5015, and the other two substitutes for the same are chiva and chua. But in the passive voice and in the past perfect participle ( kta ) substitutes for the same are chippa, chikka, chitta and chiva, Notes: See Mk. VIT. 144, 169, 176, 183, 30. Stu will be thuna and thuva, kram will be phulla and cappt. But the latter root (i. e. /ram) after @ will be substituted by anew and volla, and mi) after the prefix sam will be galu. Notes : See Mk. VII. 65, 135, 134. 31. Vi-ghat will be vijjha, and the causative of ad-ghat will be ogyha ; @jna will always be ahisaha and @ruh will be valagga, cumma and allidha, and vi-enam will be vana. Notes : See Mk. VII, 109, 110, 186. The commentary is silent on ahtsaha. 115 Substitution of Roots [ I. viii. 32-40 32. Ud-nam in the causative, will be wllala, vunja, gula and wlthingha, and bhun) after ni and abhi, respectively, aranja and vem, and after pari it ( bhany ) will be an). Notes: Sce Mk. VII. 156, 142. 33. Utehus will be whhosa, and timya will be tilasa and tivlava, and pra-unchs will be pusa, Luncha and puncha, and ava-yrt will be oalla. Notes: See Mk. VII. 148, 62, 119. 34. Ud-vrt will be wllat or ovatta, and 1711-1; 8150 will optionally have these two substitutes. Pavri-as will be pallaitha, and hija, and G-gain will be ajjatha and ahamma. Notes: See Mk. VII. 120, 119, 121, 140. 35. Sthaya will be otthaha, chade will be ntma; pra-sphuta will be papphodt and lap will be la@ampa, l@lappa, lalambha and lalamha, Notes: See Mk, VII. 45, 141, 147, 129. 86. ('t-str will be otthalla and otthara ; and ri-str will be vihallu, Cirn will he mamitra and sometimes cra while vielay will be vilagga. Notes: Sce Mk. VII. 163, 165, 159, 37. Cur will be phalilla, part-i will be cala and chula, while el-ru will be lihalla, ri-tas, will be visatta, vosatla and parlewls will be clala. Notes: See Mk. VII. 122, 170, 150. 39. (tena will be okkhw; upt-grah will be vasaa, las will be Zhusa, vlelu will be pahoda gun) ella and parthatta, Notes: See Mk. VII. 143, 145, 125. 89. Katha will be s@ha and in the causative it will he nivaryjd, Besides these two, pusa will be also, substituted for it and éya will be tukihala. Notes: See Mk. VII. 131, 160. 40. Oud (८ ?) will be cudu, pra-sr will be paalla, vygaha and uggaha ; tad willbe (4.८. Vier in the causative will be tina and wresaha will be nisudha. Notes: See Mk. VIL. 168, 171, 111, 118. T. vill. 41-42 ; ix. 1-5] = Prikrta-kalpatarn 116 41. Pratiepali will be viriha and viramala; pid in the causative, will be pila, is will be asa, and prati-ts will be oggaha. Notes : See Mk. VII. 158, 182. 42. Besides these there are other alternative forms of these roots, according to Sakalya and Mandavya, and similarly there are forms according to Katyayana. These are to be learnt from the usage. Here ends the[ eighth ] Posy on the Tenses and Moods, of the Wishing- tree [ in the Instruction | of Prakrit. I. ix. Particles 1. Now the rules regarding the particles are given here. Hum is used to express giving, questioning, and ascertaining. Hiim is used to express sending back, surprise and suggestion. O also is to express suggestion, suffering and doubt. Notes: Sce Vr. 1X. 1, 2,4; Mk. VIII. 1. 2, Ccea and ८८१५ are both used in affirming with certainty. Tn questioning ‘ine and /isa are used. 41770 15 used in reflection and indication of distress, and /im in questioning, in ascertaining and in blaming. Notes: See Vr. IX. 9, 10 ; Pu. VII. 2; Mk. VIII. 19, 16, 28. 3. In addressing anyone the two particles ८ and rale are used. Al@hi is used in stopping anything. In addressing anyone ré 18 | also | used, and in a quarrel are is used and hire is used in calling anyone loudly. Notes: See Vr. IX. 12. 11, 15 ; Mk. VIII. 26, 3. 4. Thi is used in censuring, ha in gricf and nv as an expletive or in the sense of Skt. 7@. Va, ceva and v@ are used in the sense of १५८८५. Hare is used in insulting, and ninam in the sense of certainty. Notes: See Vr, IX. 12, 11, 15. 5. Khkhu and hu are used in reflecting, and also in certitude and doubt. Navara and naviri are in the sense of only and 117 Particles | T. ix. 6-10 immediately after. ra, kira and 4140 are used when something is narrated with emphasis. 4 ८८ is used in the sense of api, but "^ and tum are used in reflexion. Notes : See Vr. IX. 14,16; Pu. VIII. 9; Mk. VIII. 2. 12, 18, 15, 17, 6. 6. J, je, 7@ 816 used as expletives to complete verses, pira, miva, and viva are used by the learned for 1८4. Az is used to introduce a talk, or to accost anyone. 4 is to indicate negation and with regard to wearing ornaments a/am may be used. Notes : See. Vr. IX. 6,7, 8.5; Pu. VIII. 3, 6, 7. Mk. VIII. 31, 14. 7. To express quickness jhatti and jhatto will be used, and to express slowly saniam; aho and «mho are used to express remoarse, and 120 is used to express preventing anything. Notes: See Vr. IX. 16, 12; Pu. VIII. 4, 8. Mk. VII. 97. 8. Ho and bho are used in calling any one; fhe, ho and hittham are used to indicate that one is ashamed or afraid. To indicate @hinuekhya ( 1. a. being in the direction of some object ) huttha is used, and the word to express parauniukha (one who has turned his face ) purahuttha, Notes : See Vr. (W). 32, 36. 0, Az and aecha ane used in addressing anyone. T'amsa ts in the sense of oblique (14/14), manam in the sense of littie (manak) and meet in the sense of again (prada). Notes: See Vr. (W). 30, 37, 38; Cf. Pu. VIII. 11. 10. Hnhim is used to indicate the Immediate present and Gina 15 used in anger, and to indicate any indefinite time 11112 and laha@ are used. Notes: See Vr. CW). 37 29, 40 ; Pu. VIII 10. Here ends the ninth Posy on Particles, consisting of ten flowers, in the Wishing-tree of Prakrit. Here ends the First Branch consisting of ten Posies, of the Wishing-tree in the Instruction of Prakrit, written by Sri-Rama-Sarman Tarkavagisa-Bhattacarya. IJ. 1, Sauraseni 1, {The Rules treating ] the Sauraseni [ dialect ] are now being composed. ‘The language treated before (i. e. Maharastri) is indeed its basis. In words such as vetasa, anyara, and the like, the first @ does not become 7, nor does it change to o in words like caturthi and radara ete, ( Cf. 1. i, 2, 5 and 4 ). Notes: See Vr. XII. 2,32; Pu. IX. 1, 2, 3,13; Mk. IX. 1, 2. 2. In words yatha@ ete, the final @ is sometimes shortened Except in the word /rimsuka, the 7 in the words pinda ete, does not become ९, In the words tunda, vu sometimes become ०, Udikhala does not become okhhala, nor does the long 7 10 hidvsa and idrsa become € ( Cf. I. i, 6, 7, 8, 11, 13, 10 ) Notes: See Pu. IX, 6; Mk. IX, 4,5. 6, 7, 8. It is not clear from the text whether d of idrsa and kidréa is to be retained, But Mk. (IX, 8) hasidisam, Cf. Nitti. Udttkhala has become udukhala (possibly wrongly) in Mk. 3. The a which has been prescribed as a substitute for ™ in mukude, yudhiséhiru and upart, does not occur in this dialect, nor is the change of १८ in purusa [ to purist | {0 be made. The words such as ya@dzse and {71146 ete, are to be included in the group of words ( yan ) beginning with 781 ( Cf. I. 1. 18, 15 ). Notes: ma coutkarah=na ca-u-vikarah. See Mk. IX. 10, 9. 19, +. | Thee of | vedana and decara does not become 1. Rubkkha 18 the substitute for rrksa, In daiva[ the at | does not become i, nor does the & of prakostht become v. In the words parrnsa ete. | the ws | does not become ai, nor in the qgaurava does it become &@ ( Cf. I. 1, 19, 18, 21, 22, 23, 24 ) Notes: See Mk. IX. 11,17, 18, 12. 14, 15. 9. Now we come to the single intervocal consonant. It is prescribed that ¢ becomes ८, The th of prathama also becomes dh Lasin M }. In the word garbhita, the t becomes n. Except in 119 Sauraseni (IL i. 6-8 the word prthiri, th becomes dh, and é of Uharata becomes th ( Cf. I. 11, 1, 4, 5, 11, 12 ) Notes: Though Sir G. A. Grierson thinks otherwise the ms. reading garvifa 18 an evident misreading for garbhzla ; vide ante er notes on J. ii. 5. The same mistake occurs in Pu. (IX, 9) also. From Bharadha comes the later >, i. ९. M. ( developed ) form Bharaha with its derivative Bhiraka ( = Bharata ). See Vr. + 11. 3 ; Pu. IX. 9, 10, 13; Mk. IX. 20, 24, 25. 6. An intervocal » generally becomes 7, and the word apired becomes avurua, The ¢ of &kara does not become bA, nor does the # of kabandha become m,. In ecantrika the /॥ does not become 12, and intervocal ५ is not usually elided (Cf. [. it. 7,9, 1), Notes: For avurua Mk. (LX. 23) has 22147724 which seems to have the same souree as the New Bengali (दद in a pseudo-Sanskrit form meaning strange, not seen before. See Pu, LX. 11, 14; Mk. IN. 21. 23,19, 22, 26; Pu. (1X. 14) seems to allow, on special occasions, an ¢clision of intervocal 2. 7. The intervocal ¢h and Uh, like ^ are to be pronouned with complete contact. Sometimes rin Aaridra ete. become /, but in sipha 6८, the intervocal pl, does not become (५ There is no change | of 6 | to ॥ in dass, but this is optional in the word caturdage ( Cf. I. ii. 11, 10, 7, 13 ) Notes: In this rule RT. differs from Mk. ( ix, 29 ) who says that all intervocal JA (in S) becom? ¢. According to RI. all intervoeal ph in 8, except that in sipha ete. become 6A as in M. As regards the change of ई 11 S., Mk. (ix. 31) differs from RT. See Pu. 1X. 12, 22; Mk. IX. 27, 28, 31; Pu. (IX. 15) unlike RT., says that dadhav aspastam uccaryau, d and dh are to be pronounced indistinctly. It seemes that he records here the pronunciation of the ४, @ and क just before their clision in M. 8. Now about consonants in the beginning of a word. The ॥ of kiytiéa does not become ८. In words like त ete. the initial d does not become 4, but the root dah is an exception | and in it the initial त becomes @ |, The initial + of yosti does not become J In lanyala, lohala ete, 2 should not be substituted [ for the initial 1}, nor in éavaka should ch be substituted [ for the initial é | (Cf. I, ii. 14, 15). Notes: Mk. (1X. 34) differs from RT. about the change of @ in M. See Vr. X11, 31; Mk, 1X. 36, 85, 34, 33. 11. i. 9-14 ] Prakrta-kalpataru 120 9. Now about the substitutes for a conjunct consonant in any [00851100 in a word. In the word wtthita there is no [change of tth to} Uh. In the word sphotaka, kh is not substituted [ for the sph ], nor is jj substituted [ for vy ] in Abhimanyu, The character dd is not substituted [ for rd | 7 sammardana or gardabha, nor is cch substituted [ 01 4§ ] in ‘stra or sadrksa (Cf. I. iii. 3, 7, 10, 6). Notes: See Mk. IX. 40, 39. 44. 42, 41. 10.. So also in sana [the {§ does not become cch ], nor does hn of cihna become nn. In kusmandgika [the sm | sometimes becomes mah, The word vaspa becomes vappha or vaha, and in Lhindipala, nd may optionally be substituted [for nd] (CEI. iii. 11, 15,9 )- Notes: See Mk. IX. 41, 45, 43. 46. 11. The change of sm, ॥&11५ and sim to mh is optional, Except in the word daiva there is no doubling in the words of the seva group ( Cf. 1. ui. 15 ) Notes: Half of this verse is missing in both the mss. Mk. (IX. 50) differs from RT., and prohibits doubling except in three words viz. kauluhala, sevi, sthula. 12. As a general rule, when a_ vowel follows, vowels [immediately preceding] are not elided. In /a/ayasa, the syllable ya, and in Lhajana the syllable ja, are not elided. In the word karenw there is no metathesis, and in the word Brhaspati the syllables bia and ya are not to be employed (Cf. I. v. 1, 2, 9, 10). Notes: See Pu. IX. 86; Mk IX. 47, 48, 51, 54. 13. The termination corresponding to both év@ and ya of the Skt. indeclinable past participle, is 7a. In the word tdanim, the final anusvara may optionally be omitted. The word bhaga- dheyam is to be treated as a masculine A bull whether castrated or not is called gona ( Cf. {. v. 22, 24 ). Notes: The last quarter of the stranza is corrupt, If our emen- dation is correct it will place gona in the 8. dialect. See Vr. XII. 9; Pu. IX. 38, 34, 35; Mk. IX. 52. 14. The nominative singular of Durv@sas 18 Duvvast, The termination of the ablative singular is do, and also, in the case of द 121 Gauraseni | 11. 1. 15-18 bases it is sometimes @ ‘The termination of the locative singular is only ¢, but with the 7 bases and = uw- bases, it is -mmi. The termination vo may not be used for the nominative plural [ of 4 and w- bases | nor may « be employed for the nominative plural of feminine nouns ( Cf. T. vi. 5, 6 ) Notes: See Pu. 1X. 42, 16; Mk. 1X. 59. 60, 61, 62, 63, 64, 65. 15-16. The instrumental, genitive, ablative and Jocative singular [ of feminine nouns | ends only in «The accusative singular of matr is optionally madaram. The vowel , is not used || as the termination of the | feminine base in the case of the pro- nouns kim, yad, tad, (1.4. The accusative plural of neuter nouns ends in 2? and not int. The genitive plural of adam ete, does not end in esim in any of the three genders. ‘The pronouns 11) ete, do not form the eonitive singular in fst, ss@ or se or the ablative singular in’ (1 Che ablative singular of han is Ando and of twlam ५८८५. Aim ete., do not employ ake, ia ete., | to indicate time | nor is sim used for the genitive plaral | of tad | and instead of the Sanskrit word tha, (4.८ 15 used (CET. vi. 105 vi. 7, 19, 20, 21 ) Notes: See Pu. IX. 42, 43, 46; Mk. LX. 66, 67, 68 69, 70, 71. 72, 73, 74, 75, 71. The third foot seems to have been misread by Sir G. Grierson. RT. does not allow the terinination ९4200 (genitive plural) in S. rdam cote. in any of the three genders. The fourth foot also could not be read due to lacuna. 17. The nominative and accusative singular neuter of adam is wam or imam. The nominative singular | neuter | of efad does not end ino. The nominative singular | maseuline | of tdam is aam, and the feminine is im.. [ The nominative singular of | adas does 101. [ substitute | ha [ for da | but the ablative singular is [ formed from the base | a ( Cf. 1. vi. 21, 28, 22 ). Notes: See Pu. TX 55, 58, 59 : Mk. XIT. 76, 77. 73, 79. 18. As a rule. they teach fimam [as the nominative and accusative singular of | gasmad, The nominative plural is teuhe and the same form is taught for the accusative plural. The instru- mental and locative singular are fa’. ~The Instrumental plural is tumhehim ete., and the ablative singular is tumado (CET. vi. 26 ) Notes: See Pu. 1X. 62; Mk. XII. 81-85. P—16 II. i, 19-24 | Prakrta-kalpatarn 1292 19. Hinto is declared to be the substitute for bhyas, the termination of the ablative plural, while fuwmhea is substituted for yugsmad [thus forming tranhe-hiuto | The genitive singular is te, de, tuba, tumba or (14)1/1./1. Notes : The seeond half of the verse 19 is missing in the mss. and 80 is the verse 20. See Pu. IX. 63; Mk XII. 86. 21. | OF asmad | the genitive plural is the twofold from auhana or (८1110. hey also teach the form ame. Remaining forms which are not mentioned here ean be ascertained merely by [ comparing | the Mahdrastri dialect. Notes: Grierson’s emendation of the second foot seems to be wrong. It may better be emended as athimha sltyevam= atha-amhe-tly-evam. See Vr. XII. 32 ; Pu. writes Cafter IN. 64 ) sesam tu Maharistri-laksanid tty uktam eva. Conjugation 22. Verbs in general belong to the Parasmaipada conju- gution, and among them the termination of the third person singular is only ५. That of the third person plaral is auéz, that Of the second person plural is dua and that of the first person plural is aha. The characteristic termination of the future base is hi and ssa. (Cf. T. vii. 1-4, 5 ) Notes: See Vr. XII. 27; Pu. IX, 63-67 ; Mk, XII. 97, 101-104. 23. In the first person singular of the future 4@ is not used, only ss@ being employed. The roots gam ete. ५0 not have yacchium ete, for the first person singular and plural. In the future and other tenses pekkha is used instead of the root drs. 10 form the passive, the suffix ia alone is employed. ( Cf. T. vit. 6. 7,4 ) Notes; According to Mk. (ix. 112 ) ४. pecchadt> pasyati and pekkhadi> preksate. Weread the third foot differently. See Vr. XII. 18; Pu. 1X. 75 ; Mk. XIT. 108. 24. In this dialect the termination of the third person singular of the imperative is du, and of the second person singular 123 Saurasenl | IT. 1. 25-28 su. The rest is as in Maharastri, except, that [ the root /7 as appearing in the form of | jaycti will take these two terminations. When a root does not end in a, the second person singular Imperative ends in hi, as in sunderaam dehi Janaddanassa ( semmdaryam deht Janardanaya ) give heauty to Janardana. Notes: See Pu. 1X. 71-73; Mk. ता 106. 29. Jjo is not generally employed as a part of the termina- tion of the future and connected tenses. The vowel 1 or @ may he inserted 10 thts dialect, between the root and the personal terminations, but not /॥ or jj@ In the infinitive, gerundive adjective, and future, Cis [inserted between the root and the termination}. For the root (ha, bho is substituted, or according to Sikalya ho. (Cf. I. vii. 10, 15, 10, 1). Notes: See Vr. Xf. 12, 15 ; Pu. IX. 77, 78 ; Mk. XIV, 106, 108, 109, Substitution of verbal roots 26. This root ha in the future and = in the indeclinable perfect participle, takes the form bhava and in the past participle it does not become haz. The root. ky does not become 212. In the ` indeclinable perfect participle the roots /z and gam become ka and ga fespectively, to which the termination dua is added, [ thus becoming respectively /fadua and gadua |. In the gerundive adjective and infinitive ky beeomes दद्धं | forming hadavram and kadum respectively |( 111.13; Levi. 6; 1. vin 4 } Notes: See Vr. XII. 10, 13, 23 ; Pu. IX 84.35; Mk. 1. 11१0) 111. 27, Inthe finite tenses, the roots 4% and vac both 06016 vucea. The root prach becomes piecha, and as becomes accha. [ The root stha, of which the present is | fzs¢hati, in this dialect takes two forms, viz, cittha and thakka, but when preceded by the preposition wd- it becomes tha. [ Grammarians | declare that the substitute for ghurn is ghumma (Cf. I. viii. 16, 26, 9, 2 ) Notes: For stha Mk. VII. 102 gives thakka. See Vr. XII. 19, 16; Pu. IX 86, 87, 91; Mk. XII, 1 3, 136,137,119. — 28. The substitute for the root grah is genhu, and the opinion of Kapila is that in the gerundive adjective (tavya) and the IT. 1. 29-33 | Prakrta kalpatare 124 past participle it takes the form (1/1, = In the passive it becomes ye jpha or gheppya and mas; becomes evdda or maja in conjugation (Cf. 1, vii, 4, 23). Notes: See Pu. LX. 88, ४9 ; Mk. XII. 128, 130, 129, 142. 29. The substitute for (11 is cacea and for ar} is piesa. It is stated that gira beeomes jimyha and | spr of which the present is | spréete beeomes china According to Siidraka, two forms of sprét are also given for the passive, viz., chippa and chiva (1. viii, 15, 23, 29 ) Notes: Cf. Mk. XII. 117, 115; 123. 30. The substitute for the root 4a is said to be bhdasu, that 01 04८१ [5 mila@a, and that of Asud is Thanda. For the th of the root kath, (/॥ [६ substituted. { The grammarians | prescribe an addition of the syllable wa at the end of the roots hi, lia, ई and jt (CET. viii. 26, 14, 19). Notes: See Pu, IX. 923; Mk. XT. 116, 133, 118, 114, 134. 31. The roots han khan, ran and vah do not double their finals, nor do duh and the others | of the same group | The substitute for svauis sa, but in the future and cognate tenses it 18 sura, For all the finite tenses of sta the substitute is (4176. (Cf. 1. viii, 16, 20, 18, 39 ). Notes: See Mk. XIP. 145, 146, 138. 139, 120. 32. The substitutes for the root gd are sakha and 5110001. The form tirt is not used for the passive of this verb, for rue we have roca, and for rid, voda, for si we have sua, and for bhi, bhaa CT. viti, 14, 25, 12, 11, 7, ) Notes: See Pu. IX. 92 ; Mk. XII. 131, 132, 141. 33. The substitute for the root mr/ is ghasa, The root (द ‘to give’ becomes de, but only in the future it becomes ai and in the infinitive (fumun J and in the gerundive adjective ( favya ) it takes the form ¢@,in the indeclinable perfect participle (ited) da, and inthe passive di. In the causal it becomes d@va, davara and other forms (Cf. [. vin. 13 ) Notes; See Vr. XII. 14,30; Pu. LX, 76, 79 83; Mk, XII. 122. 196, 135, Sv7 is evidently aseribal crror for mr/ in RT. as well ४8 in Mk, (XII. 122) ; ghkas (to rub) however to be derived from ghrs, is often associated with mrs inits I’kt. form, eg. Mod. Beng. maja-ghasa ‘cleaning and rubbing. 125 Sauraseni | IT i. 34-38 Exceptional forms 24. [The charecteristie aya of] verbs of the tenth class and that of the eausals, is not elided ; but sometimes its elision also is presertbed, as in Raha hala coradi Kanha-vamsim, Kanho haravedi pudam wlaso (Ratha hala corayaty Krenwvamsim, Krsno harayati pilam wlasah), see dear, Radha steals Krsna’s flute, and Krsna in Indifference loses its ease. Notes: कतरा (mes. harivedt) cives rise to Mod Bengali haraya Voses,’ 35. We now proceed to discuss exceptional forms. The forms 92 tha-hera ete. indicate muvidiya ete. The name Satrughna becomes 9८1८7८1 as hhisma becomes Bhimlit, and trarita heeomes ta date. Notes: Cf. Pu. 1X. 31: See NS. XVIII. 22. 36-37. The name Draupadi’s brother [ Dhysladyumana | be- comexs Dhittajunna, Tn this dialect yarat ete. becomes jefti ete. The words ganiha ete., become ajjuk@ ete., <) becomes ithhi and the word era becomes jjerra, according to its association with the preceding word, [ for | if it is preceded by an anusvara it sometimes has the letter } | not j7 | as in piam jecera pio bhanadi [ priyam ena prio bhanalt | the beloved speaks only lovingly. Sahasatti is considered as having the meaning of saha, but by some it is taught that the word is sahasotti, Notes: See Pu. 1X. 27. 98. The word tra becomes ria or rra, and aearya becomes accharia, In the case of a proper name there are no words ending in the suffix (10). The interjection haddhi indicating sorrow, is not used, and rarely words like savddhodini ete., are employed ( ^. 1. iit. 14; To in. 6, 4) Notes: See NS. १४111, 9; .Vr. XII. 24,50: Pu. EX, 29. 30 Mk. XII. 156. Here on the second Branch, ends the first Posy, consisting of thirtyeight flowers, uf the Wishing-tree, in the Instruction of Prakrit. Il. iit. Pracya etc. 1. Next IT tell the details of the Pracyi dialect which 18 explained as having Saurasent for its basis. The nominative singular of the word bhavat ‘your honour’ ends in anusvara preceded hy «a (so that we have bharam ), but-in the nominative of the feminine of the same word, we necessarily have od (so that we get bhodi ) Notes: See Pu. X. 1-3: Mk. X. 1, 4. 2. The word mitrkha becomes murakkha, The word hotthamano or oceasionally ofthamdano is used to indicate the future . In addressing a person of lower rank the voeative of a bases ends in @ Skilled writers prefer dhida@ in the sense of 1111011}, fa daughter’. Notes: See Pu. X.9, 5,4; Mk. <. 2.3.8, Though Pu. and Mk. also have hokkhamano for hotthamana; we emend it. For sy > kkk is unthinkable in Pkt. It is easier to connect the word with hottha ( was ) in Jain Pkt. 3. The remaining [ peculiarities | may very easily be gathered from | the usage of | the people. In this [ dialect | proverbs are largely to be used ; and so are to be used sentences contradicting one another ( lit. succeeding sentence opposed to the preceding one ), but such sentences are intelligible on account of the simplicity of the meaning of words | constituting them | Notes: See Pu. X. 13 ; NS. XVIII. 50. his dialect is assigned jn rupakas to the jester ( vidtisaka ). Wenee the peculiarity referred to in this rule may relate more to ethe literary style than to the language itself. 4 177 hi bho is uttered as a token of satisfaction, and hi mana'e as a token of surprise. Avida spoken twice is an expres- sion of sorrow. Bankuda is used in the sense of vakra crooked, and the intelligent must?understand that avahada is used in the sense of upakrtu, (favoured). The neuter pronoun itdam becomes 1101471. According to the rules of dramatic composition this dialect is to be spoken by the Vidiisaka and the like. Notes: See Pu X. 12, 7,8. Mk. X. 9, 11, 12, 6. Avant. 5. The Avanti as well as the Bahliki dialects are now taken in hand. These two are alloted to different characters. Their form is to be ascertained from a mixture of Sauraseni and Pracya, Notes: RT. seems to think that the two dialects Avanti and Bahliki are identical, But Mk. thinks differently ( X. 1, 13 ). ए (XI.1) derives Avanti from an admixture of M. and S. so does Mk. XI. 1. NS. श्ण. 50 assigns this dialect to rogues ( dhurta ). 6. Asarule the dropping of intervoeal ८ and the elision of ८८ 111 this dialect are optional. The word ecea and ८८८ are used instead of era 3 and also sartecha is used instead of sedrksa (CE. IT. 1. 6. 7, 36, 9 and 1. ix. 2 ) Notes: See Pu. XI. 8,2; Mk. XI. 12, 2. Pu’s text ( XI. 3, 2) as given in Nitti’s ed. should be emended. 7. The suffix of the perfect participle active | ("द | is finda. The characteristic terminations of the future base are ya and ja [for all persons of both numbers], and these may also come between the root and the regular personal terminations. The substitute in the root (॥7 is ho, and of the root (8 is pekhha while that for the causal dé 15 darisa ( Cf. 11. 1, 22, 25, 23 ; 1. vii. 9 ) | Notes: See Pu. XI. 4 (corrupt in Nitti’s ed. ), 5, 8; Mk. XI. 4, 5, 6, 8. Unlike RT., Mk. ( X1.7) has peccha for pekkha in the Avanti dialect. 8. The wise maintain that in the passive, the root aru becomes swyra, 1८ becomes jippa, bhan become bhanna, yam becomes ganuma, kr becomes kijjt and jra becomes nienijja. Notes: See Pu. XI. 6 ; Mk, XI. 9. | 9, ‘The future forms soccham ete, which include the perso- nal termination of the root gu etc. are approved of also in the dialect, For full examples of these, reference can be made to [the chapter on] Maharastri ( Of. I. vii. 7 5 IL i. 23 ). Notes: See Pu XJ. Mk. XI. 10. 11. ii. 10-16 | Prakrta-kal pataru 128 10. According fo the rules of dramatic composition, this dialect is spoken by characters of medium rank, a town mayor, a door-keeper and a knave, and also by constables and merehants. Notes: See NS. इए. 50-31. By ésé 04456 RT. means probably both Avanti and Babliki. Magadhi, Ardhamagadhi and Daksinatya 11, Inthe following verses Magadhiis taught. 11 1 the language of Raksasas, religious mendicants orthodox and heterodox (Jain and Buddhists), and of such like people 11८ wise derive it from the Maharastri and Sauraseni bhiaisis as its bases. Notes: ६९५ NS. XVIII. 49. 12. This Magadhi is also the same as Ardhamagadhi, but as regards the latter, poets make this distinction,—that whereas the word for Sanskrit ahkam, [, in Magadhi may be hage, in Ardha- magadhi it is only cham. Notes: In the rule 28 below we are told that the Magadhi forms for aham, are Gham (aham), hakke and hage. Mk. >< 11. 38 differs. Pu. does not recognize AMg. for the Mg form of aham sev Vr. XI. 9; Pu. XII. 31. Mk (>, 30) gives the following forms of aham in Mg. and AMg. hakke, hake, hagge [118९] and aga. 13-14. The dental s and the cerebral s become only the palatal ई ; but an original § is sometimes retained, as in ese haye aya vihuside kkhu | esoham adyn vibhisitah Irhalu |, today, forsooth here, [ am finely dressed. But in the word adhuna, the vowel 2 Is added in all three genders, as in hage na cée ahunt (५1८ yame | aham na eso adhuna khalu yam | 1, forsooth do not go now. ‘The letter + always becomes /, as in kalune [harunah | pathetic, and vicale | nicarih | ‘reflection’. The letter 7 becomes yin this dialect, asin yaée | yasah |, yanali[ janati | he knows ; yarea [yaral, up to ; ५५ [ yasya] of whom ( Of. IL 17) Notes: Mk. makes no exception for s and he docs not change f tov See Vr. XI. 3; Pu. XH. 2 3,19; Mk. XII. 2. Mk. does not recognize a@hunt,and $ in Mg. and A Mg. Sce also Vr. XI.4; Pu. XII. 4,5; Mk. XID. 3. Mk. does not reeognize y for yin Mg. and AMg. 129 Magadhi and Ardhamigadhi | II. 11.15-19 15-17. The substitute for ^(॥८ is here declared to be sha as in peska duskena lashe vinivadide ge [ atra preksasva diuhkhena rakso vinipatitah sah | look here, this demon has been killed with difficulty. But this does not take place in the case of the [ Sauraseni ] Khhu, as 10 awthaute pulige khhu Bhime [ mahan purusah khalw Bhimah | forsooth, Bhima 18 a great man. In the case of the [Sanskrit | (६८, there is [ thus | a reversal [ of its conjoint members |. Thus vilashane ée vayanammi yaske [ vilaksanah sa vacane yaksah | that Yaksa is peculiar in his speech. The conjunct ((@ and ¢éha become severally sa and sha as ain hadham nw bhastalaa nisthule st [ hatham nu bhattarakah nisthiro’st | why, sir, are you severe ? The word tattha [ tatra | ‘there’ is said by the experts to become tagea [ and similarly we have | 2745८1८ mosee padha-nasa- kayjie; hal’? wscile yemmadha; se Ikhu ee [ anyatra mustah pathanaga- haryah; halotthitum jemata; sa Ihalv esah | elsewhere musta Cyperus Rotundus is [ but a _ weed | whose business is to clog the footpaths ; eat ye that which 18 sprung from the plough [ 1. e. cultivated | ; here forsooth, it 18. But sometims this does not occur, as in samalesu Asgatthamena mannum daliam kulunnam [ samaresu aésvatthamna® manyur dalitam Kurtinam | 10 battles the anger of the Kurus have been soothed ( lit. smashed ) by Asvatthaman. Notes: See Pu. XI. 6,7,8; Mk. XII. 4,5. Cf. Vr. XI. 8. See also Pu. XII. 9, 10; Mk. XII. 7. and Pu, XII. 11. 18-19. For the [ Sanskrit or Sauraseni ] conjunct ceh, sca 18 usually substituted, as in guéscadt kkhu, na pascime dhammapalassa hoya [Skt gacchati khalu; na pascime dharmaparasya bhavet | he goes; let him not be behind him who is devoted to virtue. The semivowel y,and only that semi-vowel is prefixed to every [ single ] letter of the ca group, and also in the case of conjuncts. Thus, mam yca na sampuycchadi layjjamane niunja-mayjjhe ycagule Mulali [ Skt. mam ca na samprcechati lajjamano nikwnja« P—17 Il, ii. 20-22 | Prakrta-kalpataru 130 madhye catulah Murarih ] and the restless Murari, being abashed does not question me in the midst of bower. There should be repetition [ of words ] in this dialect ( let. here ) in expressing disapproval, as in ma ma Mulalim na वक्ष gam [ma ma Murarim na parisvazisye| nay, nay, I will not embrace Murari. Notes: See Vr. XI.5; Pu. XII. 12, 13; Mk. XII. 7, 21, and Grierson’s article Zhe Pronunciation of Pkt. Palatals in in JRAS, 1918, and his notes on this in JA. (1928) pp. 301 ; and see also Pu. AIT. 14. 20-21. The termination (va of the indeclinable perfect parti- ciple becomes dani, as in paliyeehie 84 govanganahim hasidant- Kanhe [pratilsitah sa gopanyanabhih hasitva Krsnah) this Krsna with a smile, has been expectcd by the herd-maidens. Sometimes the termination may become ४ or ta, as in paliycchide ge hase goviahim ( pratiksitah sa hasitra gopikabhih). paliycchidao hasia kkhu lao tamala-kunjanumi kudithalena [ pratikstuah hasttra khalu tah tamala-hunje huntihalena | he with a smile has been expected by herd-maidens ; they smiled and had been eagerly expected in the tamala bower. Sometimes in this dialect, the vowel before an [ that is the pleonastic suffix ka] is lengthened, 28 in enhi Yanaddanakam puline kkhu yami [idanim Janardanam yuline khalu yami ] forsooth, I am now going to Janardana in the river bank. Notes: See Vr. XI. 16 ; Pu. XII. 15,16. Mk. XII. 23, 24. Also Pu. XII. 17. 22. [ The wise | permit u to be substituted for the pre fixes ava and 01८ [ as well aso prescribed for Maharastri }, as in khanam pt govt usaladi pasa [ksanam api gopi apasarati parévat | fora moment the herd-maiden slips away from [ his J side. The word pili is irregularly employed in the sense of pums a male ; and similarly, Midakia. is used by the skilled, in the meaning of hrdaya, the heart ( cf. I. V. 8, 18 ; प, iti 3. 5 ) Notes: See Pu. XII. 18, 21; Mk. XII. 29. 25. 14. Cf, Vr. KI. 6. 181 Magadhi and Ardhamagadhi [ IT. ii, 23-26 28. The equivalent of mitra is vaaméga [vayasya}, and that of the 14.114, a jewel is lidana (ladana ?), pigallaa is the equivalent of 1822८24. a 1216269, Jnkkh@ is used for ganana calculation, and bhukkha@a for bubhuks& hunger, The word vwaduvvu is used in the meaning of vatu, a religious mendicant. Notes: See Mk. XII. 11, 16. Cf.Mk. XII. 23, 19, 17, 8. Kalidasa uses ladana ( Sak. VI. ) 24. The word gomika 18 used by the intelligent [ for referring | to an honoured person, and hoginu for 0810 lukewarm, kuycchimadi is used for kuksimati, a pregnant woman, and maia for malr a mother, Notes: Dr. 8, K. Chatterji rightly suggests that gomzka has developed into Mod. Beng. 4%, a surmame. It probably goes back to ५240120, i,e. one officer in charge of a guldma a small part of an army, which consists of 45 footmen, 27 horses, 9 chariots and 9 elephants. Cf. governor (in slang. ). See Pu. XII. 22, Mk. XII. 13, 10, Cf. Mk. XII. 15. It seems that Mk. has misread here his source-book which appears to have given maia; from this word comes Mod. Beng. mee ‘woman’, ‘daughter’. 25. They state that the equivalent of G@rdardra ‘wet all over’ 18 ollolla; other words are easily understood [ to be Magadhi } from the usuage of poets. Masculine a bases have the two termina- tions ४ and € for the nominative singular, as in na esi distht ycchivie na ege [ na esah drsthah sprstah na esah ] he has not been seen, he has not been touched. Notes: See Vr. XI. 10; Pu. XII. 25; Mk. XII. 26. 26. For the sake of metre terminations often disappear as in kudamgae Mahava diéae ge | kutankake Madhavo drsyate suh ] in the arbour Madhava is visible. The termination ॥ with lengthe- ning of the [ final vowel of the ] base, may optionally be used for the genitive [ singular |, as in puppham mae niyjjadi Mahavaha [ puspam maya niyate Madhavasya | Madhava’s flower is being carried by me. Notes: Vr. XI.12; Pu. XII. 26, 27, cf. Mk. XII. 86. The text of Pu. ( XII. 27 ) should be emended as follows : naso hatvam wa dirgha’ citah, see Mk. X11. ४9, II. ii. 27-31 | Prakrta-kalpataru 132 97. The vowel e and ० may optionally be used as the termination of the vocative case, as in he Lhastake, or 01011410 kim bhukkho sir, are you hungry ? In reproach the termination @ is observed to be optional, as in puliéa ale le [purusa are ve} shame you fellow! In surprise and affliction the termination is considered to be hi. Notes: See Vr. XJ. 13 ; Pu. XII. 29, 30, 23 ; Mk. XIT,. 27, 28. 28. In addressing a person, the appropriate interjections are ale [ are | andlele| ve ve]. Inthe sense of the pronoun aham T, we find Gham, hakke and hage. The nominative plural of the pronoun of the second person, is tupphe or tumhe, The equivatent of the root sth@ and vrs are respectively ycinta and ८५६६८. | Notes: See Pu. XII. 24, 31, 33, 34, ef. Vr. XI. 9,14; Pu. XII. 82, Mk. X1I. 30, 31, 32. 29. The substitute of the root bhi becomes, in the future, in this dialect also huva. They all tell us that the forms taken by /triam, done, mrtum, dead, and yatam, gone, are in this dialect ‘adam, madam, gadim, while according to others they are also :aam, maam and yaam. Notes: The first view seems to be preferable ; for mada ( dead ). of Mod. Beng. ( a descendant of Mg, ) is traceable to madaa ( =mrtaka ). See Vr. XI. 15 ; Pu. XII. 35, 37 ; Mk. XII. 33, 34. 30. The substitute for the root 1114 (Art) is kappa. The vowels 2 and % may not be shortened, and for @ alone @ may be substituted. ‘The case terminations [of substantives etc.] are some- times interchanged, and also the vowel ofa verbal termination lengthened, or occasionally there is another similar change. Notes: See Pu. ¬९ 11, 36, Mk. XI. 36, 37. 31. According to one authority, the consideration of Paisgacika should come even here, [sor the benefit of one] who does not know that special rules in this matters; but in the present work, the special rules for the various Paisacika dialects are to be formed in detail further on (iii. xv.). Notes: 1४ 18 not known which authority is criticized by RT. 133 Daksinatya and Sakariki | IL. ii. 32; iii. 1-8 32. They call a poem, sweeter in its essence than even nectar, intermingled with words from the South, and also overlaid with Sanskrit and other languages, Daksinatya. Notes: See the Commentary on Mk. (XII. 8 ) which defines the Daksinatya as follows: Daksinitya-padivalamb: Samskrtanga-orjrmbhitam | Kavyam piyusanthsyand: Daksinatyam ttiritam || and ascribes this to Aniruddhabhatta. Here in the Instruction of Prakrit, in the Wishing-tree, on the second branch, ends the second posy, consisting of thirtytwo flowers, entitled the Discrimination of [Pracya, Avanti Babliki], Magadhi, Ardhamagadhi and Daksinatya. II. iti. Sakariki 1. After the preceding, the Vibhasds are described as nine in number, here Sakariki is first tanght. The Sakaira has been described as the brother-in-law of a king, haughty aad over- weaning, ill-mannared and an exceeding fool. Notes: See NX. XVIII. 52. The def. of Sakira, does not oceur in the NS. The passage on the nature of Sakira’s language. quoted by Mk. under XIII. 9, as occurring in Bharata’s work, does not appear in the NS. Besides this ke ascribes also Mg. to Sakara. See Chaukhamba ed. che XX XV. ४6. 9-3. The Sakariki Vibhasi is the language employed by him, and is marked by needlessness of the rules for suffixes indicating gender, by want of elegance. and the like. Its basis is found in Magadhi. In it the syllable sca, is optionally substituted for ksa in the words duspreksa and sadzksa as in duppesca, ycangala-sarigca, ycinkt (duspreksya, candala-sadrksa, tistha ) hard to be seen, stand still you ugly fellow like a Candala. Instead of the termination néa [of ycinta] the syllable néha, or sometimes ६, may be substituted Thus: - IL. iii. 4-7 | Prakrta-kalpataru 134 Siala& yeintha ghalammi [y]ceda ale tumam va ycita yami hakke [syalaka ८ tistha grhe ceta are tvam धते tistha yami aham.] You wretched fellow, you servant, stay in the house ; or do you stay (here), I am going. Notes: Sce Pu. XIII. 14, 1, 2, 10, Mk. XIII.9 (Comm. ). See. Mk. XIII. 8. 4. The Conjunct ttha [of Sauraseni] remains unchanged. and does not become [ &ca] as in Magadhi [IT. ii. 16) as in yeinthami atthanagade 1114 hakke [ tisthamt asthanagatah khaluaham |. I forsooth, am arrived at the place of assembly, and remain there. Sometimes also it becomes néha as in yantha [yatra} where tantha [tatra] there, and asin vaam silam misasi tantha dava [vayah silam migrayasi tatra tavat| you mix age and good conduct there. Notes: See Pu. XIII. 5, Mk, XIII. 4. 5-6. The suffix ka [svarthe] is in frequent use in this dialect. The word vc is used in the meaning twa, and hadakka in the sense of Iirdaya, the heart. Syala a brother-in-law, becomes siala. Declensional and conjugational suffixes are irregularly elided or added or genders are interchanged. Thus PBibbhisane bluscadi {08८0 hakkam Indainim yo na a gakkanet, ese ghale ettha haye visami. [Vibhisanah bhiksati tatra mam Indragni yo na ca galnoti |. There Vibhisana begs of me, and of Indra and Agni he is not able to do so ; here I enter this house. On the other hand, these (cases etc.) are to be described as [optionally] remaining unchanged. Notes: See Pu. XIII. 9, 6, 10, ef. Pu. XII. 8, 7. Persons of verbs, and cases of nouns etc., are also inter: changed at random. Of this a detailed account can be stated by the intelligent. ‘The learned also teach that sometimes declensional suffixes are elided, and that the termination e may be optionally employed for the nominative plural feminine of a pronoun. Notes: See Pu. XIU, 11, 19, Mk, XDI. 7, $. 185 Sakariki and Candalika [ II. iii, 8-11 8. Diphthongs are often resolved into their components, as in gailini [svatrint| a wanton woman. Also in this dialect, the vowel long [by position] before a conjunct consonant may be [scanned as] short, Thus— Kamena dayjjhadi kkhu me hadakke tavagsi angalalasi-padie via mamésa-khande. | kamena dahyate khalu me hrdayam tapasri angara-ras-patitam-iwa mamsa-khandam | for sooth my tortured heart is burning with love, like a bit of meat fallen in heap of [burning] coals. Notes: See Pu. XIII. 13; Mk, XIII. 7, 9. 9. The language of the Sakara is as a rule vulgar, meaning- less, in wrong order, incongruous, illogical contrary to the Sastras, with barbarous similies and tautological. In this dialect even a number of blunders in a word are promoted to being looked upon as an elegancy. Notes: See Pu. XIII. 14. Candalika 10. The Vibhasi known Candalika will now be described as ithas been taught. Correctly speaking it is based on a union of Sauraseni and Magadhi. Notes: Cf. Pu. (XIV, 1) derives Ca. from Mg. See Mk. XIV. 1. 11. It 18 taught that in this dialect, in the case of feminine nouns, the termination of the nominative plural and of the accusative plural is e Thus, ye itthike tattha ycllam vasantt mayjjham pi tanam Halina lamantim te Lahike peska kudangaam- mt [yah striyah tatra ciram vasanti madhyam apt tasam Harina ramantim tam Radhikim preksvasa kudangake |). As for the women who live there for a long time, among them also watch that Radha sporting with Hari in the arbour. Notes: Pu. ( XIV. 2 ) has o 88 weil é for @ bases in the nome sing while Mk. ( XIV.2) has @ in showing respect. IT. iti. 12-15 | Prakrta-kalpataru 136 12. The termination of the genitive singular is sa [and not optionally 2॥ as allowed for Magadhi by II. ii. 26] as in pulisassa atthe fpurusasya arthe]. The conjunct &h is not changed [to sh, as required by II. it. 15 Magadhi] as in rama hattha-tutha [ramasva hysta-tustah }. The nominative singular of a bases also, 10 this diulect, should end in ९, as in peéha watthie yoandu nahanganamma | preksasea u pasthitas candro wtdhongane ] behold, the moon has arrived in the courtyard of the firmament. Notes : See Pu. XIV. 3, 5. Mk XIV. 5, cf. Pu XIV, 2; Mk. XIV. 3. 13. In this dialect, the locative singular ends in mint, as in neska gharammt Kanham (preksasva yrhe Krsnam] see Krsnain the house. Sometimes it ends in ¢, as in pesha vane vt edam [preksasva vane py etam}) see him also in the forest. Rustic expressions are to be irregularly employed in this dialect, and in it the skilled use ia [for tra], the termination of the perfect participle active. Notes: See Pu. XIV. 4,9,8;Mk. XIV. 6,9, 8 14. The vocative, when used respectfully, always ends in 0, 8.5 in bhastako tum Mahaglavesi | bhattaka tram muhakala- vegi| sir, you are attired like Mahakala. But when not used respect- fully, it ends in @, as in haha ettha yeed& Gnesi me ayjja vt na kkhu vedham [ katham 0110 ceta Gnayasi me adyapr na khalu vestam | why you fellow, do you not bring me today also the executioner’s noose ? Notes: Cf. एप. XIV.6 (It seems that'fPu.’s stitra should be emended ). 15. For the interjection ave, art is used. For tvadiya thy and madiya, my, we have tuhalelia, ete. [ ie. mahalelia }, Again, for atmiya own, we have appanaakelia. The letter ¢ when intervocalic, [ does not become तव, as in Saurasen! and Magadhi but] is elided, leaving its vowel behind [as in Maharastri | Il. iii, Sabari, Abhirika, Dravidika, Autkali, Vanaukasi and Mandurika. 16. Next we proceed to describe Sabari, which the before- mentioned Magadhi alone produces. It is employed in the language of charcoal-burners, hunters and those who make their living by boats and by woodcutting. Notes: See Pu. XV. 1; Mk. (XV.I) derives it from Ca. as well as from 9. and Mg. See also Ns. XVIII. 53-64. Angarakara-vyadhanim kistha-patropajivinan / yofya NSiabara- bhasa tu. 17, In | the Magadhi root | peska [ for pekkha-preks ] there 18 elision of the & and the letter ८५ is considered to be its substitute, as in sami maham pescadi angam angam [ svami mam preksate angam-anyam | my lord looks at me limb by limb. But this change does not take place in other Magadhi words [ containing s¢ | as in maha dashine 8 [ mahyam dakginah sah |, he is fayourable to me. ‘Two words aham and hag@ are used with the meaning of alam. Notes: See Pu. XV. 2, cf. Pu. XV. 2. 866 Mk. XV. 18. ‘The termination him may optionally be used in the locative singular | the preceding vowel being short as in ईद 15८12 cinthad: pasahim me ummattia kuniahim Nandauttam aGpesca- mani kila hoi Rahi[ sa strika tisthanti parsve me unmattika kunje Nandaputram G@preksamana kila bhavati Radha | that woman who is staying distracted by my side and is looking intently at Krsna (lit. the son of Nanda) in the bower, is to be sure, Radha. Note: Sec Mk. XV. 6. 19. Sometimes in this dialect, instead of this [ termination him of the locative ] we have ४ as in Sayccam hala me ghali natthi sami [satyam hala me grhe nasti svami], of a truth, dear, my husband is not at home. With the sense of ‘in’, ‘contained in’ the ablative may also be used [ instead of the locative ], as in tumam ghalado éahi ycintha dava | tvam grhat ( for grhe ) sakhi tigtha t&vat | do you, dear stay in the house. Note: See Mk, XV. 6, ‰~-1२ II. iii. 20-24 ] Prakrta-kalpataru 138 20. The termination of the nominative may optionally be elided, as in yetnthadt lasha sele [ tisthati raksah 5८11८ | a Raksasa stays in the mountain. The termination of the vocative when, disrespect is intended, is always ठे, as in ale twnam bamhanna niayecha, [ are tvam Brahmana pasya ( nicaksa | O wretched Brahmin, look. In this dialect the words used in poetry are usually Desi (६). Notes: Sec Pu. XV. 5,7; cf. Pu. XV.6; and see Mk. XV. 4. The dJamhanaa gives rise to Mod. Beng. damna ‘the wretched Brahmin. 21. For elt come, ८1८ or ehaht is employed. Moreover want of agreement between two consecutive sentences (lit. between the former and the latter), is here considered desirable. Other peculiarities are to be gathered from the traditional forms used by poets. 22. What is nothing but the Magadhi Bhasa is divided up {into so-called different varieties] according to the characters employing it, respectively, such as Abhirika, Dravidika, Autkali, Vanaukasi and Mandurika[ i.e. the language of the Abhiras, of Dravida, of Utkala ( Orissa ), of foresters, and of Ostlers]. Note: Cf. Mk, XV. 9, 10. Abhirika 23. Some authorities give a different account of the peculiarities of Abhiriki and these I here proceed to tell. The dialect is, in fact, based on Sabari, but the letters é and 8 are represented only by a dental s. | Notes: See Mk. XV. 10 ; Pu. does not know any Abhiri, and Mk. ( foc. 42४, ) thinks it is the same as Sabari except that the latter has -22 870 -wa for -kiva, and it is matyipabhraméa which expression is not clear. 24. In the word Kicaka [the name of Virata’s general who was slain by Bhimasena for insulting Draupadi], it sometimes happens that the [final] ka becomes 0, and that the ca in the middle of the word is elided. Thus eehi 16 / Kiaa! Kiaa mam wéca tli Biimseno hao kkhu Kio [ehi are Kicaka! Kicaka mam pi ekgasva 189 Abhirika and Takki [ IT. ii. 25-29 iti Bhimena hatah khalu Kicakah), Kicaka was slain by Bhima [disguised as Draupadi who cried] come Kicaka! Kicaka! look af me. 25. The elision of the initial a of avanya, a forest, is not permitted [although prescribed for Prakrit generally by I. i. 6]. Sometimes / is to be substituted for ^ andr, The nominative singular of ¢ bases always ends in o [and not in e or?, as in Magadhi, see II. 1. 25) The word bhattarakah, a worshipful person, in this dialect 1s said to become Uhatto. 26. The vocative [singular] of «@ bases generally ends 111 2. The words yettha as, and tatha so, in this dialect become [respectively] judhw and tidha, The rest must be ascertained by poets from customary usage, and is not described [here] at Jength. Takki 27, I now forsooth, mention the Takki Vibhaisa, which is to be spoken by gamblers and other knaves. Another kind [of Takki] is infected by Dravida, but it has no special characteristics (differentiating it from ordinary Takkil. Notes: See Pu. XVI.1; Mk. ( XVI.1) in his comm. quotes the following : ¢athi coktam—prayujyate niatakidau dytitads- vyavaharrbhth | vaitgbhhir hinadvhars ca tad 02८5 takkabhasttam // 98. {£ is based on a mixture of Sanskrit and Sauraseni, and in it a vowel is irregularly added at the end of a word. The instru- mental singular may also endine [as well as ena], as in mam lagude hanei (mam layndena hanti] he strikes me with a cudgel. The dative plural ends in ham or him. Notes: See Pu. XVI. 1, 2, 3,4,Mk. XVI. 1, 3, 4,5, Pu. has em instead of ८ in instr. sing. 29, The same two terminations [ham and hum]are also used optionally for the genitive plural ; and in the case of kim and other pronouns, when the termination 1410 is employed the vowel of the base is lengthened. Thus in that case we have the following II, iii, 80-81 j Prikrta-kalpataru 140 [optional] words 12100 [hesam], taham (tesam], jaham [yesam], etaham [etesan|, Note: See Pu. XVI.5. Mk. XVI. 6, 7. 30. They have told us that the word (२10111४ is used in the sense of tvam, thou; 1101111८ in the sense of aham, 1; and maham in the sense of mama, jidham is used in the sense of yatha as;and tidham in the sense of tatha@, so. The rest is to be ascer- tained, from the traditional usage of poets. Notes: See Pu. XVJI.8,9; Mk. XVI. 10, 11, 12, Tunga for tvam prescribed by Mk ( XVI. 8) seems to be a spurious form ; tvam-ham emended by Nitti in Pu. (XVI. 7) seems to stand for. tum-ham. For the Bengali original of Pu’s work was, here probably misread by the Nepali scribe. 31. Although Sakaraka, Audra, Dravida, and the others partake of the nature of Apabhramé&a, if they are employed in stage plays and similar works, they are not to be considered as such by reason of their Apabhramsac-like nature [but are to be looked up as Vibhasas | Notes: See Pu. XVI. 10, Mk. XVI. 10. According to these two authorities Hariscandra considers Takki to be a Vibhasa and no Apabhramsa. RT., and Mk. think that Apabhraméga cannot be used in dramatic works. If this opinion can be accepted as authorita- tive, the Apabhramsa verses in Kalidasa’s ‘kramorvagi should be considered spurious. ` Here in the Instruction of Prakrit, in the Wishing-tree [on the second Branch] ends the third Posy, consisting of thirtyone flowers. Here in the Wishing-tree [of Prakrit] composed by Rama-Tarkavagiéa-Bhatticdrya, has been told the second Branch consisting of three Posies, III. i, Nagara Apabhramga, 1. We now proceed to describe in order beginning with Nagara, the forms of Apabhramga. It is generally considered that the basis of all the different varieties is to be found in the two bhasas [ 1.९. Mahirastri and Sauraseni | described first. Notes: Sce Pu. XVIT.1, Mk. XVII 1. Here pyrodirita- bhisayoh means ‘of the two bhasas described first’ (+त). Grierson interprets this wrongly. In the colophon of the chapter XVI, Pu. says : samaptan cedam...prakrtanusisana-sutram-. Docs this imply that Prakrit does not include Anabhramsga and Paisacika which have been treated in chapters XVII-XX ? 2. Non-conjunct, non-initial ka, kha ta and tha become respectively qa, gha, du and dha. Thus naka becomes na&yu, sukha sughn, patita padidu and gotha sodhu, On the other hand words such as sakalw and the like follow the Mahirastri rule and become sala and so on. Notes: See Pu. XVII.5.13; Mk. XV11. 2. See Pu. XVII. 13 ; Mk. XVII. 2. 8. In puskara and maskara and similar words, ska and ska becomes It, [ 80 that we have pukkara and makkara | In raksasa-mulkha isa becomes i | so that we have rakkasaenugha | Poets pronounce sand@nita fetters, with the sound cha | so that we have the word chandania (later chadani ) |, and there is also chu sound in éunduka [ so that we chundago | and in the sense of viruddham there is virwam, Notes: The word @fe@ connected with sandanita, occurs in Mod. Beng. 4. Inthe words vyasa, vyadt and others the letter # is inserted after [ the initial consonant | so that we have vrasu, vradi, and so on. In words like priya, inrga the original 9 and 1 remain unchanged. ‘The defya word vila and the like, are option- ally used in the sense of ‘creepers’, ‘weak’, and so on. And the poets use the word sahuli in the sense of the end of a fine saree, Notes: See Pu. XVII. 14, 15; Mk. XVII. 3, 4 ; vi/a in the sense of ‘ereeper’, is probably related to Pkt. vaddi, ४८४, ०८८८९. 71717, 1. 5-9 | Prakrta-kalpataru 142 5. For stokam we have thodam ; for bhadram we have bhallam ; for tvadiyam and madiyam we have respectively teram or [toharam] and meram or moharam, and for the feminine वाः we have kehi. Note: Cf. Pu. XVII. 30. 6. The words ieha and so on, are substituted for kidrsa and similar forms ; and sia is substituted for अ A long vowel is sometimes shortened. The syllable d@ 18 added to a-bases [in the masculine and neuter, but ] not in the feminine. Thus 11042 pasannam [ hrdayam prasannam), In_ the feminine it 18 di that is added, as in goladi lagqu kanthe [ (1007 lagna kanthe | Notes: Sec Pu. XVII. 16, 18, 19, Mk. XVII. ९, 5,6. See Fu: XVIT. 18, 19, Mk. XVI. 5, 6. 7. In all three genders, the syllable dw may be added, as in jaraha kaminidu [jarasya kamini]. Necessary vulgar words are frequently met with. [ With this termination ] in the feminine, declensional terminations are elided, and the final vowel of the base is shortened; and [thus] we have optionally baladu balalu [ bala, balah ete.|, Notes: See Pu. XVII. 20; Mk. XVIL 7. The termination du for all cases and numbers may probably be due to misreading of ku in some early mss. Tt (22८) occurs in many cases whereas duis not corroborated by a single Ap. works Dz, however, may possibly be a development of sarva-vtbhakttkas tastl. 8-9. In all three genders [in the nominative singular 1, the declensional termination is elided, and the termination of the base [ optionally ] lengthened. Thus we have agqi or aggi [ aqnih ] ; vanadam or vanaidam. So also in the accusative and following cases they merely elide the declensional terminations ; but in the nominative and accusative singular, a bases may also [ after the elision ] optionally substitute the termination ४ [ for the final vowel of the base ], [ for example ] kilantu mam mohai Kanhu esu. Kilantu G@lingai Kanha govi. [ Kridan mam mohayati Kysnah esah; kiidanti alingati Krsnam. gopi }. 143 Nagara Apabhraméga ITY. i, 10-13 The nominative singular may also end in 0, as in narao, naro | narah | in this particular following rules of Mahbarastri. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 41, Mk. XVII. 9, 10. and Mk. XVII. 12, 13. The termination dam in the examples is probably a neuter form of da (masculine). 10. Here ८ may sometimes be employed otherwise than as laid down in verse 8 according to which « is only used in the nominative and accusative singular as a substitute for the final vowel of a base ending ina |], Thus (९1 balan, juanu NKanhu | Radhika bala yuva Krsnch |. Sometimes we have hu [ in this case |, as) in rukkhahwu ethwu weew [ vrkso'troccah |. The termination of the nominative plural is he, as in na@alahe caranti [ nayuah carante | Notes: See Mk. XVII. 10,14; Mk. CXVILE1L) has ho for Az in place of €? ( =the pleonastic £@ ). 11. Here the termination of the neuter nominative and accusative plural is 2, before which the final vowel of the base is optionally lengthened, so that we have vandim | vanani]. In the feminine the termination of these cases 1s optionally 1५ as in vahut | vadheah or vadhuh | malaw [ malah |, naiw [ nadyah, natih |. And we may also have o [ instead of u ] Notes: See Pu. XVII. 42; Mk. XVII. 16, 15. 12. In all three genders, the termination of the instru- mental singular is ९, as in vanae [| vanena | vahue [ vadhea ], panalie [ pranalya |. Moreover the termination of the instru- mental plural, the locative singular and the locative plural is him [ or hi ] 1 all three genders, as in (दाद [ balabhih, balayam, balasu | vahuhi [ vadhubhih, vadhvam, vadthusu | tehim [ tath, tabhih ; tasmin, tasyam ; tesu, tasw |. There are two termina- tions of the ablative singular, namely he and ho, as in gharahe (grhat] (for the termination he] and similarly [yharaho] [for the other}. Notes: See Pu. XVII, 43; Mk. XVII. 18,19, Mk. ( XVII, 17) has em for RT.’s ८, 13, The termination of the ablative plural are ham and hum asin kanunaham [ kananebhyah ], naiham [nadibhirh }, or, IIL. i. 14-17 | Prakrta-kalpataru 144 on the other hand kananahum and vahihum [ vadhibhyah | are considered correct. ‘The terminations of the genitive singular are ho and he as in k@nanaho [ kananasye |, naihe [ nadyah | Some authorities also give the terminations as ham and hum as in vanaham [ vanasya |, and vahthum | vadhrah | 14. Other [ terminations of the genitive singular] are sw and ssa, asin rukkhusw rukkhahassa |]. After[ nouns ending in | i or it, the termination is ¢ or h% with he as an optional form. But the termination of the genitive plural is Aam, as in vanaham [ vananam ], vahitham [ vadhinam J, while other writers have vahiihum. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 45, 46. 15, In this dialect, the Mahdrastri terminations of the genitive plural, n@ and mnt are to be mentioned as used with nouns whose bases end inz or «3 and the letter € may be sub- stituted for the final vowel of an a-base in the instrumental sin- gular, instrumental plural, ablative singular, genitive plural and locative singular in all genders, so that for all these we may have such a form as purise. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 46. Mk. XVII. 23 ; cf. Mk. XVII. 29. 16. In regard to the bases in 27 and w, the suffix of the instrumental singular in eva, as in asiena[ asina | or as in asiena samrakkhio tumhe asuena [asitena yiiyam samraksitah vrksah Gugena | with biack arrows you have saved the tree. With these [nouns |, the termination of the instrumental plural is ehim, as in asiehim jena viinna maccu ignehi(asitath yena vikirnah mytyur isubhih] by whom death has been scattered with black arrows. Note: See Pu. XVII. 47, 48 ; Mk. XVII, 24, 25. 17. The syllable € 18 also used in the feminine as the termination of the locative singular as in naie [nadyam] ०८५6 [vadhvam]. In the vocative, the termination is he as in vanihe [vanij], vahuhe [vadhu}. In this dialect it is explained that the final vowel of a bases in 7 and च, is also shortened in the locative 145 Nagara Apabhraméga | IIL. 1. 18-21 plural. In other respects these nouns are declined as explained above. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 49 ; Mk, XVII. 26, 27, 9. 18. In all three genders the syllable ho may be added in the nominative plural [instead of the he, i and wu prescribed in verse 10 and 11 | as in vanaho [vanani], naiho [nadyah] and gandhaveaho [gandharvah\, In this dialect we also have forms such as १770८८00 and the like. The pronouns kim, yad वोत tad form their nominative, accusative and locative as in Maharastri. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 52, Mk. XVII. 28, 30. 19. The following [masculine] forms are accordingly used [for kim]--+---nom sg, ko, nom. pl. ke, acc. sg. kam, acc. pl. ke, loc. sg. kaim, loc. pl. kesu. Similarly for yad and tad. They teach that the same forms are employed for the feminine and_ the neuter. In this dialect [the termination of} the genitive singular is sw, with the vowel of the base lengthened. Its form is therefore kasu, Another form is kas, and another opinion gives kassu, So also the feminine and neuter. Similar are the forms of yard and tad. Furthermore they explain jadrwm and tadrum 85 optional forms of the accusative singular. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 54, 55.Mk. XVII. 30, 31. See notes on 20 below. 20. In this dialect jadru and tadru may respectively be the corresponding locative singular and genitive singular of these two words. The nominative and accusative singular of wdam is imu, but this is not used in the feminine, The same two cases of adas are amu, and they teach that the same word is used as the declensional base, to which the case terminations are added. It is the opinion of the learned that the declensional base of etad in all three genders, is eha-. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 56, 57, 60; Mk. XVII. 34, 36, 37, 38; forms like 1427४ and ८22 are possibly misreading respectively for jahu and taku. 21. For the nominative and accusative singular [ of etad ], they describe the entire set of forms as cho, ehu, eha and ehe ; and ehe is also used in the locative singular. The nominatives P—19 IIT. i. 22-25 | Prakrta-kalpataru 146 singular of yad and tad are respectively ye and se. In addition to the forms given above, [ the nomination singular | of etad is also e. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 61, 62; Mk. XVII. 39, 40, 22. The nominative singualr of yusmad is ttiham and the nominative and accusative plural is (11104147. The instrumental and accusative and locative singular all take the form paim. The instrumental plural is ¢wmhahim, ‘There are considered to be three forms of the ablative and genitive singular, viz. tumbha, tumhe, tuht and in addition to these we sometimes find tumbha. Notes: See Pu XVII. 63,64; Mk. XVII. 41, 42, 48, 44 and 45, 46. 23. The nominative singular of asmad is said to be ham, and the nominative and accusative plural is amhaim. Its instru- mental, accusative and locative singular is maim. Three forms are recorded for the instrumental plural, viz. amhahim, amhehi and amie. The ablative and genitive singular are described as maha, majjha or majjhw in the genitive singular | in addition to these three | we also have amha, In the genitive plural we optionally have 210. [0 the ablative plural we optionally have amha and 10 the locative plural we have ahmasu or almasu, Notes: See Pu. XVII. 65, 66, 67; Mk. XVII. 48, 49, 5', 52, 53, 54, 55. 24, In this dialect there are at will peculiar elisions of vowels in the union of hases with suffixes. As examples of this, I now proceed to give a few specimens. Note: See Pu. XVII. 68: Mk. XVII. 56. 25. If there is an elision [ of the final vowel of the base | we have rulkha or rukkhaw or rukkho [ vksah ] When we have the addition of a vowel we have a[ sentence such as hoijjai ( for hoyjat) kkhu sugho deivvaho devvaho | Uhavet द्य sukhah daiwat | Or there may be interchange of forms, as in balaw or balau ete. for balao [ balah see ४. 11 ] Such are peculiarities of vowels as described by the learned, Notes: See Mk. XVII. 56, 147 Nagara Apabhraméa [ IIT. i, 26-30 26. The Atmanepada voice of verbs is not used. The termination of the third person singular and of the first person plural are di and hum respectively asin so hasedi hasahum na amhaim [| sa hasati, husamo na vayam 1]. The first and second persons singular are the same as the original [ Sanskrit | Notes: See Pu. XVII. 70, 71 ; Mk. XVII, 57, 58. 27. The first person plural has [ the termination ma} as in pellijjama hatthi kanhem [| patayamah hastih krsnena | The termination of the first person plural is mha, and @ in root will be €, 85 in dhanaim demha [dhanani dadmah]_ I shall give wealth. The termination of the second person singular is also optionlly Ai as in dehi dhana@im tasu (dadasi dhanani tasmaz |. The termination of the second person plural is hu as in tumhe tulahu ppaasu [ yiyam tvarayata prayasam | Note: The reconstruction of this stanza is mostly conjectural. 28. The suffix of the future is thi is isu as in balaw ehu hasihii, ehu hasisai Kanha [ balaka esa hasisyati, esa hasisyats Kyrsnah |. Sometimes we also have such a form as hossai | bha- visyati | and for the root ॥ in the first person plural, the base of the future is ka [so that we get kahima | Notes: See Pu. XVII. 73, 74, 75 ; Mk. XVII. 59. 60, 61. 99-30. The following are the dhatradesas [in Apabhraméa] : sthazthakka, tha; pra-vis=parsara ; a-slis=arunda ( Grunna ? ) ; dpgzdekkha, passa; darsaya=dakkha, darasa; tum=timma, sthapaya=thava, thavva; vraj=ranca; grah=gunha; muc= mukka, mua, maulla; vad=volla; kyskara; anaya=anava ; acaks=alkha. The present participle is used [ as a finite verb | in all three tenses present, past and future. Notes: See Pu. XVII. 77, 78. 79, 80, 81,84; Mk. XVII. 67, 71, 72. 64, 65, 75, 76, 70. Mk’'s text on 71. and 64 seems to be based on corrupt sources. Sec also Pu. XVII. 76, 82, 85, 86, 87, 88; Mk. XVIJ. 68, 74, 68, 64, 77, Til. i. 31 3 ii. 1-4 | Prakrta-kalpataru 148 81, The following Apabhraméa words occur in the meanings respectively set before them: tvam=tomme ; tesam stanna; adhuna=muehi (2) ; amilbhih=ehim ; dur=dur ; tri=tinni ; catur=cari. ‘The intelligent can find examples of these in the poems of the old poet. Notes: 20107 and cir? gives rise respectively to NIA. ८1 ( ¢in ), and cir. Here ends the Posy on Nagara Apabhraméa. III. ii. Wracada Apabramsa 1. We now proceed to describe the Apabhraméa 3128 called ‘Vraicada’ which is current in the Sindhu country. Its basis is recorded as being nothing but Nagara, especially when no definite rule is Jaid down for it. Notes: See Pu. XVIII.1; Mk. XVIII. 1. The etymology of the word vvacada is not known. It is possibiy a pseudo-Skt. form of vacada ( =vaccala=*vratyaka, the despised Vratya ). Grammarians usually connect this with Sindh ( Sindhu ). 2. Only the palatal $ may be used in place of $ ands. In this dialect an original + or ris preserved except in the word bhrtya and others. When the letters ८ [ including ch | andj | including 1 ? ] are doubled, the semi-vowel y is prefixed 88 in girisa-bhiycchu lahia vayjje [ giriga-bhytyo labdhva vajyam ], the servant of Siva ( Giriga ) having got the kingdom. Notes: See Pu. XVIII. 2, 3,4; Mk. XVIII 3, 4, 2. 3. There can be no elision of { medial ]d@ or [ substitution of h | for [ medial ] क, the initial £ and क becomes respectively] tandd, In this dialect, the word sojji is used as the equivalent of the Skt. satva, and as regards khadgah it becomes khandu. Notes: See Pu. XVIII. 6, 7; Mk, XVIII. 5, 6, 7, hands is connected with Mod. Beng. wir 4. The following are the dhatvadegas [in Vracada Ap. ] bhi bho, but bha with kta ( past participle ) or after pra ete, bru 149 ॥ Vricada Apabhraméa. | ITT. ५. 5-8 bro ; 6 virha, Other roots are provided for by Sanskrit and by the Sauraseni ard Maharastri Bhasas, Notes: Sce Pu. XVIII. 8, 9, 10, 12, Mk. XVIII. 8, 10.9, 11. 9. Upanigara [ Ap. ] is a speech intermediate between these two dialects ( ६. and M. ) Now about Takkiand Saindhava Apabhramégas which exist ( lit. rule ) characterised by the peculiarities of the people Paiicala ( i.e. Saurasenj ) Notes: See Pu. XVIII, 14, 15;Mk. XVIII. 18. The second hem. is omitted in Grierson’s ms. 6. Ifthe Takki Vibhasa formerly described, (III, xii. 27 ff.) is mixed up with the three kinds of Apabhraméa-Nagara and so on-, it is called Takka Apabhraméga, and is spoken in the Takka country where examples of it are to be sought for. Notes: See Pu. XVIII. 16; Mk. in his comm. on XVIII. 12, quotes to difine other Apabhraméas the following :— तु-बहला मालय । बाङडौ-बहला पश्चालौ। | oomara बेदभोः। संबोधनाश्चा art दकारोकार-बहला Vit! ates रकक्षयो। सुमाखाच्या whey) ङकारवहला कौन्तलौ | एकारिणौ च प्राण्डया। gman Seats feger कालिङ्गी। प्राच्या तदभौय-भाषाश्या । भद्रयादि-बहला भभौर । बयविपययात्‌ कार्णटौ । मध्यदेभीया agian: सप्तत श्या. च गौष्लरो। च-कारात्‌ पूर्वोक्त-टकङ्-भाषायडणम्‌ । रल््भ्यां wade द्राविडौ । ठकार बहला aaa | wisely Aral. 7. Just as writers have in the first place told of the various kinds of Apabhramga—Nagara, Vracada, and so on—as described herein, so if we class them according to special characteristics, there are twenty others, viz, Pancalika and so on. 8. It has been said in this regard that Pancalika is distin- guished by the frequency with which it uses the terminations 2 and di. In Magadhi (Malavi ?) the word tu is frequently used. Vaidarbhi is full of the pleonastic terminations alla. (ulla ?). Lati is. remarkable for the number of interjections of address. Notes: See Pu. XVIII. 18, 19. Possibly RT.’s text requires here emendation. Magadhi here is possibly a wrong reading for Malavi. See notes on 6 above. IIL. ii. 9-13 ] Prakrta-kalpataru 150 9, Audri is described as noteworthy for the predominance 07 8०१ ०(@?). In Kaikeyi words are comygnonly repeated to express continuation, distribution ete. Gaudi is rich in com- pound words. Kauntali, forsooth, abounds in the pleonastic suffix qa. | Notes: Sce Pu. XVIII. 20, 21, 22. See notes on 6 above. 10. Pindya has been described as full of the letter e. Saippal ( Saimhali ? ) is rich in compound consonants. Kalingi is replete with the syllable him. But Pracya is dependent on the words so and vatta (i.e. uses them profusely). Note: Sea notes on 6 above. Grierson’s reading soratta 18 evidently wrong. Vatta here is probably (root) of the forerunners of modern Eastern dialects like Bhojpuria and Avadhi, which have forms like Latom, batem data, batas ete. all going back to vatta. 11. Abhiriké commonly uses titles of respect, such us bhattaka and so forth. Karnati is distinguished by the change otf of the letter # [0१] { or by the metathesis of + | But Madhyadegya employs only the desya word. Gaurjari is full of Sanskrit words. Note: See notes on 6 above. 12. Dravidiis distinguished by the change of J [ for r | [or by metathesis of 1]. Paécitya is distinguished by the mutual interchange of + and J, Vaitaliki is full of the letter 4 But Kaiici is described as having irregularly the letters € and 0. Note: See notes on 6 above. 13. There is also another system of classifying the various kinds of Apabhramsa, viz. according to its use of the degya words of each particular country in which it is spoken. This 1s not shown in detail in the present work, as it is very difficult to determine the division according to this classification. Here ends the Posy on Vracada Apabhraméa in the Instruction of Prakrit. III. iii. Paisacika 1, The Puaisgacika falls into two groups viz. Suddha Paigacika or ‘Pure Paigacika’ and Sumkirna Paisacika, or Mixed Paigacika. Of these the first group of seven is ‘Pure’ and the remain group of four is ‘Mixed, Notes: See Vr. 3. 1; Pu. XIX. 1. Vr. does not expressly mention in his siitras which kind of Pé it is; but it seems that he describes only the general charactcristics of all the dialects known under the name. Aceording to Bhamaha ( comm. on Vr. >. 2 and 11 )S. is the basis of Pg. 2. Kaikeya Paisacika is now described. The modifications observed in its established form are based on Sanskrit and Sauraseni. In it, in all cases the first and second consonants of the groups [ of stops |( ie. surds ) are to be substituted, respec- tively, for the third and fourth ( १.९. sonants ) Notes: See Vr. X.2; Pu. XIX, 3.4. Mk. X1X. 2. 3. > वतात्‌. (5) ms. योही for याह, (9) ms. not clear (14) ms. शाक्य ( ख not clear) (20) 108. द इ for ev’. (24) ms. ewifes in हिध्यादिषु. (29) This stitra probably means that the roots ending in @. change this vowel to ¢ before the terminations mentioned in 28 above. optionally have @ before mz. See (38) ms. Tq, (35) Tr. One may (86) ms. न्तमानन्तौ for araret. 161 Prakrtanugisana [ सप्तमो ऽभ्यायः-- धात्वादेशः | भवतेर्‌ हो -हूवो ei eee: पेच्छ-पुर-णिभ-गिभच्छ-जोषाः ॥१७॥ ते हुः ॥२॥ oad ठंस ॥१८॥ भष्तेर अच्छ 113K वृषादीनाम्‌ जरसो ऽरिः ॥१९॥ इ-ति-मि-मो-मेः सह अल्थि-सि. म्ि-म्दे- अन्तेऽरः ॥२०॥ FET ॥४॥ हसादेर आदिदीषघः ॥२१॥ SA: BHM sit festa ठा-ढाओ ॥२२॥ का-तु'-तघ्प्र-मूत-मविष्यव्छ का ॥६॥ नयतेर्‌ णे Uy निष्ठायां कः Wet छातेर्‌ ठे ॥२४॥ #'प्रहेर्‌ गेण्डू-हिण्णो ctl एष धायतेर्‌ क्षा- क्षयो NaN तादो QT ।।९॥। श्रणोत्यादेः छणाद्यः ॥२६॥ नका-जिष्ट्रोर गिर्‌ च ॥१०॥ माव-कमणोः श्रगोत्याषैर यका सह eat Fa: समुदुम्धां वे्धः।॥ ११॥ छत्वादयो वा ५२७ दाघो दे दिघ्यादिवतेमानयोः ert *दहेर SPAT ॥२८॥ *विनश्च चिणः sa घे च ।१३॥ गमू्‌-रम्‌-मणादे २ अन्त्यद्वित्वम्‌ URE ate: किणः षेः के च।।१४॥। ad दुह-शिष्-वष्ां gea-fesa-qsat: ॥३०। #षट्ो एणः उत्‌-पूर्वाल. AT! ॥१५॥ क्ता-तं-तव्येषु AT भोदादयः ॥३१॥ भियो भा-विहो weg निष्ठान्ता दिण्णाद्‌यः 113211 पुरुषोत्तमघ्व प्राङृतसृन्रे महाराष्टी-घातुपरिणामः सप्तमोऽध्यायः समाप्तः | Notes: (3) Vr. lacks. (8) ms. feet, em.is mine. (10) Vr. lacks. ( 2) Vr. lacks. (13) 108. चैः for 2 &. (14) ms. वे &. (15) ms. gag x x x gare, =. (17) ms. eSat for man. (18) Vr. lacks but ef. IV. 5. (23) Vr. lacks. (24) Vr. lacks. (28) ms. ददर gs: The em. is mine. The Nepali scribe seems to have read w# for da, and deaspirated 144, Vr. lacks. (30) Vr. lacks. भष्टमोऽभ्यायः- निपाताः |] निपाताः wei पिव-मिव-विव-व-ठ्वम्‌-अ-कारा इवाथ ॥ ८॥ faa Ga क ५२॥ घ-वा विकल्पाथोः ॥९॥ हु शु खटु-शब्दाथ ॥३॥ देजेरेजिषि व पादपूरणे ॥४॥ ४! णौ “a 7 इनरथं ॥१०॥ or निषे ५९॥ णवर ered ॥६॥ ६ क्षो आमन्त्रणे ॥११॥ x TARY orate Wet शोषं BEHATT ॥१२॥ भहमोऽध्यायः ।॥ इति पुरषोलतम-इतो प्राङृतायुक्लासनसत्रे महाराषटरीभाषा समाप्ता ॥ Notes: (5) Vr. lacks, but the stitra is superfluous. (7) ms. waa: (9) Vr. lacks, but the sitra is superfluous. (J1) Vr. lacks. P—21 Appenprx 1. 162 | नवमोऽध्यायः-शोरसेनी ¡ भथ शोरसेनी ॥१॥ संस्टृतानुगमाहु बहुम्‌ ॥२॥ शेषे महाराष्ट ।३॥ भागधेयं पंसि च ॥३५॥ गोणः ws च ॥३९॥ सन्धिः संस्कृतबहुषटम्‌ 113411 ल्वादो(1) tert पुनरप्याथं gif पुणोवि ॥३७॥ नाङ्गारादाव्‌ EETSTAA GI कवा-स्यपोर इअः ॥३८॥ दशादौ ॥६॥ कृत्वा-गत्वा कदुअ-गहूभ ॥३९॥ तथा ATTRA: श%णोत्यादैर्‌ नं SATA: ॥७॥ त्व-तछोर्‌-दात्तणौ ।॥४०॥ HAUT युजादेस्‌ तं-तज्ययोनं भोदादयः MTA णिच आवष-अवे ॥४१॥ *भयुजाम्‌ अनादौ तथपफां दधबमा बहुखम्‌- wae दो दीर्घश्‌. वात्‌ कंववित्‌ ea अपताका-घ्यापृत-गभितेषु ॥९॥ ५कारणान्तङतेर्‌ भात्‌ ॥४३॥ HET घः ॥१०।। पत्य धः ॥११।। BET भः ॥१२॥ भरते तो धः ॥१३॥ द-ध-व-याः प्रत्या WPI दधाव अष्पष्टम्‌ Seay ॥ १९॥ अदितो च यवत्‌ ॥१६॥ ककारः प्रुत्याऽपदनिकादेः ॥ १५७॥ 404 क्-न्प्ानां OOTY वा ॥१८॥ HEA णश्च ॥१९॥ भार्यादो न र्व ज्जः ॥२०॥ श्रा दिषु क्षस्य खः ॥२१॥ दृश-चतुदंश्षयोः शस्य SY वा ॥२२॥ ल नाभ्नि हः ॥२३॥ भश्रुणि वाष्पस्य वप्फ-वाहो ॥२४॥ #"अपू्ंल्याऽवरूवं घा ॥२९॥ इदानी दाणि पदान्ते . २६॥ हृस्थी farar: ren एवघ्य TAG ॥२८॥ हवस्य विः ॥२९॥ ATRACATSSUA ॥३०॥ #शात्रहनादिषु सपुादयः ॥२१॥ तावक-म।मकादेः ॥३२॥ arferfearza: ॥३३॥ हिन्तो भ्यसः ॥४४॥ भदन्ताच्‌ BAY जआण avis ॥४९॥ +BT एत्‌ ॥४६॥ #इदुदन्ताहु भो गो च जन्शसौरेक- Sta Weel frat जश्‌-शसोर्‌ ओत्‌ ॥४८॥ टा-ड्सु-ङिष्व्‌ एत्‌ est सवंनान्नश्च ॥५०॥ कि-यत्‌-तद्धयो डेर-हि-ल्वि-त्थाः ॥५१॥ #पसि Z1-Sais TAT ॥५२॥ षष्ठ्यन्तस्य ag afcaat से च ॥९३॥ पदस्य ॥५४॥। इदमः सा भयं GG अमि णं च SEU इमाणम्‌ अमि ॥९५७॥ afcag gafea च छो ॥९८॥ स्याम्‌ श्यं सो ॥९९॥ Bla स्वमोर इदं इमं च ॥६०॥ एतद्‌ varol भमि ॥६१॥ युष्मत्‌ CAMA तुमं ॥६२॥ ढो तह तए gat SEATS हं सो ।॥६४॥। शेषं तु महराष्रीढक्षणादिद्युक्तमेव Wes gfe पुरुषोत्तमशृतो प्राङृतीनुशासने शोरसेन्या वन्तपरिष्ठेदुः | 1839 Prakrtanusdsana धातोः परल्मेप प्रायः ॥६९॥ वाभो देः ॥५९॥ तिप्‌-क्षि-सिप्‌-थ-मिप्‌-मसां fe-fea-fa- भविष्यति दुहः licol| ध-मि-म्डाः ॥६६॥ तु"-तव्ययोर दा ॥८१॥ हि-दित्सा भविष्यति ।६७॥ वायां दः ॥८२।॥ यकि दीः wean हकारे अत हदु वा ।६८॥ HA: करः ॥८४। ल्सस्यास्वं मिपि ॥६९॥ तु. तत्ययोः काः ॥८९॥ संयोगे मिपो बिन्दुश्च ॥५७०॥ fasafag: ॥८६॥ विध्यादौ तिपृ-क्चि-लिपां दु-न्तु- 110701 उस्तिष्टतेश्त्थः ॥८७।। सिपो fe ।५२॥ प्रगण्डः Neen BE चादन्तात्‌ 19311 यका ae गेजक-येप्पौ धा ॥८९॥ धातोस्‌ farang पद भातो बहुम्‌ NOV शाक्ते; Geet eel थक इभः ॥।७९॥ इअ-हज्यो च ।॥५७६।। एव ATONE इः ॥९१। HAG त-व्य-भविष्यत्स्व्‌ Cell श्रणोत्यादेः उणादयः ॥९२॥ भवतेर्‌ भो भवो बहुम्‌ ॥५८॥ शेषं प्रयोगतः ERI इति पुरुषोत्तमहृतो प्राङ्ृवानुशाशने शोरसेनीषूत्रं समातम्‌ | Notes : (4) This sitrais obscure It seems that thishas been misplaced and should go before 42 below. (8) ms. Wiztea:, (9) ms. तथपफवभा० and गगवितिषु, The de-aspiration observed in case of VII. 24 occurs here too in the reading गवितिषु (vice गभितिषु ). (18) 3 should be emended to ख as suggested by Nitti. (25) The form avaruvam gives rise to New Bengali pseudu-Skt. afartupa (31) ms. aay for Uv. (43) ms. कारणान्त STA. (45) ms. भदन्ताच्छस।. इ1ण्डाशश्च, The em. is mine. Here is undue aspiration in case of as ५ 8 wie wae. (46) 08.डन्त, (47) ms. कादुदन्ताद्‌ ste. (52) ms, ofa areafg. [ दशमोऽध्यायः --प्राच्या | अथ प्राच्या 117 1) HACAISTBA ॥८॥ भवतः सो भवं zt #होत्थमाणो भविष्यति ॥९॥ TACT भोदी ॥३॥ एवाथ प्येष-विभ-चेआः ॥१०॥ इुहितरि धीदा ivi भारे सम्बुदुययेक्षयोः ।।११। #हीनसम्बुदाष्‌ भात्‌ ॥९॥ +अविद्‌ विद्‌ निदे ॥१२॥ हणं बेवुम्थं ।६॥ +लोकोक्तयो बहूरम्‌ 110311 OS CECH ।७॥ शेषे शौरसेनी ॥१४॥ इति पुरषोतमछतो प्राङृतानुक्षासने प्राच्या-नाम-माषासूत्रं समाम्‌ | Notes: (5) ms. होनसम्बहधाब्ररे, (7) 708, tH age. The em. is mine. The scribe has evidently this read the Bengali उ ( as ङ (%). (9) ms, होकखलाषो, The @ of the ms. very often is written as ख, (12) ms. Sz. (13) ms, लोकोक्तर्यीवइलम्‌, AprenDix I. 164 [ दकदिकषोऽध्यायः- भवन्ती | भथाबन्ती महाराौ शोरसेर्थोरोकष्यम्‌ ॥ १॥ श्रणोष्यादेयंका सह छडक्राद्यः ॥६॥ भे रेफरोपो धा urn भविष्यत्‌काटे श्रणोत्यदिमिपा सोच्छ- #*त-कारो बहुं CATT: ॥३॥ मादयश्च ॥५॥ #'त-तिपोरज्जज्जा मवति भविता ? भुषो टो होह ॥८॥ भविष्यतीति चाथ wen विशेषतोऽनन्तरं वध्यते तद्यथा ॥९॥ धातुतिङोर्‌ मध्ये च ॥९॥ *"तव-ममयोस्‌ FE महू च ॥१०॥ इति पुरुषोत्तमस्य प्राङ्तानुशा[घने] भावन्तीभाषासुप्रं समक्षम्‌ | Notes: (2) ms. टरैरकनोपो ; see RT. II. 2, 6. (3) ms. शकारो (n. त्‌ कारो). ms. तितिपोर and भवचा भविष्यति तिचा (10) ms. 4¥for वृह ; ` [ ह्ादशोऽध्यायः- मागधी | अथ मागधो क्षोरतेनीकषः प्रायः ue धसतौ Tad? ॥२०॥ TIT सषोः शः ॥२॥ पुरषे gfe: ॥२१॥ षः प्रत्या कचित्‌ ॥३॥ कोष्णादीरनां कोशषिणादयः ।॥२२॥ रो छः ।॥४॥ ही विघ्मयोपहासङ्शकेषु 112311 ज-क्षयोर FRY IG लेके अले चाक्षेपसम्भाषणयोः ।२४॥ TACT इकः ।।६।। भदन्तसोर्‌ geet पसि ॥२९॥ म क्खोः lisit | लक्‌ च च्छन्दोवश्चात्‌ ॥२६।। क्षस्य संयोगवेपरीत्यज्न tei "ङसो हत्वं वा DATA: ॥२७॥ UST: तष्टो ॥९॥ पक्षे Sa: स्ख ए च ॥२८॥। तष्ट्योः कचित्‌ ।।१०॥ AFSL एदोतो ।२९॥ च्छस्य श्वः ULL भाद्‌ वाक्षेपे ।॥३०॥ #धस्य इः कचित्‌ । १२॥ TAY CH इगे S's URL चुः STVATSSA: PSI युष्मानित्यथं gre" च ॥३२॥ निषेधबाहुल्यच्च 281) fasta fag: ॥३३।। संधो दाणिन्न 1124! नकृषेर्‌ APTA NAVI क्च विटु इत्‌ ।।१६॥ लटि युवो gaa ।३५॥ कनि ae: gi Sa: कषप्पः 113 उदु भवापयोः ॥१८॥ क-ट-गमां क-म-गाः GET GAM वा ।३५।। अधुनाथ॑ऽहुणि ॥१९॥ xcyaas [व] छोपश्च ।\३८॥ भरी पुरषो मदेवस्य प्राहकृतसूत्रे मागधीमाषा समाप्ता । Notes: (12) ms, wa @ कचित्‌, Here Ja is evidently a wrong reading for ha, hence I make the emendation. (27) ms. ¥@ @aadiawea. The emendation is mine, (29) ma. awet. This is also a case of de-as- piration in the ms. (34) ms. एदे शशं ) (88) ms. 7148 लोपक, The em. 18 mine. 165 Prakrtinusisana [ लयो्शोऽध्यायः-शाकारी | कथ शाकारी विभाषाविक्ेषो मागध्याः ॥१॥ BATES ATT eH दुषप्रक्ष-सशक्षयोः MET FAY वा ॥२॥ छोपागमविकारश्च वर्णानां बहुलम्‌ ॥१०॥ @: श्टः ॥२॥। ठ्यत्ययश्च छप्‌. तिङ्‌ स्वराणाम्‌ ॥११॥ #बिषटरघ्य [ 23: J ॥४॥ CART टुक्‌ च ॥१२॥ SY: THAT च ॥६॥ संयोगे गुरस्व घा Patt care हिआषटः ei अपार्थम्‌ अक्रमं व्यथ Gag हतोपमम्‌ | हृदयस्य frase ॥७॥ स्यायकार्या दिबाद्चन्च इाकारवचनं भवेत्‌ ॥१४॥ हवल्य Sag ॥८॥ #य्‌-चभिश्‌ शकारभाकायाम्‌ ।१५॥ इति पुरषोत्तमदेषङ़ तो प्रा तानुशासने शाकारीभाषा- सूत्रं समाम्‌ । Notes: (4) ms. विष्टरस्य x The emendation is mine. (10) Nitti's em. does not seem to be indispensable. (15) ms. azfg. The em. 18 mine. The meaning is that a y is to be pronounced with letters of the ca group. | चतुदेशोऽध्यायः-- चाण्डालो | भथ चाण्डारी मागधीविृतिः ee घः ITNT NEN भतः घोर्‌ ओदएतो ॥२॥ हवस्य धश्च ॥७॥ हसः शः ॥३॥ | few डः in ता इयः ॥<॥ 28: WHEAT वा GH #प्राभ्योक्तयो TESA ॥९॥ पुरषोत्तम देवस्य प्राकृतायुक्ासने वाण्डा्टीभाषासुत्रं TATA | Notes: (7) 1008. एवस्य वच्च, The em. is mine. (9) ms. ग्राम्यो क्योग्हलम्‌, [ पञ्चदशोऽध्यायः -शाबरो | शाबरी च arte वः प्रहृत्या ॥१॥ सोक च ॥९॥ ewer aR अहमयं हके हव nan = eer सम्बुद्धौ नित्यम्‌ भगौरवे ngn क$एदितो सौ een प्रायो Seite: ei इति पुरषोल्तमकृतौ प्राकृ तानुकश्षासने क्ाबरीमावासृत्रं समाक्षम्‌ । Notes: (4) ms, efaf. (6) ms. का aay नित्यम्‌, ^+ एत्र I. 166 [ षोडशोऽध्यायः- राङ्क | भथ उक्षदेक्षीया विभाषा संस्छृतकशौरतेन्योः॥१॥ ^व्वम्समा्थेु qe इमं ( इसु' ) ॥५॥ उद्‌ बहुरम्‌ ॥२॥ ए" च टान्तघ्य ॥३॥ यथा-तथोर्‌ जिध-तिधो ॥८॥ #+"भ्यसो इं हु"व vil शेषं प्रयोगात्‌ ॥९॥ भामो वा ॥९॥ #'हरिश्रन्द्रस्त्विमां रक्षभाषामपभ्‌ 'शभिश्छति at ( सर्वादिषु च † ) nat न प्राकृतम्‌ ॥१०॥ श्री पुर्षोतमल्य हतो प्राृतानुश्चासनसूत्रम्‌ इति । Notes; (4) ms. qa for भ्यसो. (7) 08, लं इ BAU तुङ्ग. (10) ms. in भपभ' गमिरेति 18 indistinct in some letters. [ सप्तदशोऽध्यायः-नागरप्र्ंशः | अथातोऽपश्ंशानुक्षाघनम्‌ तत्र नागरकः Wei = TR URN व्यत्ययो शिङ्कानाम्‌ ॥२१॥ शषोः सः ॥२॥ यत्य जः ॥३। SHAEEAM ॥२२॥ नो णः WI भ्यावत्तावतोजिम-विमौ URI GT: स्वरशेषता UI भूत-हत्य्थं भृष्टः ॥२४॥ पोबः॥६॥ न्को भः॥५॥ कह-किप्रदु-किप्र-कि(की)राः wera हः ॥८॥ पञ्चामी किमर्थे ॥२५॥ #प्रकटादाव AAT आत्वं AT ॥९॥ gard ण णह णाव णं जिम जणि ॥२६॥ गृध्ादेः अत इत्वम्‌ ॥१०॥ HSE पादपूरणे ॥२७।। खेदे वहः ॥२८॥ ओद्‌ भौतः ॥११॥ हषच्छन्दादो छच्छन्दाद्यः ॥२९॥ अडः पौरषादिषु ॥१२॥ वदीयमदीययोस्‌ हुम्भाराम्भारौ ॥३०॥ +अनादावयुजां कखतथां MATT वा ॥१३॥ वदाद्यो देष्याम्‌ ALM भव्यासादीनामादेर अधो रः ॥१४॥ एविण्वेपिष्वेप्येवयः कषः ॥३२॥ र-ऋतो प्रया च ॥१९॥ इदिभो Sag aera च्छन्दोवशात्‌ 112 Kt प्पिप्पिणृष्‌ ओ च mea: ।३४॥ अजरो च वटुम्‌ PII भू-गमि-हलां भो-गं-करा विमाषा adit HAIFA श्षसृश्षयोर्‌ डा ULC «qd arog’ अणि पष्प र्यां fe: ॥१९॥ एप्पिण-एवयः [ वुम-प्रस्यये च ] ॥३६॥ Notes: (7) ms. डो भः, (9) ms, भात्वम्‌वा, (18) ms. अनाद्ावयुजम्‌, (14) ms. wef for wit. (18) ms, wwatfor शस्यो, | (1) ms. व्यत्यये. (23) ms. जिमतमौ, the em. is mine. (25) Nitti’s em. seems 10 be mistaken. (36) ms. एद ० for wa’, The bracketed part wrongly put after 68 below. Henee my em. See He- 4, 441. 167 इण्वत्‌ तव्यः 113 11 इअग्वड" eqs’ च BAe ॥३८॥ सणु-प्यण-दास्‌ त्व -तङो; ॥३९॥ उषः SHY ॥४०॥ भतः CAAT TET Uv LUI feat अश्शतसोरउस्वञ्च yz भिस्छपोहि' ।४३॥ हेहो च ङ्तेः ॥४४॥ इं हु" वामः ॥४५॥ अषुष्तात्‌ टा-भिष्‌-इत्‌-ङिः घु प्राकृतवश्च Vall atexat ट एणश्न eel भिस ofeach ज्ियामेश रः esi कहे च हसः ॥९०॥ सम्बोधनबहुस्वे हो ॥९१॥ कि-यत्‌ वदां प्रथमाद्वितीयासक्षमीषु पराङ्तवत्‌ ॥९२॥ टादौ तु पु्ीषयोः ॥९३॥ wa: एर्तत्र दीघां वा ॥५४।। meaty भमि चर प्र व ॥५५॥ छत्‌-क्योजश्र त्रु TAG #ल्वमोरिवम इमु" भ शदशयोः ॥९७। ay च ete uci अन्यदेमः ॥९९॥ एतदु TE! ॥६०॥ त्वमोरणएहु एहो च ॥६१॥ धत्‌-तदेतवां सो जे से ए ॥६२॥ gra: सो ge ।६३॥ Prakrtauusasana जदशयोस्‌ FFE ॥६४॥ भिसि पुम्देहि ॥६९॥ [ भष्पदः ] भम्‌-टा-डिषु मह naan मह-महु'-मन््ष-षो डसि igen प्रृतिप्रययसन्धो बहुलम्‌ भजोपः ॥६८॥ तुमप्रस्यये च ({) ee इति पुरषोत्तमल्याश्नंशानुशासने ब विधिः | क्धातवः परस्मेपदिनः tot तिप्‌ at aa मघो इ च eet विध्यादौ सिप ददु द्‌-हिकाराश्च ल्य हुश्च Wert ages दि oan इसश्च weevil मति कृञः Bra: ॥७९॥ ABSA शत्‌ ॥५६॥ fasta क्कश्च ।७७॥ तिमेस्‌ सिम्मश्र सृक्मान्तराघ्तु पाञ्चाछादयो छोकसः | १६॥ तधौ वास्प्ो ।॥९॥ क्य (१) go उट प्राया वेदभीः ween पदादा तडयोः टौ च ।।६॥ सम्बोधनादया Bret te SH + खड्गस्य खण्डः {1911 #हकारोक्रारप्रायो aE ॥२०॥ जे-जि-प्रेवस्य ॥८॥ सवीष्साप्राया केकेयी ॥२१॥ भवते भोऽप्रादो ॥९॥ भक्तो भूः ॥१०॥ +ब्रहुसमासा गौडी ॥२२॥ AAA GA ॥११॥ षृषेर वष्टेः ।॥१२॥ ed टक्क-वषर-ङुम्तर-पाण्डय-सिंवरादिमाषा शेषं प्रयोगात्‌ ॥१३॥ SRA WI इति algatlaacarainigaratga समष्ठम्‌ | Notes: (1) ms: अधा, (7) ms. खड्गस्य, The em. is mine. (10) ms. क्त भ;. (11) ms. व्रर्‌ वञ्च, (16) ms, quran. (20) ms. sarciait-arat लट, The em. is mine. Sec Mk. comm. on XVIII. 19. (21) ms. सवीप्साप्रायौ. The em. is mine. (22) ms. ऋसमा गौडो, The em. is mine, Seethe note on 20 above. (23) ms. e@H amce, The em. is mine. Nitti also suggested it. [ ऊनबिशोऽभ्यायः-ककयपेशाचिकम्‌ | +*अथाततः पेशाचिकम्‌ ॥१॥ नएूथिव्याः पृथुमी ॥१४॥ नत्र GSAT ॥२॥ विस्मयस्य flare’ ॥१९॥ सष्छृतश्ोरष्न्यो विकृतिः ॥३॥ गृहस्य किहकम्‌ ॥१६॥ +अयुक्तानां गजडदबानां कचटतपा age, wiv तिरश्च तिरिभ` च gen MSNA खचछठथफाः ।९६। exaea हितपकम्‌ ei +*"कलखच [छ ]टटतथपफाः WHAT ।॥६॥ वस्य पिष ॥ १९॥ ABATT AT वान्यत्र 11011 कचित्‌ Safa: ॥२०॥ mach युक्तानां विकर्षः nen तत्रा तूनं ॥२ १॥ न्यज्ञण्यानां न्नः ॥१०। टा-ङति-ङमप्‌ feg राक्षो राविर्षा ॥२२॥ पेम सूद्मयोः पलमदलमो ।॥११। कयुथ-वयम्ं FPR AH च ॥२३॥ dea fier ॥१२॥ eqeem fee ॥१२।। ade हो-हुषो uel समाप्तम्‌ इवं केकेयं ara पेशाविकम्‌ । Notes: (1) ms, धतोः. (2) ms. तव्र॒कंक्षिय, (4) ms, Sgwe, (6) ms. श्पफः tor TT. (7) ms. area for चान्यव, The em. is mine This probably means that these sounds sometimes undergo usual Prakritic changes too. (18) ms घस्य fasr The em.is mine (14) ms. aud, em. 18 mine. (23) ms. ययव्रयमर्थे, 169 Prakrtanusasana [ विशोऽभ्यायः- शोर सेनपैशाचिकम्‌ | क्थ शोरतेनम्‌ ULI #HA-TA गतानां कड-भड-गडाः ॥११॥ रो छः ॥२।। अधुनादेरहुणाद्यः UL षोः शः ॥३॥ र्‌ आक्षेपे ॥१३॥ चुर्‌ घ्यक्ततारढ्यः et अदन्तात्‌ सोर्‌ ओत्‌ UPI क्षस्य इकः GI "अमो AT UPS श्छल्य A: ELI रक TUE QUST इतः ॥७॥। दोषं THAT 179i eaca erfanfa: टः ict aQAISAA: स्वल्पमेदा छोकतः ।॥१८॥ GACT EY FLAK ॥९॥ BRET रेफः ।१९॥ afaaa: पिभनस्तः ।॥१०॥ दोषं पूवठरवन्नेयम्‌ २ ०॥। इति श्वो पुरषो त्तमदेवल्य पशा चिक सूत्रं समाप्तम्‌ । do ३८९ जेषु छिखितं उत्तमश्वीज्ञानेन सप्ततिषर्षाधिकवयस्य | Notes: (10) ms, पिवते पतन्तः. (L1} ms. 74: for गडः; (15) ms. Gat aT. (18) ms. खस्य for ae, p_4 APPENDIX II लङ्केश्वरक्रता प्राक्कतकामधेनु ॐ नमो गणेशाय | [ The text given below has been taken from Mr. G. C. Basu’s first edition of the work published in the Mew Jndian Antiquary, Vol. VIII. (1946), pp. 37-39. But some slight changes have been made here mostly on the basis of the various readings very carefully collected by Mr. Basu | ब्रह्माणमादौ शिरसा प्रणम्य पितामहं मातरम्‌ आदिविधाम्‌ | भ्रीरावणेनामरबुद्धिक्षाङिना विधीयते प्राङ़तकामषेनुका ॥ विषूतराद गदितं पूव संकेपाद्‌ अधुनोच्यते | बारूबो वकरं qt दघ्नो यादङ्-नक्रोदुश्वतम्‌ ॥ देष्ारच्या प्रतोतानां तदुभवानां निगद्यते । ean नेह यत्‌ सिद्धं तट्समं देदाजञ्ज तत्‌ | क च ट तपां ararsarat ॥१॥ कचटतपां प्रायेण रोषः स्यात्‌ अनादौ बतंमाना नामित्यथंः। तेन साकं साअ । एक asx तु fged ce) seat: जरुभरः । कपटः कपः?) पातु पाड Weg: पाओ । अनाद्ाधिति fea कथं कधं चन्द्रिका चन्द s(z)ya: [ दङ्गणो ] ae तु[अ] उ(पू)ध्वं [पुष्व] पथिकः पिमो । Notes: The rule preseribing an elision of the intervocal { is curious. No. Pkt. text seems to corroborate this. घु-भो-जसाश्च प्रायेण रोपः ॥२॥ पिमो । Note: The example is inadequate and the rule remains unexplained. नाचां बर्णाधितानाम्‌ ॥२॥ धणाध्ितानाम्‌ अचां Stat न स्यात्‌। तथेवोदाहृतम्‌ | मो षट च सहरटचादीनि यथोपदिषएम्‌ ॥४॥ मो azaae रटचादीनि यथोप्रयुक्तं साधुनि स्युः (7) प्रस्तार qeut feeate faced उद्गम उगगम रमति way रीषं सीसं श्चुण्णं yore’ नदी [ग ] [ निक्रःतिं fiery 1 111 Prakrtakamadhenu erat avar हिभण्डि अ१डहि८}) प्रावृष asa gevtaa [ geefaat] ater [ भत्ता ] went छष्छोत्यादि | Note: This stitra is corrupt and hence unintelligible. पततो डाऽनन्त्ये ॥५॥ पततो डो wey ल्यात्‌ पतितं fee eats | ARTS युष्मदि प्रधमा-प्रष्छ्योः ॥६॥ युष्मष्छष्दुस्थ प्रथमान्तस्य पषटवन्तल्य च यथाक्रम" तुम्ह-तु्क्न च भादिभ्येते । सृं तुमह Grae हत्याद्यहनोयम्‌ | मम मध्ययोर्‌ ASH: 11911 मममध्ययोर asa इति आदिश्यते । मम मज्ज मध्यं ATH । नै-भः-ड-त्र-न-दिवचन-बहुवचनात्मनेपदानीह ॥८॥ पतानि crea न सन्ति । तथेधोदाहा्ंम्‌ । Note: Mr. Basu’s text reads the rule as नै-षौ ete. न मेद्‌ स्त्री-पु-नपुसक-ङृतः ॥६॥ इह श्ञो-पु-नपुःतकतो भेदो afer: तथवोदाहतम्‌। कन्वं रक्खणविहुला संकरदिञ्जा(ण्णा)उसेव कथा । सो पाड[अ] गोड़ी। भाषाया gg साहो उत्तिधिसेसो कन्वो | Notes: The example 7a’ लक स्वणा-विहला ete. means. Lakkhana-Vikula is a Kavya being the story of a life given back by Samkara. It is in Gaudi Pkt. This probably shows that the Manasai legend, a favourite theme of the mediaeval poets of Bengal, was also the basis of a Prakrit work named the Lakkhana-Vihula. a बिभ ॥१०॥ [ इषे बिअ ] भादिष्यते च [क हव ] को विअ । Note: Mr. Basu includes this in the gloss on the sttra 9, ड पद्वान्ते (ARE TET च ॥१२॥ पदान्ते बतमानानाम्‌ अर्वां ( भर्ता ) स्थने उ स्यात्‌ | पह WSS धद AS FF BT सड ATS | Note: This rule relates to Apabhraméa. भवां विपयेयः स्वस्थानम्‌ भास्ते ॥१२॥ तमान-काङानाम्‌ भवां विपयेयः सपात्‌ | Seat afta | Note: Tho meaning of this rule is not quite clear, गुं घडे पिड aeze fee (7) eta af पुषः पुरिस stesi &ftd ^ एशि If 172 wed faasetaled] सम्बोधने [च] ॥१३॥ पदानां विस्तजंनीयस्य स्थाने ओत्वं स्थात्‌ । देवः देषो विप्रः facat । मातः arat माए एत्वं च। खोप भदो सक्रारस्य ॥१४॥ भदौ वर्तमानप्य घकारस्य ST: स्यात्‌ । काष्ठ ({)काट्‌टं Cara हणं इत्यादि | ATT लोपः द्वित्वं चानादो ॥१५॥ धकाररेदथोः AAA छोपः स्यात्‌ । प्रमु पहु भ्न मति wag ध्यानम्‌ धाणं। अनावो सम्बोधने [व] feeam वयल्य वषत Bist sed काय करञ्जं | [ दुऽ्म-दुहो दोग्धेः ] ॥१६॥ Note: “The reading is conjectural. किञ्ञ-कुणो करोतेः ॥१७॥ करोतेः प्रयोगे किज-कुगात्रादिश्येते करोति fag gag) ala भवत्योर भण-हो ॥१८॥ धदति भवत्योरथं थथाक्रमेणे वावा दिश्येते वदति गह्‌ भवति ete | भिसो हि zen भिसः स्थने हि स्यात्‌ । पेतः TF ॥२०॥ बराह्मणे: बम्हणेहि । पश्चम्प्रा हि स्यात ॥२१॥ gata सञ्खाहि छङ्ागिरिमेखलाहि । एवं द्दिवचनबहुव्नयोः (7) | सोपः भतः ॥२२॥ षष्ट्या बहुवचने आकारस्य रोपः स्यात्‌ । इ्तानां श्क्खाणां देवानां दंवाणं पुरिसाणं । AUNT बहुलम्‌ ॥२३॥ भातो छोपः स्यात्‌ कार्यं कज्जं शान्ति सन्ति । अनादौ किम्‌ आसणम्‌ ! सप्तम्यां मि दित्वश्च ॥२४) मिः घ्यात्‌। तष्य दित्वन्न मयि avafta ara गत्तस्मि विक्िणिपत्तम्मि। बहुष्व नुस्वारः ॥२५॥ सपम्या बहुवचनेऽनुल्वारः घ्यात्‌। etd Aa’ Ast रेफस्य तणाव धनादौ ॥२६॥ ara रेफल्य तणौ स्यातां । श्रीरामः सिरिणामो [ इरषोल्तमः] पुवुसो सिमो प्रकरः १कतो । संभोगे Rar हस्छत्वं परथग्‌भावः ॥२७॥ aa fa वी तयोहेस्वत्वं स्यात्‌ । . पृथक्‌ च क्रियते ऊश्च fa qa [ get ] भीरामः सिरिरामो प्रीति पिरिति प्रीवा गिरिवा। 173 Prakrtakiimadhenu ताहू लोपः पृकयोणः ॥२८॥ ABIL परस्य दकारल्य छोपः। Toray योगश्च तदा ता तदीयं तीभ। छोपत्यागो aniat बहुलम्‌ ॥२६। वर्णानां रोपत्यागो age स्तः। तीष्णं ceed तिग्मं तिग्मं उदाहार sare उदुभर waz (saz) इदानी geet aa geet स्यात्‌। तथेवोदाहा्थम्‌ । त्वा इण ॥२०॥ तया प्रस्ययत्य उण त्थात्‌। कृत्वा SET गत्वा nas । दीघाणाम्‌ ale लघुत्वं तर्थैषोश्चारिताणाम्‌ ॥३०॥ धुजिहया उच्चारितां दीर्घाणामपि eged स्यात्‌ ॥ रे वाह (9) | Note: This rule relates to Pkt. metres. भारो(क [ने पेक्ख स्यात्‌ ॥३१॥ प्यति emg दृशा पेक्लिङण ॥ Notes: Mr. Basu reads wenat, This and the next rule have been वधु FE गयाण ATT भरे wrongly put in the ms. also after the stitra 15 ( Basu’s. 14. ) wey त्वरितोश्चारितानाम्‌ ॥२२॥ स्वरया satftarara अनेकेषामपि वर्णानाम्‌ oped cara नोखेष्ठनायां इगममि ayaly ख [इख] ड श्यक्षरघ्रयं न बहवः | Notes: This rule to relates to Pkt. metres. The examples 04९42100, dadavadt and khadakhad: may respectively be pronounced as dagmagt, dalvali and khajkhadz (as three syllables ). भावे AT स्यात्‌ ॥३३॥ देवत्तं देवत्तणं दरिग्रस्वं द्रिदत्तणं | योषिति महिला शब्दः प्रयुउयते ॥२४॥ इति धीरङद्वर- कता प्राकृतङामधेनुका समाप्ता tt Appenpix III विष्णाधर्मोत्तरधृतं OTRAS माकण्डेय उधाच | ध्थातः संप्रवष्ट्यामि वष Hasan | छ भर ल तट्‌ न सन्त्यश्न नष्मा (नोष्मा) न च म(श)षादुभो ॥ ti Rial (सकारे हि a) च तथा नासिक््यश्च aut Faq | रेफश्च svar राजन्‌ संयोगे नास्ति कर्हिचित्‌ ॥२॥ ध (पे) कारश्च तथोक्रारः पदमध्ये महाबलः | es( बद योगे ब(बःकारोऽत्र उ(क)गयथोगे ata a! nan शगय(ध.योगे गक्राराऽचर लोपमायाति नित्यक्षा.शः) | दमो युक्तो gern कत्वा दुमो कायं तथैव च ॥४॥ करटक) तयोगे दू(कत)क्रारस्यात्‌(स्य) वक्रारस्त्वमिधीयते | ककारः GAT) ST वक्त्रो इट्‌ विषवजितः ॥५॥ नकारस्य WHIT: स्यात्‌ ARITET ख इष्यते | THC थक(रश्च भ(भ)क्रारश्च ब(त) रव च NGM क्वचित्‌ safaq [त्‌] स्यात्‌ तदा(था) ह(ध)कारण्च तथा Saferq | apices तु [ छ वक्तव्यं धां (ध) कारस्य ह ईष्यते ॥७॥ [श] चकारस्य छकारः स्थात्युकरे ( स्याशकारे ) ES च दुष्यते | [भ] युक्तं ष(प)कारे तद्धी (दधि)मे शकरोऽपि विधीयते usu चतुथीं aa विज्ञेया न च fara क्वचित्‌ | पत्रादो यो गुखः साऽबर wate विधीयते nen हिमावमेतदुदिष्टं मया प्राङ्तलन्तणम्‌ | प्रयोगाहू agnaed विस्तरो atfafaeac: ॥१०॥ देशेषु देशेषु पृथग्‌ विभिन्नं न शक्यते छन्षणतस्तु THA । लोकेषु यत्‌ स्पाव्पश्रष्टसंक्च' शेयं हि तदेशधिकदोऽधिक्षारम्‌ ॥११॥ इति विष्णुधर्मोत्तरे माकण्डेय-वञ्ज-संवादे प्राङृतमाषारुश्षणं नानं सप्तमोऽध्यायः ॥ The Prakrit Grammar in the Visnudharmottara? Markandeya said : 1, Now TI shall speak about the characteristics of Prakrit. In it there are no 7 short and long, ( short and long, the visarga (A), & and $. 2-3. Sand the anusvira ( m) are however not like these (ie. they (ष्णाः in Prakrit ), 10, 4, y and v never occur, O king, in combination [ with other letters | 4४ and aw never occur in the middle of a word. Note: Ramagarman’s Sauddhodani ( 11, 1. 38 ) with az at its begine ning seems to have further support from the rule 3. 3-4. The combination of ७ and dh will drop 4, and similarly from the combination of d and ¢ as well as from that of g and dh, ¢ will drop. The combination of व and ™ is likewise to change into ६८११८, Note: Examples: gabda > sadda; khadga > khagga;padma > paduma. 5. T' occurs { lit. is prescribed ) in place of the combination of ¢ and ¢, and ka in the middle of a word is to be uttered with- out its consonant element (i.e. it will leave only the vowel ), Note: Ex.: dhakta > bhalta ; sakala > saala: 6-7. N should always be a, atid ksa will be kha. 2, th and bh will sometimes remain unaltered (lit. the same), and so will be dh. Sometimes isa will also be ch, and dh will be h. Note: Thereis nothing unusual about the rule about é. For it might well have remained unaltered asin an accented syllable. {Emendations have not been shown in the translation: The Prakrit Grammar 176 8. Sv will be ch, and the consonant element of ta will drop. In va also the same rule ( 1.6. dropping of the consonant element) holds good. 0. There is never any fourth case-ending and dual number [ 10 Prakrit ], and the long vowel in the beginning of a word becomes short. Notes: The second part of the rule should be compared with Vr. 1. 2,10. The qualitative change of the initial vowel presented by Vr. I, 12, 20 also may be taken as further development after lengthening. 10. These are the two principal characteristics of Prakrit mentioned by me. More details are to be gathered from the Note: It seems that the previous couplet ( no. 9 ) has been referred to here. 1], That which is popularly known as Apabhrasta in different countries and is divided [ into many dialects | is to be known from persons who know these countries thoroughly. Note: It is significant that this small grammar of Prakrit does not expressly mention double consonants) In Agokan Pkt too double consonants are absent. From the mention of Apabhrasta [ language | it appears that this grammatical sketch was probably not much earlier than the 6th century A.C. when we have epigraphic evidence of the existence of Apabhraméa. 1 INDEX SANSKRIT-PRAKRIT! भ = अण], 9. 6. WHA = अअ 1. 1. 16. arise = अङ्ोष्ट I 2. 9 भङ्कार = इङ्ालो 1.1. 2; 9. 10. अङ्गार, 8, I. 1. 1. अङ्कालो Sak. IT. 8. 8. AR = age 1. 2. 10. | भत्र = पएश्च Meg. [1.2. 15; wey, Sak. If. 3. 6. Ca. IT. 3. 14. अथवन्‌ = erusqol T 2. 11. भदस्‌ I. 6. 19. मद = अयज्ञ Mg. II. 2. 13 ; Ca. II. 3. 14. अधम = अधम 1. 2. 11. भधुना = अहुणि My. TT. 2. 14. भहूनि PS. IT. 3. 8. -अनीय = अगिज्ञ |, 2. 3. AeA = अन्ते Mo. IJ. 2. 21. अस्यश्र = अआणश्च Me. IT. 2. 17. aq ओ 1. 5, 8. भपि = fa, fa, भषि 1. 5,7; 9.5. पि, Ca. 10.3. 11; वि Mg. TT, 2. 15. 22. Ca. II. 3, 13-14. पूं = अबु ६. 11. 1. 6. भष्सरस = NCSA, अच्छरा, 1. 5. 12. अभिजाति = आदहिभाई, अहिभाईै 1. 1. 1. भमिमन्यु = भहिमञ्ज I. 3- 7: अभिमण्ण S, TI. 1, 9. भरण्य = रण्णं 1. 1. 6. | रे = अके Mg. Il. 2. 28;Sak. 11. 3 8. Sab. II. 3. 20; उष Ca. II, 3. 15. art ue & Mg. II. 2. 27. अथं = अत्थे Ca. II. 8. 19. भपित = भोषिभो, भण्पिभ J. 1. 6. अहं = अरिहो J. 3.17. भलीक = अछिभ I. 1. 11. भष = आओ I. 5. R, अट = अअ, atardt, aere” 1. 5. 13. भिव = असिष्वं, afaa 1. 4. 2. भव = भास J. 1. 2. मदवक = अस्स, भसम, 1. 4. 2. भदवत्थाम्ना = मदशत्थामेण Moe. IT. 2.17. wal 7. 4, 13. ; अच्छ ६. II. 1. 27. अति Mg. II. 2. 16; सि Sak. II. 3. 4. नास्ति = णत्थि Sab. IT. 3. 19, arfeu = अद्री 1.3. 9, HeAg = 1. 6. 30. भागक = आगदौ 1. 2. 6. भातिध्य = arfaed 7. 3.5. आत्मन्‌ = AQ, भत्ता, (अष्पाणओो Comm. ) 1, 3. 1]. भाव्मीय = अप्पाणभकषिभ Ca. I. 3. 1 आपीड = भगे 1. 1. 10 ; 2.8, आभिमुख्य = ged I. 9. 8. भायुस = भाऊ, आउसो I. 5, 12. araig = aes Mg. II. 2 25. ASA = ANS, आह्छाभं [. 5. 9. aad = आवतसो 1. 3. 9. आस्थानगत = अल्थाणगदे Sak. I. 3. 4. आश्रयं = अच्छेरं, अच्छेरिभ' I, 1. 3; 15 14, अच्छरिभ 8.11. 1. 38. 1001 important items except the change of roots ( Ch. VIII. ), have been given here. The change of roots, has been separately given after this. Words in chapter I, are all in Maharastri. P—23 178 .. 1.9, हति = हअ, त्ति 1. 1. 9.55. 7. हदम्‌ = 1. 6. 15. 17. 18. got Pra. TI ¢, 4. इन्द्रा प्रीम्‌ = इन्दाषहणिं Sik. TT. 3. 6. इदानीम्‌ = इआरणिं 1 1. 11. इदाणि', इदाणि ६.17. 1.13; effe Me. 7.2. ९. “ERG = हमा 1. 5. 14. दष = व, oq, पिव, मिव, faa I. 9. 4, 6 व. रा. 3. 5. विअ 5}. II. 4. 8. og, विअ II. 1 3६. faa Ps. IIf. 3.: 4, हह > दध. ६. 11. 1. 16. ईदश = एरिसो 1.1. 10. इदीतत STL 1. 2, 3. rat= geet, शैसरो 1. 4, 2. tea = शपि, 1.1. 2. उक्ष = Teal 1. 3. 6. उक्षिप्त = उच्छिततो I. 3. 6. उत्कर = उक्षे 1. 1. 3. उत्खात = उक्वअ, उक्खाभ |. 1. 7. उत्तरीय = उत्तरिञ्ज', sada’ 1. 2. 3. उत्सव = sean], उच्छभो 1. 3.5 BIS = उस्छभो, TEA 1. 3. 5. HBA, 1. 5. 4. उदरा = Saray, 8. 11. 1. 34. उदुम्बर = sav, उडंवर' 1. 5. 11. उदूखल = उबर, भोक्ष्खरु' 1. 1. 13: उदृहर' 5. 71. 1. 2. उप ॐ 1. 5. 8. उपरि = उरि SS. Il. 1, 3. उष्मन्‌ = उम्हा 1. 5. 4. RM = Seat I. 3. 6. Raa SE 1. 1. 175 2 5. INDEX fa = gat, I. 1. 15. wag J. 6. 15, 18. 19. TY. 2. 19-15, 25, एव = चिअ. @a Av ; 1. 2. 6. Seq, जेव ६.11. 1. 37. तेराघक्ष = एरावणो 1. 2. 5. atfaeas = asgaar 1. 1. 24 ओषध = ओसधं J. 2. 4. eu = कथ, £. 1.1. 30. कथम्‌ = कधं Mo IT. 2. 16 ; कह 3. 14. कदम्ब = कलम्बो 1. 2. 9. कपदैक = कषडओ 1. 3. 10. कवन्ध = कपन्धो, कमन्धो 1. १. 7. कबन्धो 8. IT. 1. 6. करण = कष्टणं 1, 2 10. करुण = HN Me. TT. 2. 14. करीष ~= करिसो 1. 1. 14, करेणु = कणेर 1. 5. 9. करेणु “77.1.2. कणिंकार = कण्णिसे, कणिन्रारये 1. 4. ९. SAT = Hat 1. 3. 9. कायं =e 1६.111. 8 6. PIBIA = HST, BIBI 1. :;. 11. कालाअसं ६. 1.1. 21. छि 1. 6. 9, 15. 16. 17. Tak 1.3.21. किंशुक = केसुअ £. TI. 1. 2. किरात = बिलादो, किरा 1.2. 5, 10, 14 किराबो €. 1. 1.8. किर = किल Sab. IT. 3. 18. किसलय = किस, किसषटभ' 1.5. 11. कीचक = कीओ 701. 77. 2 24. कीभभ, कोभ Abh. IT. 8. 24 prea = कैरिषौ 1.1. 10. कीदि्नो S. 11.1. 9, 3. कीति = feet I. 3.9. कुक्षिमती = gafeerdt Mg. II. 2. 24. sfea=a@ifea I. 1. 12. Hae = कुप्पक 1. 3. 12. INDEX 179 कुण्ड = काण्डं ]. 1. 1. गमि (ma) 1. 7. 7. II. 2. 18, 14 ete. SENT = कुटुण्ण' My. 11. 2 17. गते = gt 1.3. 10. FA = कुञ्ज, GIA 1. 2. 14 गदभ = गङ्ष्ो 1.5.10. गहभौ IT 1.5. कुमारिका = कुमरिभा, कुरारिभा 1. 1.7. afaqenfean 1. 2.5;N 10.1.5. ङप्माण्डक = HEIST 1. 3. 15. गृध्र = fray [. 1. 15. कुष्माण्डिका = कुम्हण्डिभ्ा + 11 lio. गृि=ग्री 1. 1. 16. ङन्‌ (क) 1. 7.7. ||. 1. 26; 2. ५,४,17 गृह = चर, Ca IL 3. घल. Sak., Sab कृत = fea 1. 1. 16. कड ys 111. 3. 6. []. 9, 3,6 10. fee PST 3. 4. कृति = किदी i. 1. 16. गृहीत = गहि 1. 1. 11. Beat = tear}. 1. 16. गोजिदह्धिका = गौजिष्निभा 1. 3. 12. कृषा = किवा |. |. 15. गोपिका = गौविभा 11. २. 20. ais = fegt 1. 1. 16. Tada = गोवद्णो J. 3. 10. कृष्ण = कपौ, BET |. +. । 0. 11. 1. 4; गौड = गउडौ 1. ।. ४4. 1. Veto 111... 1, Ite, गोरव = गउरवो, गारवो i. 1. 23. केवर = णवर, णविर 1. ५. 3. पौरवो 11. 1. 4, SBE = कदलासा, कैखाक्तौ |. 1. 21. गोर चित ~ गोमिक Me. 11. 2. 24. कष्ण = कारिणो My. 11. ४. 24. कांक्षय = SAAT 1. 1. 2:; BES = काउदृल्टं, HISES |. 4. v कोरवक = SITAAT ।. 1. 24. कोशरु = BIAG 1. 1. vA. elias = sana J. 1. 23. fear = किरिभा 1. 3. 17. Bred = किरन्ती 1. 3. 17. प्रह = गेण्ह <. 11. 1. 2". घरमर = घस्सरो, wart 1. ५. 21. चतुर = चत्तारो चत्तरो, चत्तारि, चत्तरि 1. 6.21. चारि Ap. II. 2. 81. चतुर्धा = चोत्थी, eset 1. 1.5. चदुत्थी 8. 1. 1. 1. AGEN = चदुदस, AZTEC ~. 11. 1. 7. क्टेश = feat 1. ४. 17. चतुदश = steel, चउदही 1. 1. 5, चन्त्र्‌ = arg Ca. 11. 3. 12. क्रा चत्‌ = कुपच 1s. 111. 3.6 ॐ षण = छणं 1. ४.6. खणं 11 1. 16 ; व ana खण My. 11. 2. vy. alegut ०. Il. 1. 6. „ 6 = quot ।. 2. 10. क्षमा = छमा, Bar |. 3 a aie | 10 होर = ATS. 11. 1. ५, ९ = चड्क sel. ८. 4 | = . | छद = खुद्‌ ४. 11. 1. 30. को ; ' न खड्ग = खण्ड्‌ Ap. 111. 25. Bt = lage +. *. 1४. fag = विष्णं 1. 3. 11. ख = OF M £, JJ, १ je Dy 9 9 ठ, 9 न च Yew 8, 14, 24 गणना = {erat Me. 11. 2. 23. चत्र = बहतो Fat 1. 1. 21. गत = गड VS. 11]. 3. 6. छाया = ret, शमा ( = कान्ति) 1. 2.1. 3 ARR HTM 1. 2. 8. जामातृ = जानाभरो (nom. acc. pl., gen. mic afte J. 1. 11. sing) I. 6. 18. 180 MUATIS = जामाडभौ. 1. 1. 18. fagr = iter. 1. 1. 10. sul = जिभा. I. 3. 19. तडित्‌ = ast. 1. 5. 12. तत्र = aos Sak. 11. 3. 4. तत्थ Ca. 11. ३. 11. तश्च Mp, I. 2 17; Sak. I]. 3. 6. तथा = वा, ag 1. 1. 6. fara Abh. II. 3. 26. fad ‘Tak. II. 3. 30 तट्‌ 1. 4. 9, 15.16, 19. तदा = ag. 1. 1.8. तदानीम्‌ = ताणि 1. 1. 11. तन्वो = तणह 1. 3. 19. -त्ा = ao I. 5. 17. ताण = तण, ताण 1. 1.7. ata = तादो 1. 2.5. तादत्म्य = ताभषप्पं [. 3. 12. तादश = तारिसि 1. 1. 15. atfaat 8.11. 1.3. eqs = तम्बोरं 1. 1. 14. तार = तार, aw 1. 1. 7. ताशब्रन्त = तारविण्टे, awfaoz 1. 1. 6. ताषत्‌ = भा Sab. Ll. 3, 18 ara Sak. IT. ४, 1. 18, 19. fade = da J. 9. 9. वृण्ड = तोण्डं 1. 1. 12. aud, aloe’ IJ. 1. 2. तुर्क = तुर्को I. 3. 4. तुयं = तूरं I. 3. 13. gn (3 ) = हर, 1. 5. 22. ततीय = aga 1. 1.11. Rava = तेरह I, 1. 3. त्रिणी = faftor Ap 17. 2. 31. asia = tele, eta’ I. 4. 2. नत्वं = तणं 1.517. त्वम्‌ 1. 6. 24. 11. 18; 3. 3. 18 ete. त्वदीय = वु्केकिअ Ca. 11. 8. 15. at Ap. 111. 2. 5. eafta = बहित्ति S. 11. 1. 35. Agr=qrar I. 5. 24. INDEX दक्षिण = arfeoi, दक्खिणं 1. 5. 9. दुशकिणे Sab. I]. 3. 17. दण्ड = दण्डो J. 2. 15. ania = dang I. 5. 17. वुक्च = वह 1.2. 11 ; रह. 1.2.4 दस ६.7. 1.7. दुश्षाहं = दाते I. 3.18. aq 1.7.7. 11. 1.33. दावाभि = gata, दावरगी I. 1. 7. दिक्‌ = दिसा 1. 5. 12. faaa = दिवषो, दिको I. 2. 13. दुःखित = दुक्खिअ, दुहिअ I. 4. 2. THES = FAGH', THE |. 5. 5. वुजंन = दुजणं 1. 5. 5. दुष्प्रक्ष = दुदयेश्च Sak. 11. 3. 3. ales = दु J. 6. 4. धीदा Pra. 1. 22. eq ( हश्‌ ) 1. 7. 7. 11. 2. 7, 25 ete ufe = दिट्ठी 1. 1. 15. देवर = दिअरो, tat 1. 1. 19. देवते 8.11. 1. 4. देष्य ~ ददशो 1. 1. 19, 20. हेव वषं, देवं 1. 1. 21. aged, देवं 1. 4. 2. Fea 9. 11. 1. 4 11. दोका=डेा. 1. 2. 15, ders. I. 1.8. दोहदक = दोहं 1. 2. ५. वोवारिक=दुभारिभो 1. 1. 28. ह्वार = gard, वारं, दारं 1. 3. 19. दि I. 6. 20. 22. इद Ap. I, 2. 31 दवि-क़ = दोहाकभः , geese 1. 1. 9. द्वितीय = geet 1. 1. 11. gem 1. 2. ३. धर्मिष्छ = TERS, धम्मिष्धं 1. 1. 8, धृतं धूतो. 1. 8. 8. weara = firgrqon 9. 11. 1. 36, धैर्य = धीरं 1. 1. 22; 8. 13. ननाम्ह = गणास्वा 1. 6. 11. नाक = णामो Ap. Ill. 2.9, fig = freq Mg. I. 2. 19. INDEX 181 निधन = णिद्धणो 1. 3. 10. fag ति = गि्बुदी I. 2. 6. fava = निसढो I. 2, 4. निष्कम्प = fameqy 1. 3. 4. नीड = ण्डूः 1. 1. 10; 4. 1. aw = णेडरं 1. 1. 14. नयोगिक = णिभोहृभो I. 1. 21. = पिक 1.4;4. 2. पक्ष्मन्‌ = Teel, WE 1. 1. 6. पञ्च J. 6. 14. quest = पन्णरह 1. 3. 11. पच्चान्तत्‌ = पण्णासा 1. 3. 11. पताका = पडा 1. ४.3. qua ~ पणं I. 3. 7. पथिच्‌ = पहो 1.1. 9; पध Mg. 1. 2. 17. पश्च = पोम्म्म, WA 1. 1.5; 3. 19. पराषृसुल = प्राहु 1. 9. 8. परिव = फो 1. 2. 16. पष = फरसी 1. 2. 16. qug = पड, wag 1. 2. 14 पर्यन्त = पेरन्तं 1. 1. 3. पर्थाणक ~ पाग. 1, 3. 14. पश्चु = पसू. 1. 8. 1%. पानीय = पाणिः 1. 1. 11. वाद्व ~ पाक ६". 11. 3. 18. Mg, 11. 2. 22 पिण्ड = Wud, पिण्डं 1. 1. 8. fag 1. 6. 10 पीठ = पेद" 1. 1, 10. dia = Gas, पी 1. 5. 20 पुनः 2 पुण 1, ५. 10, पुनरकक = पुनरेत्तभा, पणोत्तभा 1. 5. 4 स = 3९९ Jaq geq = पुरिस 1. 1. 13 geat ४.11, 1.3, gfe My. IL. 2, 22. Ca. IL 3. 12. geez = पोक्खरो 1. 1. 12 get Ap. 111. 2. 3. =geal, gat, 1. 4. 2, पुस्तक = पोल्थभो J. 1, 19, पूति = पुत्ति 1.3. 9. पृथिवी = geat 1. 1.9, 17, gets. 11. 5 पृथूमीो Ps. 1.3. 4. पृथु =faget 1. 1. 11. पृष्ठ = पुटी [. 5. 1}, पोर = पडरं 1. 1. 23. 24 पोरष = परं 1. 1. 24, ded £, ID 1. 4. पोष = पुसो I. 1. 23. प्रकट = पञंड, wae I. 1. 1. प्रकृति = पहदी I. 1. 17. प्रको = पवद, पदो 1. 1. 22, पओहौ 8. 1]. 1. 4 परक्षरित = पजक्षरिभो 1. 3. 7. पेम ~ पलम्‌ 1६.11. 2.5 प्रति = पडि I. 2.3. प्रतिपत्‌ = पडिवभ।, पाड़विभा |. 1. 2 प्रथम = पढम 1. 2. 4; 5.2 gee, पठम, gan पदम ob. 11. 1.5. प्रथम pé TT, 3.5 प्रदीष्ठ = पलित I. 2. 9. प्रवासिन्‌ = पाओ I. 1. 9. प्रवृति = पउत्ती I. 1. 17. प्रशन = पण्डो 1.5, 13. प्रसिद्धि = पसिद्धी, arfad I. 1.1. Ua = Tad, aad I 1. 1. प्रस्तार = पत्थरो, परश्थारसे 1. 1. 7. प्रहार = परो, पहारो 1. 1.7 प्राक्त = Gata, पाभभ J. 1. 7, प्राग्रत = पाड I. 1. 18, प्रा्ृष = पाडसो 1.1. 17 ; 5. 12,13 प्रिया = faatr I. 6. 9. प्क्ष = tes 1.7.7 प्रमच्‌ = पेम्मं 1. 5. 13. बदुरन=बोर 1.1. wets. 111. 4. afer = बरिही, बही I. 3. 18. बहिः = जाहिरं बहिरं बहो I. 5. 6. बिन्दु =षेन्वू, बिन्दू 1. 1.5. बित्तिनी = भि्षिणी I. 2. 16. 182 INDEX बुभुक्षा = [ween] Mg. Tl. 2. 33. -मय = महभ", मअ 1. 5. 21. हृहस्यति = भञप्यह्‌ 1. 5. 10 AAG = मोहो, AK 1. 1. 4. विषण्फदी &. II. 1. 12, AR = मरो, as 1. 1. 4. ब्राह्मणक = बर्हणा Sab. II. 3. 20. मरकत = ATTA J. २. 2. भगवत्‌ = भगवा [. 6. 22. मरार = AAS, माणे I. 1. 7. भटक = भष्टक Me. II. 2. १४. मरिन = age, मलिणं J. 5. 9. भद = मछ Ap. II. 2. 5. मान्‌ = महन्ते Me. Il. 2. 15. भरत = मरह 1.2. 12. भरध 5.17. 1.5. महाराष्ट = मर" 1. 5. 8. भवत्‌ 1. 6. 22. मांस = मंसं, मासं J. 5.15. मातर 1. 6 11. [महेमा] My 2. 24, मातृक = Asay I. 1. 18. मात्रा = मेत्ता, मत्ता [.1. 8. मार्जार = मज्जरौ, ara 1.1. 7. माहात्म्य = argc 1. 3. 12. युङ्कट = मउडं 1. 1. 1:; मुउड' 5. 17. 1. 5. मुक्ता = मत्ता. 1. 1. 12. भवाय = भवं Pra. 1.2. 1. भवती = भोदी Pra. IL 2. 1. WAT = ATH, माणं 1.5. 11. ST 1, 12. भायां = भारिभा, मजा 1. 3. 18. भिन्दिगाछ = भिण्डिवालो I. 3. 9. fafeqaret ov भिण्डिषवाषो S I. 1. 10. den = [भिम्ड] IT. 1. 35. मुखर = yest 1. >. 10. भङ्ग = fay 1.1. 16. yaoi. 7.7. शरङ्घार = भिङ्गासो 1.1. 16. मुण्ड = सोण्ड 1. 1. 12. भेरव = भहरवो, भेशषो 1. 1. 12. gen = मोच Mg. 1{. 2. 17. भ्रातु I. 6. 10. मुखं = मुरक्ख, Pra. II. 2. 2. भ्रातृक = नाडो I. 1. 18. एग = एग Ap. IL. 2. 4. मक्षिका = मच्छिभ I. 3. 6. anig = fag? 1. 1. 15. मतुप = AG, शष्ठ, षन्त, ATS, इतत, Hea षणा = सुणार +. 1. 17. I. 5. 18. एत = मुभ 1.1. 17. मड. 16. IID. 3.6 एत्तिका = मिष्टा 1. 5.7. मदक = RATS I. ४. 3. रङ्ग = sey 1.1. 2, 16. मदीय = weet, 9. 11. 1. 35; ameter, ZA = AIG, मउत्तणं 1. 3. 3. Ca. I. 3. 14. मेर, मोहर Ap. 17. 2.5. मोन = मडणं 1. 1, 94. मधूक = महम 1, 1. 14., महुभा ^>. 1. Sho मउढि 1. 1. 24. नि | sara = मिहं J. 3. 17. मध्य = मजञ्क्षारो, मञ््ारभो, APA 1.5. 28 यक्ष = यक Mg. II. 2. 16. मध्यम = alread, मज्कषमं 1. 5. 2. धत्र = यण्ट Sak. II. 3. 4. मच्याहक = ATH 1. 3. 2. यधा = यहा, जहा, I. 1. 6, मनस्विनी = मभंसिणी, माणंसिणी 1.1.1 6.9 ` मनाक्‌ = मणं I. 9.9, जथ, WAT ४, Il. 1. 2 fara. Abh. IT. मभ्यं = वम्महो 1. 2 16. 3-26 fart Tak. II. 3. 30, weg = wey I]. 2, 17, we 1, 6. 9, 15, INDEX 183 धवा = अह J. 1.8 वतिक = षस्िओ 1. 8.9 यमुना = Asn Ty. वषं = वरिसो 1.3. 17 पष्ट = ट्टी 1.2. 14 जदह = 81. 1.8 वर्षा = वस्सा, षरिसा I. 3. 17-18 यातुं 1. 6. 1] aga = वेष्टरी 1.1. 3 arent = जारिसो I. 1. 15. वर्षी = ast 1.1. 3 जािसषो ~, Il. 1. 3 वसति = aaet J. 2.12 यावत्‌ = जा, जाव 1.5. 11 HS. 11. 36 qeagrea = arg Ap. Il. 2.4 याव +£. 2.14 वित्र = धोहिन्तं ].1.6 युधिष्ठिर = जहिष्ठिको, जुदिट्‌ष्ि 1. 1.15; 210 वा= ण 1. 9. 4 जुहिटषिरो S. 11.1.3 वाराणसी = वाराणसी, वाणारसी 1. 5. 8. रजत = yas 7.2.5 धाष्प = वाह, acer J. 3. 15. cage = रअणीमुष्ं 1.3. 18 विदाति = dtar 1.1.10; 5.14. रत्न = रभणं 1.3.16 fame = विष्टडो J. 2. 12 feast My. 1.2. 23 विक = fazer T. 2. 12. ररि = रस्सि, tat 1. 5. 14 विच्छदि = विडो 1. 3. 10 राजन्‌ =]. 6. 11, 13 वितदि = विअङ्ी I. 3.10 राधा = राही 7. 1. 34 लही Sab. 1. विद्यत्‌ = fan , fasta 1. 5. 12, 20. 9. 18; Me. TL. 2. 29 wrfge 7.3. 11 विभीषण = fasta Sak. 11. 3. 16. रण्ड = toe 1.1. 12 विश्वास = विस्सासो, वीसासो J. 4. 2. हदु 1 7.1 विस्म = fagaa PS TI. 3. 5 एषेमी = aedt 1. 3. 6 facoy =वेण्ह I. 1.8. eyed Ap. 111. 2. 6 fags = मेष्भरो, विहरे 1. 2. 16. VM IBR = रुञ्जादयुहणो 1. 5. 19 धीयं = वीरि 1 3. 14. wat = Bro’ I 1. 4 वृहत = fafen’ J. 1. 16. BRSH = ARS, }..2.. 14 ga = OG, वच्छो 1. 1. 18; 3. 6. SITES :\. 1.1. 8 वृतान्त = वुत्तन्तो 1. 1. 18. BSS = णाङ्गुखजो 1. 2. 15 वरन्त = Roz 1.3. 9 gris =gaay 1. 1. 12 qra=aeq 1. 5. 20. रोचन = छोअणो, रोण 1. 5. 13 बृन्दावन = बुन्दाषण J. ]. 18. Biles =sitgeay 1. 2. 15 वृश्चिक = विच्छुभो 1.1. 9, 16. रोहल 11. 1. 8 वृष = विसो 1. 1. 16. वक्र = षट्क 1. 5. 17 वेतस = वेडिसो 1.1. 2; २. 3 age Pra. II 2.4 वेदसो 4. 11. 1. 1. वच्‌ 1. ^. 7 वेदना = fear, वेभणा 1. 1. 19 वज्‌ = aut, agt J. 3. 18 बेदणा 3, TI. 1. 4, = Mg. IT. 2. 23 बनत्यति = uncer 1. 3.2 वेश्मन्‌ = वेमो 1. 3. 19 वयल्य = बअ"स Me. IT. २. 23 वेष्टं = वेह* Ca. Il. 3. 14. वतमान = वत्तमाणो I. 8. 9 वेताशिक = agenfesit I. 1. 20. 184 वेद्य = agefeerit 1.1. 20 देथ = वहजो, AH]. 1. 21 ; = घषटोअ 1 1. 11. शकट = anel 1 2. 4 शटा = पडा J. 2. 4. THA = सत्त. N. 11. 1. 35 शनेः = सणिभ' J. 9. 7. शय्या = ART J. 1.2; 3. 7. ICS = GUAT 1. 5. 12, 13. ITE = सारङ्गो 1. 3. 16. शाम्मली = सेम्मरी, सम्मली 1. 1. 8. शावक = छाव 1. 2. 15 तावओ ६. JI. 1.8 शिथिष्ट = fafae J. 2. 4. शिरा = सिहा 5 1.1.7 शिरस = सिरं 1. 5. 13. शि Sak, II. 3. 4 शीकर = सौभरो I. 2. 7. ्ीभये +. 11. 1.6. दीघर = क्षत्ति 1. 9. 7. wes = BST Ap. 111. 2. शुष्क = छक्को 1. 3.4 शगार = विभा 1. | sere = सिङ्घारो 1. 1. 16 शोकालिका = सेभाषिभ, सेहश, [. 2.7, 12. slog = खण्डो 1. 1. 23. शोण्डिक = उण्डिभो J. 1. 23, कौटीयं = aide’ J. 3. 13. श्यश्ान = मक्ताणं I, 3.2 sam = मस्सू 1. 3.2 sate = विभा Sak. II. 3, 5 at=fad 1. 3. 17, A = Br ]. 7. 7, 8. इ्छाघा = सछह 1. 3 16. षट. = छ 1. 2.15;6. 14. dga = संयुदं 1. 1. 18. dafa संबुदी I. 2. 6, INDEX dena = aren’. 2.6;3.4; 5.4 aeat=aa 1. 2.3. 4. संस्थापित = संथबिभ', संधाविभ' 7. 1. 7. सदा = सह्‌, सभा ]. 1 8, पदश्च = सरिच्छं, arfies’ I. 1.1; 3,6 altea S, 17, 1, 9, सरिच्छि Av, IT. 2, 86, afees Sak, I. 3, 3. सप्तपणं = छसवण्णो, छततिवण्णो iy. 9. 15 ante = सामिद्धी, समिदधी, J. 1, 1, सम्पद = areaar 1 2. 5, सम्प्रति = सम्पि I. 2. 6, सम्मदंन = सम्मङणो J. 3, 10, संमहणो 8.77, 1, 9, सरोजक = सरोज, ata’ 1. 5. 6, aan = सत्वञ्जो J, 3, 1. सत्य = सात , aed J, 1, 2; 4, 2, age zasarfa > II, 1, 37. साम्प्रत = सम्पदो 1. 2; 6 fete = cet 1. 1.5 14 सिन्दूर = सेन्वुरं, सिन्दुरं I, 1 8. सीमन्‌ = सीमा 1, 5. 14. SHAT = BIAS 1. 2.10 मुख = षह 7.5. 20 छसंगत = छषंगदो 1. 2. 6 छदंयत = छसंजद 1.१9. 6 qua = छखम 1८ Il. 3.5 सूयं = सुरो, asat 1. 3.13 afe = fadt 1, 1. 16 सु with अप ~ उक्र Me, II, 9. 22. तेवा = सेष्वा, सेवा 1. 4. 1, 2 सैन्धव = सिन्धव" 1. 1. 21. सोकुमायं = सीडमष्टो 1 3. 14 सौन्दयं = geet I. 1. 2, 22, 28 ; 8, 13 शोय = सोरिभ' J. 9. 14 cara = तम्बो J. 3. 11 cara = ura J. 3. 3. त्तु धुण 11. 1. °). Eat = हत्थी S. 11. 1. 36 ; gfeearr Sab. ene =uld Ap. II. 3.5 INDEX 185 est = हत्थो £. II. 1. 36: gear dab, FATA 1.3.2 IT. 3. 18. gfev% Ca. II. 3, 11. घ्वप्न = fafany 1.1.2 ;2.17 eufaz ध्येये I. 5, 27 eafea = ated, aed? J. 1. 6 en = विष ¢. 11. 1, 97. eat=agt J. 1. 20 uw, S. IT. 1. 27. ete इत = इदौ 1. 2. 6 ल्थाणु = खाण, Bog, खाण 1. 5. 3 हनुमन्त = इणमा, इणमस्तो 1. 5. 18 enra = वणाणं, सिणाणं 1. 3. 18 हरिद्रा = हदा 1. 1. 9; 2. 9, 10. efeer स्निग्ध = सिणिद्धो I. 3. 10 SII. 1. प ere = atte, face, गेहं 1. 3. 18 हरिश्चन्द्र =eftar'at I. 5.10 ह्येषा = ण्डुला J. 3. 13 हषं = इरिसो 1. 3. 17 eq = करिवो I. 3. 17 SITES = दाराहषो, ESESY 1, 1, 7 हाखिक = हलिओ, erfeat 1. 1.7 दद्य = हिडक Me. JI. 2. 20. gee equta =Geot 1. 5. 17 eget=feer I. 3. 5 enize=Gfeg 1.2.12 घकोरक = खोड J. 3. 3 फोडभो £ Sak. 11. 3. ५, दहिभडा Ap. III. 1. 6 II. 1. 9 efe=feest 1.1. 17 EATS AN 1,3. 2, 19 ही = fed 1.3. 17 Roots ( Cx, भा) SANSKRIT-PRAKRIT भद = यक्ख (12) क्री = किण, विक्री = विण; शिक्ष (8) AT = अच्छ (26) परि-भस्‌ = खज, WA (34) कोड्‌ = कीर (27) इ, परि-इ = चर, छ (37) BT = IX (22) इष = अताभ (41) मह (11), प्रति-दष्‌ = Fay = कठ (13) भोग्गह (41) aft = ferret (11) एर = वेष्ट, oe (28) द = खन्द, GER (26) डण्ठ, प्र-उच्छ = पुन्छ, FPS, पुस्‌ (33) ay = धुक (26) कण = ओोक्खण (12) खच = HST (27) कथ => कह (14) साह, पुस, णिवरिज्ि (89) खन्‌ = खम, BR (16) sa, वि-कस्‌ = विसषट, tae (37) खाट्‌ = खा (10) कास, अव-कास्‌ ष वावाअ (8) faz = विसूर, विरभ (22) कृश, उत्‌-ङश = sera (33) : _ S = कर, SN, काह, BH, का~, क (4) ais निति न क teem करि. कीर (20) । कष्‌ = wre (27) करिस (2) गाह, HATE = HATE, वावाभ (8) क, भा-कम्‌ = चप्प, GB, AD, aye (30) गृध्‌ = fave (15) P—24 186 7 = ata, at (9) प्रत = fea (6) US = गेण्हु, {goo (4) 39-8 = अवक्षाभ 38) घेभो, गेहि, पे (4) eq, घेज, Ave’ 21) धट्‌ = गढ, ae (11) वि-षट्‌ = fare (31) उदु-घट्‌ = ओश्धेट्‌ (31) धूश्‌ = घुम्म, घोष्ट (2) घ्रा = faq (28) वर्‌ = वीण (40) घट = चल, चष्ट (15) fa = fam (6) चर = Seg (37) YB, Bs (37) र्ण. = ममूर, घर (36) छाद्‌ णम 35) fer = छिन्द (14) जल्प्‌ > FEI (13) जि = अभ, जिण (18) जि" = जिभन्तौ जिष्प, जिन्व (19) SEY = जम्भाभ, जम्भा (5) विजम्भमाणो = विअम्भन्तो ,5) ता = जाण, आण, सुण (6) Passive Ws, ण्व (20) आ-ज्ञा = अदहिषाह (31) डो ~ डे (| 3) तक्ष = TEA (22) as = ay (43) तिज = तिक्खाछ (39) तिम्‌ = तिन्त, तिष्ठास (33) तुश्‌ = तूस (12) तृप्‌ = थिप्प (7) A= छक, SA, (25) AG = वज्ज (22), ga (7) AZ = थोडढ , GE, AS, AS (26) त्वच्‌ = प्प (22) ! त्वर = Fat, pp. I ( ) ata: % (13) हि 2] दुष = दृष (12) दुष्ट. = Zen, (20) दू = gra, qa (17) INDEX इश्‌ = अक्स, ge, उअ, foes, qew (23), ale, दंस, afta, are (24) धा = धे (13) भ्रत्‌-धा = सदह (7) Tas aT (10). we, धृव, weg (24) धोए (10) धू = पुण, Fx, धुव (18) yea (19) SAI य धम, उद्रम, (6) ध्या =z MIST, MT (9) नहु, उत्‌-नह = ओक्ष्ख (38) aq, वि-नम्‌ = वाण (21) उदु-नम्‌ = INP SETS, गु, ay (32) at = of (13) नुह = mG (2) त्‌ = णश्च (15) वत्‌ = पड (13) पटु, fa:-qg = farsa (10) qt = पिव (11) afa-afe = facare, विरीह (41) पाट्‌ = फट , फाले (11) पीड = पीछ (41) पुष = पुस, Ta (24) पू (12) प्लुष = eC, ata (25) बध = asm (15) aq, afa-ag = अदहिषेम (32) at-azg= aftag (32) fa-agq = णिभरञ् (२५) ag = HoT (15) fae = fara (14) wt=em@e, at (7) cans) ae, भासा, भीष, भीता सो, मेस, Har (7) अज्‌ = ate (17), भो (16) भू = इव, शो} उत्‌-भू = उढ्मव, परिभू = परिह, प्रच = पमव, WI; दुष्प्रू = greg, सं-भू = संमव (77 ),भाविभू = भाविश्भू , उद = उब्भू, प्रभू=पहु, प्राहुभू = पाहुष्मू, ( भ्र = भर (3) मस्ज्‌ = WA, Fy (25) मा, fart = गिम्माण (10) | INDEX fae d-fas = गङ (30) We, उन्म = उम्मिर, उम्मोर, प्रम्‌ = qfag, wits ; समीर = संमि् समीर, (16) च्‌ = युक (2), षज ~ Fa, दहु (2.3) FE ~= AS (25) qi = मरिस (2) युध्‌ = APA (15) ta, धि-रव = fase (37) रभ्‌, आ-रभ्‌ = ATSH (11) राज्‌ ~ रेष (27) राध्‌ = रन्ध (27) SE = हभ, हव, Ta (11) aon (21) SI = इन्ध, सम्म (12) हष = ठप (12) रोष 21) रह. = चप्प (22), AE = FFA, वशगः, SEU (31) ey = arn (14) f-e = विग (36) VY = SISY, SST, SIGE, SSE (3;) GF = ESR (35) feg = fesa (20) Be. = गुञ्चे्ठ, ates, wis (28) लु = छग, उत्‌- = WwW, छषि (18) इभ, wer (19) वि-लु = होमो, गुञ्ेश्छ, परिह (38) aa = als, are (16) वट्‌ = वोश्च, ate (16) धम्‌ = म्म, (15) वह = वह, बोढ-(28) (Pass.) बह्म (20) विश्‌, परि-विश्‌ = परिविभाष (37) g = धरं (3) Tt, भव-दृत्‌ = भोज (33) उदव = उष्टट, भोषह (34) TI] Bays (14) 187 TI = afta (2) वेष्ट, उद्‌. वे् = उनम dae = dag (14) वेड (13) व्यध्‌ = faz (6) AT = वच (15) शक्‌ = तुभ, तर, तीर, (25), ae (14) शम्‌ = सम्म (13, OI = BR (15) ष्‌ = om (21) श्र = छण(18) BH at, सोभ (1६) सत्र = हुम (१) (7) सद्‌ = सड (13) नि-षट्‌ = faara (6) सम्‌ = सम्म (15) सह = णिषुड (40) सोढ (8) सिध्‌ = farm, (15) स = स) प्र-ख = पष्ठ, आओोगगाह, उगगाहं (40) QI = AG, Acq (26) CEE = खंड, Gg (21) त्तु = थण, ua, (30) ER, उ-स्त्‌ = ओोत्थर, ales, fages (36) ert = ओीत्थष् (45) घ्था = ST, अअ (4) em =aera, संस, छिष, gH, (pp) छिप्प, foe, fea (2!) स्फुट्‌ = FE, HE (15) प्र-सफुर = पण्कोड (55) त्ष = भर, gay, नि-स्ड् = वित्सर, विसर, वीक्षर (3) Gag = उभ, क्षोभ, सो (24) हत्‌ = हम्म (16) इस्‌ = हस्स, Fa (16) ह = हण (18) ex (19) ह = हरि, eda, AT (20) हृष्‌ = हरि (2) विहतं = PRakrit-SANSKRit भह = भयि 1.9. 6, 9 भए ( सम्भाषणे ) I. 9. 3 भद्रो ( अनुतापे ) 1. 9. 7 अच्छ ( सम्भाषे ) 1. 9.9 अच्छ = अस्‌ S. II. 1. 27. अच्छरीअ = आश्रयं 8. I. 1. 38 अज्जुका ( गणिका ) II. 1. 36 भणअ- 1.9.,6 अप्पाणो = आत्मनः I. 6.12 असु = अदुस्‌ 1. 6. 19 अम्हाण = HEATH 1. 6. 33 अम्हाछन्तो, अम्हाहिन्तो = अल्मथ्यः I. 6.21 ae = अस्मान्‌ 1. 6. 30. 31 अम्हे = भस्मा J. 6. 34 अम्हेहिं = अत्माभिः 1.6. 31 भम्होण = अघ्माक' J. 6. 33 भम्हो = अस्मा I. 6. 34 भम्होहि८") = अस्माभिः I. 6. 31 -अरन्त ( श्ीछाथं ) I. 5. 22 at ( eer) 1. 9. 3 भाहि ( निवारणे ) 1.9. 3 -भल्छ ( स्वाथ ) 1.5, 19 अवहद्‌ = (Sana) Pra IT, 2. 4 भवि = अपि 1.9.5 भविद्‌ ( fed? ) Pra II. 2.4 भग्वो ( सम्मावन-सूचनयोः ) 1. 9. 2 ag = अह्म्‌ 1. 6. 30 get ~= अहम्‌ 1. 6. 30 agin = भधन My II. 2. 14 अहनि = भधना Ps. IIT. 3.5 अहो ( भनुतपि ) 1. 9.7 होषि = vrata I. 7. 13 att ( वावत्‌ ) Si. 11. 3. 18 भाम ( mit) I. 9. 10 arena = अस्यत्र ~My. IT. 2 17 -आ्ट = मतुप I. १, 18 Tey = भारो My, Il. 2. 26 आति = आसीत्‌ I. 7. 13 हणं = इदम्‌ J. 6. 18 Pra. 11, 2. 4 gooi acc, and instr. sing Gag. -ga-= मतुप्‌ 1. 9. 1४ इद्‌ = इद्म्‌ nom " acc, sing. I. 6, 17 हृ = इह 5. 11. 1. 16 gray = इन्द्रनिव्‌ 9. II. 1. 38 हन्दाहणी' = इन्दराप्रीम्‌ Sak. 11. 8. 6 इम (हदम्‌ ) 1. 6. 18 -इम- 1. 5. 21 इमा (इदम्‌) 1. 6. 18 हर = feu 1.9.5 -gc = तृन्‌ I. 8. 22 -हह्ः 1. 5. 18, २। gaat = estat Sab. 11. 3. 18 ge (इदम्‌) 1. 6. 18 उत्थदि = afagfa ?. Ll. 1. 27 3 1. 9.9 उर्‌ = अरे Cand. 11. 3. 19. उकश्रछठादि = अपरति Mg. 11. 2. 22 sftaa = उत्थितः II. 2. 17. ॐ <= उप 1. 5. 8. ङग्‌ < श्व! I. 5. 22 ag 1. 5. 21 एदि = पहि Sab. II. 3. 91, Abb. 24, gu’ (gag) 1. 6. 19 एण्ि = इदानी 1. 5. 24 ; 9. 10; Meg. II. 9. 21 एत्थ = भत्र Sak, I. 8.6; 7. 8. 14. एवाण' = एतेषां 11. 3. 29, पदाद्‌ ॐ पतेषां Tak. II. 3. 29 एर्व = भत्र Mg. 1. 2. 1s पक्ति = पस Mg. Il, 2.25 धरे = एष Mg. 11. 18. 14. 15. 17.४0. 21, पशे > एतस्मिन्‌ Sak. 11. 3. 6 एव = एष॑! I. 6. 78. एतो = एष; J, 6. 18 Inpex भो ( सुचनातापयौः ) I. 9. 1 ato «1.5. 8. भोत्थमाणो = भविष्यत्‌ Pra. II. 2. 2 aieie=amia Mg. Il. 2. 25 भोहि =sqger Meg. LI. 2. 21 न~ 1, 9. 21 See = उत्प 1. 5. 24 कष्य = कव्‌ Me. II. 2. 30 करेण = करेणु >. 11. 1. 12 काणः = केषां Tak. Il. 3. 29 क दुष्वं = eed 5. II. 126, Big = STA 11, 1. 26 egoeuqCs. 11. 3. 14 काह (ह future) 17. 7 fe 1.7. 17;9.9 किणो 1.9.2 किर 1.9.5 fee 1.5.5 कोअभ = कोक 101. 11. 3. 24 कओ = कीचक Abh. II, 3. 24 कोस (aed ) I. 9, 2 gafseardt = gftaedt 11. 2. 24 Sale = कशे Sab. 11. 2 18 gem = कुरूणाम्‌ Mg. 11. 2. 17 कैष्ठभ = किक 53.11. 1.2 कोतिण = कोष्ण My. II. २, २ we = खलु 1.9. 5 लम्द्‌ =श्जुट 8.11. 1. 30 nfeant ° गर्भितं 3.11. 1, 5 शगरच्दि = गच्छति Mg. IJ. 2. 18 गेण्ड = प्रह. 8.11. 1, 28 mite = गोरिमक Me. ID. 2, 24 Tat = प्रस्यूष 1, ५, ५4 धर~ गृह 1.5.10 धि = गृहे Sab. IL. 3, 19 ददि = भाजजति 8.11. 1, 33 पेव्यदि < गद्यते \;. 11. 1. 2. 8 चतुरो = चतुर्‌ I. 6, 21 weft = चतुर I, 6. 21 चत्तारि 1. 6.21 घत्तारो = चतुर 1. 6, 21 faesfa = तिष्ठति 8. 711. 1, 27 चिअ = एव 1.9.2 eat = एव I, 9.9 BSH, छा 2.6.11 छिप्पदि = स्पृश्यते 5. II. 1. २9 चिबदि 8.11.1. 29 gafg oS. 11. 1. 29 जट्ट = यष्टि ;. 11.8 T= AW SI. 1.2 fig-mr £. II. 1. 29 जिण = जि S. LL. 1. 30 faq = यथा >. 11. 3. 26 fag = यथा Tak. I. 3. 30 जिषप्पदि = जोयते Ay. II. 2. 8 जहा ~-यथा 1.9.10 a ( पादपूरण ) 1. 9.6 जसि = यात्‌ >. II. 1. 36 aoem 1. 3. 27 क्षति = क्षटिति I. 9. 7 क्षतो = भटिति 1.9.7 णं 1. 6. 50 णडा = SB 1. 5. 24 णन्दुउत्त = नन्दपुत्र Sab. II. 3. 18 गकर कैव 1,9 5 गिरि = केष 1.9. 5 गिषाडिदे = निपातितः Mg. 11. 2. 15 ण॒ 1.9.4 णे 1.6.51, 33 णी 1. 9. 7 तह ( ह ) 1. 6. 25, 29 agar ( स्वत्‌ ) 1. 6. 26 - त = स्वच्ा 1. 6. 25 तण्ड = तत्र Sak. II. 3. 4 तं (et) I. 6.24 तसो = तिप्‌ 1.39.9 तती = त्वत्‌ I. 6, 26 ह्व तत्र Mg, Il. 2. 17, 3; 6 189 190 InpeEx तहा = AT 1.9. 20 gg ~ स्वे Tak. II. 3. 30 ताण = तेषां Ca, Tik. I. 3. 11 ; 3. 29 -तूण I. 5. 22 ताह ` = तेषां Tak. II. 3. 29 a 1.6. 25, 27 ति 1.9.2 तो 1.6. 26 तिण्णि (त्रि) 1.6, 20 तोण्ड = तुण्ड 8. 11. 1.2 तिध = तथा Abh. 1[. 2. 26 a 1. 5. 17 तिधं = तथा Tak. LI. 3. 30 fa(a) 13.7 at (fa) I. 6. 20 fa 11. 3. 24 तुन्त्वं I]. 3. 14 UB=eFYT bd. II. 1. 27 qt =aq 1. 6. 27 धुणदि = स्तोति ५. 11. 1. 31 Gea = युष्माकम्‌ [. 6. 24 थू ( वसने ) 1. 9. 4 पुच्छाहिन्तो, ०इन्तौ = युष्मम्प्रः I, 6. 97 ४इअ = दत्वा 5. 11. 1. 33 GPa (") (ुष्मदु) 1. 6. 27, 28 aecaig = दास्यति ४. 11. 1.33 Gren ८) (युष्पदु) 1. 6. 28 दरिसदि = दुशंयति उर. 11. 2. 7 ठुजक्ताहितो, ^छन्तो (युष्मद) |. 6. 27 दाढा = wet 1.5. २4 gee, (युष्म) 1. 6. 24, 25 दाव = तावत्‌ 5ik., Sab. If. 3. 4 EHS = युष्मा I. 6. 26 दावदि = दापयति ६.17. 1, 33 तुञ्कषषहि (") = युष्मेभ्पः 1. 6 26 दाह 1.5. 9 तुः 1. 6. 24 दाह 1.7 तु स्वं 1.9.5 दुभल्छभ › इउर्लभ' ae = दुक 1. 5. 5 arafe(") (वुष्मदु) I. 6. 26 दुप्पश्च = दुष्प्रेश्य Sik. 11. 3,8 धु" = 1. 1. 2 द 1.9.6 GR = युयं 11. 2. 23 ह 1.6. 25, 27 Gaz 1, 6. 25, 29 waste S00 14,11 तुम 16.2: दो (द्वि) J. 6. 20 तुमम्मि 1.6. 29 alien (fk) 1.6. 20 gar 1. 6. 26 धीदा = दुहिता LI, 2. 2 gafg 1. 6, 25 als gear 1.5. 24 Gara}, og, I. 6, 26 पोट = प्रको. 11. 1, 4 वुमाकि I. 6, 26 पुम = प्रथम 8.11. 1.5 पुमे I. 6. 25, 29 पध = पथं My. II. 2.17 gea(’) 1. 6. 29 qrgeat 1. 9. 8. gram’) 1, 6, 28 पछषाशसं = परिष्विष्ये 1८. 11, 2. 19 कम्माहिन्तो, वम्भाइन्तो I. 6. 27 fasafa 1. 8.7 gtx च. 6. 2५. 25 foset ॐ पितृष्वसा 1, 5, १4 gets I. 6, 29 पिब = इव 1.9. 6 arsife(’) I. 6, 26 [ रिलिल्छभो ] = fara: My. 1], 2, 98 guefen = घ्वी 11, Ca, 3. 15 पिभ रप्रिय SILI. 37 Sec) 1, 6. 27, एत = एम्‌, 8. 11, 1. 29 [भ एद = एथिदी 8.11.1. 5 em = eee 11. 2. 15 ; 3. 11-13 पन्व = प्रेक्षस्व Mo 11. 3, 18. 24 परू = पौरष ६. 11. 1. 4 पुणिश्जदि = श्ायते I, १.8 मे ~ मम 1. 6. 31.32 भुरक्ख = मूख Pra II. 2, 2 कोडभो = egies ६. 1. 1. 9 भहो = मष्टरक Abh, II. 3, 25 ava = भरत S. 10.1.5 WES भरत OL 2.12 भटक ॐ wes Me. II. 2, 27 निद्दभ ~= WETTH Me. IT, 2.6 fuze भीषम :. II. 1. 35 farafs = भिक्षते Sak. IT. 3. 6 शुक्ला = क्षुधा Mg, JI. 2, 2 qx i, 5. 21 aya 1.5. 91 HEN = HEAT 1, 5. 3] प्रतो = Heng 1, 6, 32 Hq [. 6.3) wd [. 6. 30 we 1. 6. 33 AN = RAG I. 9.9 मतो = अस्म्‌ 1. 6, 31 मम्ब 1. 5. | मम 1. 6.33 भममस्मि 1. 6.34 ममल्सि I. 6. 34 ममाह स्मया 7.6.53 भमादो = Hera 1, 6. 32 भमाह = मम 1. 6. 32 we ~ मम 1. 6. 33 महू 2 अस्मत्‌ IT. 3. 17. महकेर =agta 8. 1.1. 35 aexfen = any Cu. I. 3, 15 aft=aa I. 6. 32 at J. 6.30 माईेमा = माहा Mg. IT. ९. 24 मात्र = माकवतो 1. 5; 12 भामी = मातृष्वसा 1. 5. 94 मिव = दृश 1.9.6 मोऽव ~ मुष्तः My. IT, 2. 17 यण्ड~यत्र Sak. Tf. 3. 4 ame = पक्ष Me. 1. 2.16 येध्मध ~ जमत My. 17, 2.17 रे 1. 9.8 vise ( 8% future) I. 1. 7, 7 fern = रत्न Me. 11. 2, 23 fear = गणना Me. IT, 2. 23 an=@ 8.11. 1. 30 BURT = वृक्षेण Mo. WT. 2. 15 MES = छाहड S. 11, 1.8 धस्त [5.18 ated = बधिर I. 5. 6 agi =afez 1. 5, 6 atfgz I. 5.6 धा f.9.4 1. 5.7 fe बिण्णि (हि) I. 6. 20 विध = हष 1. 9. 6 धीत = विश्च 1. 1. 10 w=8 I. 6. 20 afin = ( fx) I. 6. 20 वो = युष्माकम्‌ 1. 6. 25, 28 wise = धच future 1. 7. 7 ey 1, 9. 4 शिश्न = सक्ष Sak. IT. 3. 3 शिष्टम्मि = शिरसि Sak. 71. 3. 4 सक्कदि = शक्नोति 8. II. 1. 32 सक्कुणदि = शक्नोति 3. II. 1. 32 afta = शनेः 1.9.7 धह = ae IT, 1. 35 agafa = सह £. II. 1.37 सहसोति = सह £. 11. 1. 37 एदि = स्वरिति ऽ. IT. 1. 81 उषिल्वदि = स्वयिल्यति 8. 11. 1.3 एष्वति = श्रुयते Av. II. 2. 8 191 192 INDEX ayes = wt future J. 7.7 ey 3.9.4 सोददोदणी = शोदोदनी ६. 17. 1. 38 दिडक्क = इय Mg. 11, 9. 22 SSH = EIT Suk. IT. 5. 8 feed J. 9.8 -ह- 1. 5. 19 हिरि 1.9.3 हं 1, 6. 30 हुं 1.9.5 हं 191 हुणवि = जहोति 8. 11. 1. 30 दग मन्त = इनुमान्‌ 1. 5. 18 हु शिशशादि = भविष्यति Mg. II. 2. 29 हणम = इवुमान्‌ J. 5. 18 qu 1. 9.8 ह्री = शाधि. 1.9. 4 हं 1. 9.1 है 1.9. 6, 8 sr 1. 9.8 इसु = अह Tak. IT. 3. 30 ह विदणि = श्सित्या Ma. II. 2. 20 इरे 1.9. 4 होस्थमागो = भविष्यत्‌ Pri. TI, 2.2 Roots ( Cu. VIII ) PRAKRIT*-SANSKRIT Wes = भत्‌ (16) SENIS, Baty = उत्‌.मीष्‌ (30) भजस्य > आ-गम्‌ (34) SBE = उव्‌-श्ुत्‌ (34) WA = आ-कष्‌ (30) sere = वि-मम्‌ (32) भवक्ख = इदा (23) उल व = उद्‌-ह्लु (18) भववाल = अव-कम्‌ (8 Comm.) SIR = 34-8 (14) भववाह = AI-ME (8 Comm. 24) Tag = AI-¥A, (33) HAA = SI-TE (38) THAN = कण्‌ (12) Barat = इष्‌ (41) भोग्गह = प्रति-दइष्‌ (41) afgaa = अभि-मू (1) array = उत्‌-घट (31) अहिषेम = अभि-मंज्‌ (32) atleug = स्थग (35) ` ASA = आ-रम्‌ (11) भोट्थदट = उलत्‌-ल्तृ (36) Rrot = wr (6) भध = Sa-9q (34) आटटुकख = CYT (29) भावि्मूभो = लाविभूतः (1) आहम्म = आ-गम्‌ (34) भोषाशिभि- = अवगाहम्‌ (8) stata = उत्‌-ङुश (33) कड = FI (27) Sue = उत्‌-नभू्‌ (32) कडठे = क्वथ (13) उद्धम = उत्‌.ध्मा (16) कग =क्र (4) उक्मव = उत्‌-भू (1) करिह = क्रियते (20) उब्भूओो = उदुभूतः (1) afta = SY (2) भोषास = अथ-कास्‌ (8) भोवाह = अवगाह (8, 24) wfa=sy (2) करे = छ (4) कहीअ = कथ ([0४७8.) (14) कहे = कथय (14) काभब्वं = कतंन्यम्‌ (4) SIS = क्तम्‌ (4) SIs = कृत्वा (4) काहीभ = अकरोत्‌ (4) काहोह्‌ = करिष्यति (4) fear = mt (8) कोरए्‌ = क्रियते (8) कोरा = कोड (?2)) कुण = ङु (4) खडर = खच्‌ (7) लम्म = खन्‌ (16) लाभ, खाट खाट्‌ (10) qea = परि-अप्‌ (31) खड = Faw (27) खन्द्‌, खद्‌ = स्खल्‌ , (27) qq >= प्ट्युष्‌ (25) Bq = मघ्ज्‌ (23) Gea = Be (26) गढ = घट्‌ (11) गम्म = गम्‌ (1158. (15) गल = सं-मीष्ु (30) mat =i (9) गिज्क्न = Tq (15) gag =fa-ge (38) US = उत्‌-नम्‌ (32) FR = TE (pass.) 21) गेण्ड = प्रह (21) गेहिभन्वं = ग्रहीकन्यम्‌ (21) qe = धट्‌ (11) धण = इदा (23) fia = प्रस्‌ (6) म्म = धूण (2) घेञ = ग्रह pass. (21) ध्वं = प्रहोतव्यम्‌ (21) p—9 ww INDEX Quo = गृहीत्वा (21) धेप्प = ग्रह (pass.) (21) धेड" = ग्रहीतुम्‌ (21) घोर = got (2) ara = अदु (12) चष्प = HY (30) Aes, चट 2 चष्ट (15) fant = fa (16) चम्म = HT-8E (31) fog = त्यज्‌ (25) BA = त्यजं (25) धिक = ETT (29) छितं 2 स्पृष्टम्‌ (29) छिप्प = स्पृश्‌ (29) छिव = aft-egs (29) छिषिअ' = स्पृष्टम्‌ (29) QUE = aft-az (37 ) जअ = जि (18) eq = जक्ष (13) HAA, जम्भाभ = जम्भ (5) Aro = aT (6) जाणीअ = AT (pass.) (6) fan जि (18) जिणिज्ञ = fa (pass-) (18) farsa = जि (18) MT = ज्‌ (pass) 7H = युध्‌ (15) जूर = HY (22) Ta = ध्या (9) AT = ध्या (9) farsa = far (+) SIH = SUT (9) sr=eur (9) €=st (13) ढष = HT-Ty (11) N= नृत्‌ (15) णज = AT (pass.) (9) 193 194 INDEX णिभ = est (93) Y > UT (13) णिअच्छ = शा (23) पभष्छ = प्र-खु (40) णिमज = fa-ae (6) qs = पत्‌ (13) निम्माण = निर-मा (10) QRS = प्र-स्कट्‌ (35) णिरन्थ, fern = नि-रध्‌ (12) पमीष्ठह = प्र-मील (16) णिवरिज्न = कथय्‌ (39) परिअश्चु = परि-भयूज (32) निव्वस = निष्पद (10) परिष = fa-ge ' 38) णिसुडणि-सष् (40) परिष्व = परि-भ (1) णम = छाद्‌ (3.5) ame = परि-अस्‌ (3-4) णे मी (13) ne = az (2) ag = ताडय (43) लर = शक (22) तिक्खाषट — fas (39) fara = तिम्‌ (25) तीर = AH (25) ae = sz (26) तड = az (26) gat = त्वर्‌ (1) तस = तुष (12) लोड = च्रट (26) थिप्प = तृप्‌ (7) थण = स्तु (30) थव = स्तु (350) ea = हहा ( णिच >) (21) ara = eet ( णिच >) (24) दिण्णं ~ दत्तम्‌ (21 ) दीस ~ दश ( pass. ) (24) दुष्पमव = दुव. प्रभू (1) दुर्भ = ष्ट. ( pass. ) (1) gra =F ( nass ) (17) दूस = दुष (12) % = ar (13) धष, धाव = धा (10) धुअ = ध (18) gee = शध (26) ya घु (18) za = ध (18) पहव = प्रभ (1) ag ओ = प्रभृत (1) पष्ोड = वि -ल्दुख (38 पिअरञ्ख = नि-भन्‌भ्‌ (32) पोर = ate (41) ges = Tes (33) पुरु = इश्च (23) Ga = पुष्‌ (24) Ja =F (23) qa = पुष्‌ (12) पेटक = प्र-हेर (28) पोखर = पुष्‌ (24) फस = स्पृशा (20) कणिद्छ = चोरय (27) फार = पारय (11) RE = Ste (15) RS = क्रम्‌ (30) ate = भो (7) aie = wat (7) Bes = HEY (22) Gen = बुध (15) वोट = qa ( 6) भणण = भण्‌ (15) awa wv (3) wrt = भी (7) area = भी (caus) (7) aTaNa = मी (caus) (7) भिन्द = भिद (14) fara = cyg (25) aia = wt (caus,) (7) भृव = म (1) Wa = at (caus,) (7) भेक्ताव = (caus.) (7) मभूर = चणय (36) afta = एष्‌ (2) मर = रदु (25) मह ~= इष्‌ (11) मुर = युष (21) Tag = राध्‌ (27) रम्भ = तक्ष्‌ (22) र्भ = ष्टु (11) goal = श्दितम्‌ (21) रन्ध = BI (2) हमभ = Bq (12) रव = az (11) रप = 8 (12) रश =र[ञ्‌ (21) ia = हद (11) BA = GBA (38) छार्प्प = fea (35) Biseq = wy (35) छरृम्म = BI (35) छाछम्ह = SY (35) दृष्ठ = gy (33) हण > श (18) B87 = हट ( pass.) (19) BE = एज्‌ (23) धश्च = तन्‌ (15) धज = त्रप्‌ (22) Sq = 34-48 (32) aes = वृध्‌ (14) ध्म = AE (pass.) (20) at = (3) feta = qs (2) Inpex 195 घरग्ग = आ-हृह (31) विकरिकिण = fam} (8) विक्के = विक्री (8) fawa = सेद्य (22) fag = day (6) विरमाण = ofa-qrs (41) fang = वि-कस्‌ (37) विसर = faz (29) facat = fa-eg (3) विषह = faeq (26) वीसर = faeg (3) य्‌ ज्ज = उत्‌-नमय (32) चढ़ = ae (13) धाच्च = वट्‌ (1६) बाह = आक्रम्‌ (3); ala = वद्‌ (16) संवह = Gaz (14) सक = शक्‌ (14) az = aq (13) सदह = भ्रत्‌-धा (7) स्प = सप्‌ (26) समीर — dws (16) Gales = dats (16) साह = कथय (39) सोभ = स्वप्‌ (24) Bua A (1४) BAT = स्थर (3) सोभ = स्वप्‌ (24) सो = स्वप्‌ (24) ह रिज = ह (pass.) (20) हरीअ = हू (pass.) (20) fgon = aq (4) हण = हु (18) हुष = भू (1) हो =म्‌ (1) 196 Sanskrit हास्या 84 Prakrit अअक्व्छार OX VIII जोकष्कार XVIII ey XVII Hindi मिदि 91 Bengali खारि athi 92 कं] kana 93 कक kandh 91 #124 kahan 98 यम kham 91 शठे 2070 131 INDEX घाल 210] 110 wiv chadan 141 (ल) क्र jokar AVIITI मर्‌ nach 91 ATA. pilam 92 faafafs pirthimi 151 व्‌]मन। Bamna 138 cam €] 91 वश्‌] ०९248 92 भ! mada 132 WHS machi 91 माका-वम्‌। maja-ghasa 124 (गट 111€€ 131 मिष्ट micha 91 (खं sey 91 Bala haray 125 Page IX » Xx » 6 i All » 7 » ~+ , 4 is XIV , 24 33 AV 9 29 » XVI, 17 99 X VIT 99 १ २४11 , 9 » AIX ,, ) XXII , 8 11 » "+, 8 9 » 19 99 I 9) 8 93 2 9 16 » ॐ » 1 os 9 99 4 9) 6 3) 10 9) 7 % 8 9) 8 १? % a) 10 33 11 99 11 + 4 १) 10 99 12 99 13 , 17 9१ 0 ११ 13 9 | , 14 ^ ४ » 16 » 16 16 » 3 Corrections and Additions line 4 (from the bottom ) read Sakha III. Read after 1928: Also see in this connexion Dr. M. Sahidullah’s comment on Grierson’s paper. I.Ant. 1997, p. 224. (from the bottom ) vead Appendix II. yead work for 118. put a comma afler Markandeya. 9 (from the bottom ) omz?t of. véad omissions. „, मतमधश्चुदधम्‌. „ Seat यादृ, नबोद्धतम्‌. 1 omit though. (from the bottom ) read seems to for seem to. 15 vead quotations. ( from the bottom ) read ENT, ( 3) ” ) ^ TRIO] for TRIN ( 5 » ) 9, Of different for os different, ॥ ५, ) vead to emend because for to emend garbhita because. read BRWEA for AREA परस्य » समूहनीयाः jor समृहनीयः. ,, क्तोऽपित० for अतोऽपित, omit hyphen after SAN. (from the bottom ) read Alege. read fiat for faz. „, बच्छो for aset. » प्रकोष्ठे for Tate. a: for A, *हख्या० for ASAT. खष्य for YET, », BEE for छह, » ONEBAY for arEwart. ( from the bottom ) read easy for Fear. read the heading as [ वृत्तीयस्तबके युक्तविघानम्‌ ]. read watemar for aafemar. » eaferar. read the heading 85 qrafqarny. line 19 ( from the bottom ) read afaer} for afte भो. read स्तम्बभिन्ने for वह्तम्बनिष्ने, last line read watta for afta, 198 Page 17 19 20 21 22 23 40) 42 99 33 9१ CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS 12 vead अत्तत्‌ for AAA. 4 (from the bottom ) read afgqr yor धिपे. 4 read पुष्यमिह for पूष्यमिह 18 4, [ कण्णेभारो ] for [ कण्णेरो J. 11 ,, सरोज for aca’. 3 , featat_ for मिनो, 4 , दक्खडाषहो for दक्षे-डहि. 11 ,, पुर्‌ ठ for gee. 19 ,, क्रियमाणो बिन्दु. 24 , wat विसगश्व. 4 (from the bottom ) ८14 रससि. bd > bc » ) read 4n, teat, 5 n. रसृषि 6 (4 1» ) read वषटहअ for ASE. 7 ( 99 95 ) TEQ a faze ; ] 1 read दुर्‌. ट 18 ,, तत्तदेश्चीय for BMagsha. ४ „. BEM for wer. 11 (from the bottom । at हसोनाम्‌ for भ्यस्‌ इसीनाम्‌. HM » ¬ read ala भ्यसि स्यात्‌ for जदि शसि स्यात्‌. 4 omit the danda after आतोऽनदातो. 7 (from the bottom ) read antfaah 3 7éda पिक्ष्वरोता 4 ,;, घामन्ध्रणे 5 ( from the bottom ) read भाश for भागा 4 ( 9. 9 ) भा सौ for बातो. 5 read ae Sor Ten’. 14 ,, TAT for TRF. 15 ,, Gat gare’, 2 ( from the bottam ) read zea for दष्वश्र © 3, 9, rad wari: for श्पाणि, 5 read an’ fa’ for ममः only, 19 ,, अमृह्ाहिन्तो. vead the heading as fagea विधानम्‌ 1110९ 9) 99 9) 12 read धाल्योहि° tor धास्स्षयो हि9. 13 ,, शोपस्तकाराश्च. 16 ,, भाघ्योरिति 21 „ ज्जो ्जाहि./ esate. 17 ,, अग्रहीत्‌ for भगुह्धी््‌ and भग्रहोषव्‌ for भप्रहीध्य॑त्‌. 2 Omit @ before है, 12 read otitsft: fer गौरि). Page 42 99 43 44 46 48 49 50 51 9 53 64 66 67 68 69 72 83 92 111 112 118 CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS 199 line 14 + WER Sor कद्‌ +» last 02४ 1 mss. भण. 4, 8 read ह्था-ध्या० for ध्टाध्या 15 ,, areal for घादेष्वौ. 19 =,» Renee. 6 (from the bottom ) r¢ad CUS: jor GS. Dt " ) ” छदा for Akt. 10 (3 , ) 2, aera. 10 read तुभ for qa. 14 ,, Ber for चुर $ ,, शरेषु for Geage: 18 ,, धुः" कुत्सने for थुः कुषसने ;?. 18 ,, एते घञ्व धा कथिता for एते "भव व्वा कथिता 4 (from the bottom ) read तह्य for त्याः 3 ( from the bottom ) oz? 1 2, om. 5 read COR . 8 read सोद्धोदगी. 18 *' fafarsary, 14 `` हधाऽकक्रतया 6 ( from the bottom ) read fafirerrfez शो 9५८ ” " ) ›' घग्यंह्य जस्यात्र for वरस्य यत्या. 8 read Bean ^ ¢ कुष्ण . 16 ”” पषिशृशशशश . 21 "' इचि 2 इहि. 11 ` स्याह ध्यत्ययः. 13 " पेशाचिकधी०. 15 ` QS fur यण्ट. 6 ger परेऽपि. 5 ( from the bottom ) read इटर gts for ee तुष 6( 3, +, ) read MU for at. 7 ( ११ 99 ) हेहि for ङेः 16 dead arget for साहूरिः. 8 read (22) for 2 (2) and aad at the bottom the following : and so also the first line. line 10 2८4८ Pu. III. 1. 9) 99 33 3? 2 ,, uad-dhma for ud-dham. 14 ,, 25574 » 2024. 14 ,, @h for da. last ,, 22 5, 4. 1 ;, 24 for fend. 200 Page 114 fs 115 115 120 127 142 143 144 145 146 147 151 152 153 168 167 182 183 CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS linen 4 ,, tiva ,, 1204, » 8 4 &sudh,, krudh. » 15 ), ९८72, khuda. » 18 :, 1725, 1120, » 7 ( from the bottom ) read ४८ for mil. » dC + » ) w 50794 tor ulludha, 5 +) 2m for limya, 2) १.) » 92 4, 22 ,, VATU. " 2 *" # 80 abhi ” 25 ” avasaa. ” last ’’ in the case of a. 9? 99 '` Pu. XI. 7 for Pu. XI. "` 18 after [ thus ] add for bala. » 10 vead For the suffix ka we have hw’ for Sometimes we...[ in this case ] », 11 read vrksako'troccah for vrkso'troccah. 18 add ‘vanatin’ after we have ` 27 read‘ balahim’” ” 28 |” vahthim * 35 ” ‘ham’ for ham * 36 "hum! for *hune' » 8 read [ nadyih | 8 " hu for ha * 2 ( from the bottom ) vahkthe 7 9C ” ” ) 710८ for jene ; yuddhe for yena. ` 11( ” " ) 21545 ca. 19 read sadrum ” 5 (from the bottom ) omit are and read go back for misreading. , 6(from the bottom ) read to jsatra and fatra; instead of to yahu and fahu. » 8 read These for There. )» last but one ; read 83 after 82. + 15 put 2 after Pu. XIX. and abso put 5 before Mk. XIX, » 18 read XX for XIX. » 20 „++ hun: for ahunr. * 2 *endin ८ for end ini. ” 90 ” 28 for 24. » 7 ” हति पुरुषोत्तमल्यापएन्नशानुशासने + 4 ( from the bottom ) 4 read माणंसिणी I. 1. 6; 9. " 24 ” dita for बृहत लाल बहादुर शास्त्री रष्टरोय प्रशासन अकादमी, पुस्तकालय Lal Bahadur Shastri National Academy of Administration Library Fz LY MUSSOORIE HAA Ao कृपया इस पुस्तक को निम्नलिखित दिनाक या gaa पहले वापस कर दं । Please return this book on or before the date last stamped below. | उधारकता दनक उधारकर्ता दिनाक को संख्या ॥ को सख्या Date Borrower’s Date Borrower's No, 7 No. a ha tll GL SANS 491.35 ET LBSNAA 60५4८ 491.35 रामा अवाप्ति To ACC, No वगं a. Tah सं. CASS 0 BOOK NO. कथ re Author... ९.1 ममरण शोषंक Title.. AY DONTE mo cccnesesee Sai _ 1 IATL LAL Accession N, _ 12. 1, Books are is LES ly 22. 1 &y have to ७6.५०५ for 15 Yr “quired. recalled earlier + md but Urgen. f2 3. Books May b ° Char ged. aise por day per 19010818 i. Librarian (०१५७९१, ag th in the 1०५ end ®ference b 8}. = 7}, be cong, COKE ma Ulted ons y